You are on page 1of 412

MiCOM P220

Motor protection

Technical Guide
P220/EN T/B43

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN T/B43 Page 1/2

MOTOR PROTECTION MiCOM P220 CONTENT


Safety Section Getting Started Connection Diagram Technical Data Application Guide User Guide Menu of the HMI Communication Default Setting Value Installation Guide Commissioning and Maintenance Test Report Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 P220/EN GS/B43 P220/EN CO/B43 P220/EN TD/B43 P220/EN AP/B43 P220/EN FT/B43 P220/EN HI/B43 P220/EN GC/B43 P220/EN SV/B43 P220/EN IN/B43 P220/EN CM/B43 P220/EN RS/B43

P220/EN T/B43 Page 2/2

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11

SAFETY SECTION

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 1/10

CONTENTS
1. 2. 3.
3.1 3.2

INTRODUCTION HEALTH AND SAFETY SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT
Symbols Labels

3 3 4
4 4

4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY
Protective fuse rating Protective Class Installation Category Environment

4 7 7 7
7 7 7 8

8. 9.

CE MARKING RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA

8 9

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 2/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 3/10

1.

INTRODUCTION
This guide and the relevant operating or service manual documentation for the equipment provide full information on safe handling, commissioning and testing of this equipment and also includes descriptions of equipment label markings. Documentation for equipment ordered from AREVA Energy Automation & Information is despatched separately from manufactured goods and may not be received at the same time. Therefore this guide is provided to ensure that printed information normally present on equipment is fully understood by the recipient. Before carrying out any work on the equipment the user should be familiar with the contents of this Safety Guide. Reference should be made to the external connection diagram before the equipment is installed, commissioned or serviced. Language specific, self-adhesive User Interface labels are provided in a bag for some equipment.

2.

HEALTH AND SAFETY


The information in the Safety Section of the equipment documentation is intended to ensure that equipment is properly installed and handled in order to maintain it in a safe condition. It is assumed that everyone who will be associated with the equipment will be familiar with the contents of that Safety Section, or this Safety Guide. When electrical equipment is in operation, dangerous voltages will be present in certain parts of the equipment. Failure to observe warning notices, incorrect use, or improper use may endanger personnel and equipment and cause personal injury or physical damage. Before working in the terminal strip area, the equipment must be isolated. Proper and safe operation of the equipment depends on appropriate shipping and handling, proper storage, installation and commissioning, and on careful operation, maintenance and servicing. For this reason only qualified personnel may work on or operate the equipment. Qualified personnel are individuals who are familiar with the installation, commissioning, and operation of the equipment and of the system to which it is being connected; are able to safely perform switching operations in accordance with accepted safety engineering practices and are authorised to energize and de-energize equipment and to isolate, ground, and label it; are trained in the care and use of safety apparatus in accordance with safety engineering practices; are trained in emergency procedures (first aid). The operating manual for the equipment gives instructions for its installation, commissioning, and operation. However, the manual cannot cover all conceivable circumstances or include detailed information on all topics. In the event of questions or specific problems, do not take any action without proper authorization. Contact the appropriate AREVA technical sales office and request the necessary information.

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 4/10 Safety Section

3.

SYMBOLS AND EXTERNAL LABELS ON THE EQUIPMENT


For safety reasons the following symbols and external labels, which may be used on the equipment or referred to in the equipment documentation, should be understood before the equipment is installed or commissioned.

3.1

Symbols

Caution: refer to equipment documentation

Caution: risk of electric shock

Protective Conductor (*Earth) terminal.

Functional/Protective Conductor Earth terminal Note This symbol may also be used for a Protective Conductor (Earth) terminal if that terminal is part of a terminal block or sub-assembly e.g. power supply. *NOTE: 3.2 Labels See "Safety Guide" (SFTY/4L M) for equipment labelling information. THE TERM EARTH USED THROUGHOUT THIS GUIDE IS THE DIRECT EQUIVALENT OF THE NORTH AMERICAN TERM GROUND.

4.

INSTALLING, COMMISSIONING AND SERVICING


Equipment connections Personnel undertaking installation, commissioning or servicing work for this equipment should be aware of the correct working procedures to ensure safety. The equipment documentation should commissioning or servicing the equipment. be consulted before installing,

Terminals exposed during installation, commissioning and maintenance may present a hazardous voltage unless the equipment is electrically isolated. Any disassembly of the equipment may expose parts at hazardous voltage, also electronic parts may be damaged if suitable electrostatic voltage discharge (ESD) precautions are not taken. If there is unlocked access to the rear of the equipment, care should be taken by all personnel to avoid electric shock or energy hazards. Voltage and current connections should be made using insulated crimp terminations to ensure that terminal block insulation requirements are maintained for safety. To ensure that wires are correctly terminated the correct crimp terminal and tool for the wire size should be used. The equipment must be connected in accordance with the appropriate connection diagram.

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Protection Class I Equipment Before energising the equipment it must be earthed using the protective conductor terminal, if provided, or the appropriate termination of the supply plug in the case of plug connected equipment. The protective conductor (earth) connection must not be removed since the protection against electric shock provided by the equipment would be lost. Page 5/10

The recommended minimum protective conductor (earth) wire size is 2.5 mm (3.3 mm for North America) unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation, or otherwise required by local or country wiring regulations. The protective conductor (earth) connection must be low-inductance and as short as possible. All connections to the equipment must have a defined potential. Connections that are pre-wired, but not used, should preferably be grounded when binary inputs and output relays are isolated. When binary inputs and output relays are connected to common potential, the pre-wired but unused connections should be connected to the common potential of the grouped connections. Before energising the equipment, the following should be checked: Voltage rating/polarity (rating label/equipment documentation); CT circuit rating (rating label) and integrity of connections; Protective fuse rating; Integrity of the protective conductor (earth) connection (where applicable); Voltage and current rating of external wiring, applicable to the application.

Equipment Use If the equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may be impaired. Removal of the equipment front panel/cover Removal of the equipment front panel/cover may expose hazardous live parts which must not be touched until the electrical power is removed. UL and CSA Listed or Recognized Equipment To maintain UL and CSA approvals the equipment should be installed using UL and/or CSA Listed or Recognized parts of the following type: connection cables, protective fuses/fuseholders or circuit breakers, insulation crimp terminals, and replacement internal battery, as specified in the equipment documentation. Equipment operating conditions The equipment should be operated within the specified electrical and environmental limits. Current transformer circuits Do not open the secondary circuit of a live CT since the high voltage produced may be lethal to personnel and could damage insulation. Generally, for safety, the secondary of the line CT must be shorted before opening any connections to it. For most equipment with ring-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination has automatic CT shorting on removal of the module. Therefore external shorting of the CTs may not be required, the equipment documentation should be checked to see if this applies. For equipment with pin-terminal connections, the threaded terminal block for current transformer termination does NOT have automatic CT shorting on removal of the module.

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 6/10 Safety Section External resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs) Where external resistors, including voltage dependent resistors (VDRs), are fitted to the equipment, these may present a risk of electric shock or burns, if touched. Battery replacement Where internal batteries are fitted they should be replaced with the recommended type and be installed with the correct polarity to avoid possible damage to the equipment, buildings and persons. Insulation and dielectric strength testing Insulation testing may leave capacitors charged up to a hazardous voltage. At the end of each part of the test, the voltage should be gradually reduced to zero, to discharge capacitors, before the test leads are disconnected. Insertion of modules and pcb cards Modules and pcb cards must not be inserted into or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised, since this may result in damage. Insertion and withdrawal of extender cards Extender cards are available for some equipment. If an extender card is used, this should not be inserted or withdrawn from the equipment whilst it is energised. This is to avoid possible shock or damage hazards. Hazardous live voltages may be accessible on the extender card. Insertion and withdrawal of integral heavy current test plugs It is possible to use an integral heavy current test plug with some equipment. CT shorting links must be in place before insertion or removal of heavy current test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. External test blocks and test plugs Great care should be taken when using external test blocks and test plugs such as the MMLG, MMLB and MiCOM P990 types, hazardous voltages may be accessible when using these. *CT shorting links must be in place before the insertion or removal of MMLB test plugs, to avoid potentially lethal voltages. *Note when a MiCOM P992 Test Plug is inserted into the MiCOM P991 Test Block, the secondaries of the line CTs are automatically shorted, making them safe. Fibre optic communication Where fibre optic communication devices are fitted, these should not be viewed directly. Optical power meters should be used to determine the operation or signal level of the device. Cleaning The equipment may be cleaned using a lint free cloth dampened with clean water, when no connections are energised. Contact fingers of test plugs are normally protected by petroleum jelly which should not be removed.

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 7/10

5.

DECOMMISSIONING AND DISPOSAL


Decommissioning: The supply input (auxiliary) for the equipment may include capacitors across the supply or to earth. To avoid electric shock or energy hazards, after completely isolating the supplies to the equipment (both poles of any dc supply), the capacitors should be safely discharged via the external terminals prior to decommissioning. Disposal: It is recommended that incineration and disposal to water courses is avoided. The equipment should be disposed of in a safe manner. Any equipment containing batteries should have them removed before disposal, taking precautions to avoid short circuits. Particular regulations within the country of operation, may apply to the disposal of batteries.

6.

EQUIPMENT WHICH INCLUDES ELECTROMECHANICAL ELEMENTS


Electrical adjustments It is possible to change current or voltage settings on some equipment by direct physical adjustment e.g. adjustment of a plug-bridge setting. The electrical power should be removed before making any change, to avoid the risk of electric shock. Exposure of live parts Removal of the cover may expose hazardous live parts such as relay contacts, these should not be touched before removing the electrical power.

7.
7.1

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR SAFETY


Protective fuse rating The recommended maximum rating of the external protective fuse for equipments is 16A, high rupture capacity (HRC) Red Spot type NIT, or TIA, or equivalent, unless otherwise stated in the technical data section of the equipment documentation. The protective fuse should be located as close to the unit as possible. DANGER CTs must NOT be fused since open circuiting them may produce lethal hazardous voltages.

7.2

Protective Class IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Class I (unless otherwise specified in the equipment documentation). This equipment requires a protective conductor (earth) connection to ensure user safety.

7.3

Installation Category IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Installation Category III (Overvoltage Category III): Distribution level, fixed installation. Equipment in this category is qualification tested at 5kV peak, 1.2/50s, 500, 0.5J, between all supply circuits and earth and also between independent circuits

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 8/10 7.4 Environment The equipment is intended for indoor installation and use only. If it is required for use in an outdoor environment then it must be mounted in a specific cabinet or housing which will enable it to meet the requirements of IEC 60529 with the classification of degree of protection IP54 (dust and splashing water protected). Pollution Degree Pollution Degree 2 Altitude operation up to 2000 m IEC 61010-1: 2001 EN 61010-1: 2001 Compliance is demonstrated by reference to safety standards. Safety Section

8.

CE MARKING
Marking Product safety: Low Voltage Directive - 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC EN 61010-1: 2001 EN 60950-1: 2001 EN 60255-5: 2001 IEC 60664-1: 2001 Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (EMC) 89/336/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC. The following Product Specific Standard was used to establish conformity: EN 50263 : 2000 Where applicable : The equipment is compliant with Article 1(2) of European directive 94/9/EC. It is approved for operation outside an ATEX hazardous area. It is however approved for connection to Increased Safety, Ex e, motors with rated ATEX protection, Equipment Category 2, to ensure their safe operation in gas Zones 1 and 2 hazardous areas. CAUTION Equipment with this marking is not itself suitable for operation within a potentially explosive atmosphere. Compliance demonstrated by Notified Body certificates of compliance. Radio and Telecommunications Terminal Equipment (R & TTE) directive 95/5/EC. Compliance demonstrated by compliance to the Low Voltage Directive, 73/23/EEC amended by 93/68/EEC, down to zero volts, by reference to safety standards. Compliance with all Community directives: relevant European

Compliance demonstrated by reference to safety standards.

Compliance demonstrated via the Technical Construction File route.

II (2) G

ATEX Potentially Explosive Atmospheres directive 94/9/EC, for equipment.

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Safety Section Page 9/10

9.

RECOGNIZED AND LISTED MARKS FOR NORTH AMERICA


CSA - Canadian Standards Association UL - Underwriters Laboratory of America

UL Recognized to UL (USA) requirements UL Recognized to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements UL Listed to UL (USA) requirements

UL Listed to UL (USA) and CSA (Canada) requirements

Certified to CSA (Canada) requirements

Pxxxx/EN SS/B11 Page 10/10 Safety Section

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43

Getting Started

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 1/22

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2

RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT


Reception of the relay Electrostatic discharge (ESD)

3
3 3

2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT INSTALLING THE RELAYS UNPACKING STORAGE INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220
MiCOM series relay MiCOM P220 Functions Front view Relay rear description

3 4 4 4 5
5 6 7 9

7. 8.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.4

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES


Check the wiring of your installation Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220 OP PARAMETERS Menu CONFIGURATION Menu COMMUNICATION Menu PROTECTION G 1 Menu COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220

10 11
11 11 12 12 14 19 19 21

9.

COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION

22

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 2/22

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 3/22

1.
1.1

RECEPTION OF THE PRODUCT


Reception of the relay Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible. Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective polyethylene packaging.

1.2

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Relays use components sensitive to electrostatic discharges. The electronic circuits are well protected by the metal housing. Consequently, the internal module must not be taken out pointlessly. When handling the module outside its housing, be very careful to avoid any contact with electrical connections and components. If it is removed from its housing for storage, the module must be placed in electrically conductive antistatic packaging. No configuration setting is possible in the module. We therefore advise you not to dismantle it pointlessly. The printed circuit boards are interconnected. They are not designed for disconnection by the user. Avoid touching the printed circuit boards. They are made with complementary metal-oxide semiconductors (CMOS) and the static electricity discharged by the human body has an adverse effect on them.

2.

HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT


The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration. Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the reliability of the circuit. Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the modules out of their housings. Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your electrostatic potential. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the printed circuit conductors and the connectors. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for example to balance your electrostatic potential Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface with the same potential as yourself. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.

3. 4. 5.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 4/22

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 k and 10 M. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is possible. For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.

3.

INSTALLING THE RELAYS


The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated, position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle. The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in the corresponding sales publication (N 1550-B).

4.

UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is taking place on the same site.

5.

STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton. As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced. The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 C and + 70 C.

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 5/22

6.
6.1

INTRODUCTION TO MiCOM P220


MiCOM series relay The range of MiCOM protection relays follows on from the success of the MIDOS, K and MODN ranges by incorporating the last changes in digital technology. The MiCOM P220 is fully compatible and use the same modular box concept. MiCOM P220 provides more protection elements for the most demanding applications. This relay has a large number of control functions and collecting data. This can form part of a fully integrated system covering protection, control, measurements data acquisition and recording of faults, events, and disturbances. The relay is equipped on the front panel with a liquid crystal display (LCD) with 2x16 back-lit alphanumerical characters, a tactile 7 push keypad (to gain access to all the parameters, alarms and measurements) and 8 LEDs simply displaying the state of the relay. In addition, the use of the RS485 communication port makes it possible to read, reinitialise and change the settings of the relay, if required, from a local or remote PC computer equipped with appropriate software. Its flexibility of use, reduced maintenance requirements and ease of integration allow the MiCOM P220 to provide an evolving solution for the problems of the protection of motors.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 6/22 6.2 MiCOM P220 Functions Function [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT [46] UNBALANCE [48] EXCESS LONG START [51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR [37] LOSS OF LOAD [49/38] RTD (optional) [49] THERMISTANCE (optional) [66] START NUMBER MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS EMERGENCY START RE-ACCELERATION. AUTORISATION SETTING GROUPS MEASUREMENTS (True RMS + direct Current, indirect + MAX Value ) PROCESS MENU Circuit Breaker SUPERVISION Circuit Breaker MONITORING TRIP STATISTICS LATCHING RELAYS AND LOGIC EQUATIONS FAULTS RECORDS EVENTS RECORDS DISTURBANCE RECORDS COMMUNICATION PORT FRONT PANEL (RS232) COMMUNICATION PORT REAR FACE (RS485)

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

MiCOM P220 X X X X X X X X X X X X X 2 X X X X X X X X X X X X

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220 6.3 Front view

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 7/22

The front panel is described in figure 1. Extra physical protection for the front panel can be provided by an optional transparent front cover. This allows read access only to the relay settings and data but does not affect the relay IP rating. When full access to the relay keypad is required, for editing the settings, the transparent cover can be unclipped and removed when the top and bottom covers are open.

P0176ENb

FIGURE 1 - RELAY FRONT VIEW

The front panel of the relay includes the following, as indicated in the figure1: a 16 character by 2-line alphanumeric liquid crystal display (LCD) a 7-Keypad comprising 4 arrow keys (!, ", #, $,.an ENTER key %, a CLEAR key &, and a READ key '). 8 LEDs ; 4 fixed function LEDs and 4 programmable function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel. Under the top hinged cover: The relay serial number, and the relay voltage rating information (see figure 3 in this chapter)

Under the bottom hinged cover: battery compartment to hold the AA size battery which is used for memory back-up for event, fault and disturbance records. A 9 pin female D-type front port for communication with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) via a RS232 serial data connection (SK1 port).

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 8/22

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

The fixed function LEDs on the left hand side of the front panel are used to indicate the following conditions: LEDs LED 1 Colour RED Labels TRIP Significance LED 1 indicates when a trip order has been issued by the relay to the cut-off element (circuit breaker, contactor). This LED recopies the trip order issued to the trip output contact (RL1). Its normal state is unlit. It will light as soon as a trip order is issued. It goes out when the associated alarm is acknowledged (by pushing the & key). Upon detection of a fault (thermal O/V) or an alarm (CB state) by MiCOM P220 relay, the LED will start flashing. After reading of the alarm(s) message(s) by pressing the ' key, the LED will change from flashing to constant illumination, and will extinguish when all the alarms are cleared (Key &). The alarms are either threshold crossings (instantaneous), or tripping orders (time delayed). LED 3 is dedicated to the internal alarms of MiCOM P220 relays. When a non critical internal alarm (typically communication Fault) is detected, the LED flashes continuously. When the fault is classified as critical, the LED is illuminated continuously. The extinction of this LED is only possible by the disappearance of the cause that caused its function (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault). LED 4 indicates that MiCOM P220 relays are working correctly. These LEDs can be programmed by the user on the basis of information on available thresholds (instantaneous and time-delayed). The user selects the information he wishes to see associated with a LED. Each LED illuminates when the associated information is valid. The extinction of each LED is linked to the acknowledgement of the associated alarms.

LED 2

Yellow

Alarm

LED 3

Orange

Warning

LED 4 LED 5 to LED 8

Green Red

Healthy Aux1 to Aux4

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220 6.4 Relay rear description
Connector 1 OPTION: This connector (Orange) is designed for the use of - 6 RTD or 2 Thermistances. - Analogical Output.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 9/22

Connector 2

P0177ENa

FIGURE 2 - MiCOM P220 RELAY REAR VIEW

Connector 1 Common TC4 TC4 (NC) TC4 (NO) Common TC5 TC5 (NC) TC5 (NO) Input L3 (+) Input L3 ( - ) Input L4 (+) Input L4 ( - ) Input L5 (+) Input L5 ( - ) 1 3 5 7 9 Common TC1 TC1 (NC) TC1 (NO) Common TC2 TC2 (NC) 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 IA (Input Ph.A /5 amps) IB (Input Ph.B /5 amps) IC (Input Ph.C /5 amps) I0 (E/F input) (5 amps) IA (Input Ph.A /1 amp) IB (Input Ph.B /1 amp) IC (Input Ph.C /1 amp) I0 (E/F input) (1 amp) Case Earth RS485 (+) Auxiliary Supply (+) WD (NO) WD (NC)

Connector 2 29 RS485 (Resistance) 31 RS485 (-) 33 Auxiliary Supply (-) 35 Common WD 37 39 30 32 34 36 38 40

11 TC2 (NO) 13 Common TC3 15 TC3 (NC) 17 TC3 (NO) 19 21 Input L1 (+) 23 Input L1 ( - ) 25 Input L2 (+) 27 Input L2 ( - ) NOTE:

41 Common IA 42 (Ph.A/ 5 amps) 43 Common IB (Ph.B/ 5 amps) 44

45 Common IC 46 (Ph.C/ 5 amps) 47 Common E/F (5 amps) 49 Common IA (Ph.A/ 1 amp) 51 Common IB (Ph.B/ 1 amp) 53 Common IC (Ph.C/ 1 amp) 55 Common E/F (1 amp) 48 50 52 54 56

The terminals of MiCOM P220 are represented with power supply off.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 10/22

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

7.

PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION
Prior to applying power, unclip the top cover and check that the model number of the relay listed on the front panel (top left) corresponds to the model ordered.

P220 C00M11100
No. 2501511 0,002 - 1 Ion

CE
Cde 37982/007 Modbus

Vx 130 - 250Vcc / 100 - 250Vca


P0178ENa

FIGURE 3 - TECHNICAL INFORMATION

The significance of each information is described below: P220 C00M11100 : cortec code. In particular, this code allows the user to know what is the protocol used for remote communications (code 1 means MODBUS). No 2501511 and Cde 37982/007: these numbers are the serial number and the reference number of the order: they are necessary in case of problems. 0.002 1 Ion : This is referred to the sensibility of the E/F current input. Modbus: Communication protocol available through the rear RS485 communication port. Vx 130 250Vdc / 100 250Vac : Power supply range . In this example, the power supply can be either ac or dc voltage.

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 11/22

8.

STARTING THE MiCOM P220 IN 5 MINUTES


The object of this chapter is to enable you to make the MiCOM P220 operational in 5 minutes before starting the motor.

8.1

Check the wiring of your installation First check that you have thoroughly taken note of Handling and Safety, chapter T00. Check that the wiring of your installation is in compliance with the connection diagram shown in chapter.2 Check that the output relay No. 1 (terminals 2-4-6) is correctly inserted into the trip circuit of the breaking device. Verify that the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is correctly connected to an o/o interlock copying the position of the breaking device.

8.2

Connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage Before energising the MiCOM P220 relay, check that the electrical characteristics of the MiCOM P220* protection correspond to those of the auxiliary voltage of the installation. Switch on the auxiliary source. Push the live part of the MiCOM P220 relay into its housing. Once the relay is plugged in and the auxiliary source is energised, the green LED marked "Healthy" (or "Uaux" in French) should light up. This is the 4th LED down from the top.
THE EXTRACTION OF THE ACTIVE PART OUT OF THE CASE COULD BE DONE BY OPENING THE TWO FLAPS (THE UPPER AND THE LOWER), THEN WITH A SCREWDRIVER OF 3MM,BY MAKING A SWIVEL OF THE EXTRACTOR LOCATED UNDER THE UPPER FLAP AND FINALLY BY EXERTING A TRACTION ON THE TWO NOTCHES SITUED BEHIND THESE SHUTTERS. (IT IS NECESSARY - AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP).

ATTENTION :

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 12/22 8.3 8.3.1 MINIMUM CONFIGURATION TO START UP THE MiCOM P220 OP PARAMETERS Menu

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

8.3.1.1 Activation of the parameter mode From the default display of the menu which appears when connecting the MiCOM P220 relay to the auxiliary voltage, double click on the " button, the PASSWORD cell appears. OP PARAMETERS

PASSWORD = **** Click on the % button, and the flashing cursor appears. The following cell appears: PASSWORD =

AAAA

There are two possibilities: The relay leaves the factory with the default password AAAA. Press the % button again. The following message appears for 2 seconds to indicate that the password has been entered correctly. The MiCOM relay thus goes into parameterisation mode.

PASSWORD OK If a password other than the AAAA has already been loaded since MiCOM P220 relay left the factory, enter this new password by using the buttons %, $,! and ". After the validation of the new password using the % button, the cell below appears for 2 seconds. The MiCOM P220 relay goes thus into the parameterisation mode.

PASSWORD OK NOTE : The parameterisation mode is deactivated if no button has been pressed for 5 minutes. If the relay was already in parameterisation mode when the password was entered; the cell AAAA will be replaced by NEW PASSWORD OK

PASSWORD =

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220 8.3.1.2 Indication of the motor frequency

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 13/22

Once the password is confirmed, press the " button 4 times. The following cell appears: FREQUENCY =

50 Hz

Then there are two possibilities: If the motor has a rated frequency of 50Hz, do nothing. If the motor has a rated frequency of 60Hz, then press the % button.

A flashing cursor appears under the 0 of the term 50 Hz. FREQUENCY = 50 Hz Press the ! button, and the cell below appears: FREQUENCY = 60 Hz Confirm this by pressing the % button.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 14/22 8.3.2 CONFIGURATION Menu

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

After having entered the motor frequency, press the ! button 5 times. The following menu heading appears: OP PARAMETERS Press the $ button, and the heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears: CONFIGURATION

8.3.2.1 CONFIG SELECT Submenu Press the " button once. The heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu appears: CONFIG SELECT Selection of the type of analog output This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option. Starting with the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times, and the following cell appears : ANALOG. OUTPUT 0 - 20 mA Two possibilities arise: If you need an analog output signal on a 0-20 mA current loop, do nothing If you need an analog output signal on a 4-20 mA current loop, press % button and then the ! button.

The following cell appears: ANALOG. OUTPUT 4 - 20 mA Confirm by pressing the % button. Selection of the information available on the analog output This can be parameterised only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option.

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 15/22

Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, and the following cell appears: TYPE OF ANA. INFO IA RMS Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of information you wish to bring onto the analog output, then confirm by pressing the % key. Selection of the type of RTD This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 6 RTDs" option or monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD option. Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button, otherwise starting from the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 7 times. The following cell appears: Type RTD = PT100 Using the % and ! buttons, select the type of RTD with which the motor is equipped, then confirm by pressing the % key. Selection of the type of thermistors This can be set only if the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "monitoring of 2 thermistors and 4 RTD" option. Two possibilities arise: The MiCOM P220 relay is not equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button 5 times. The following cell appears:

Type Thermist 1 =

PTC

The MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with the "analog output" option; starting from the following cell: TYPE OF ANA. INFO IA RMS (The type of information to be brought onto the analog output can be different from IA RMS).

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 16/22 Press the " button once. The following cell appears: Type Thermist 1 = PTC

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

If the No.1 group of thermistors equipping the motor is of the PTC (positive temperature coefficient) type, do nothing. On the other hand, if the motor is equipped with a group of thermistors of type NTC (negative temperature coefficient), press the % button then the ! button. The following cell appears: Type Thermist 1 =

NTC

Confirm by pressing the % button. Press the " button , then the following cell appears : Type Thermist 2 = PTC Repeat the same operation if the No. 2 thermistor group of the motor is of type NTC. 8.3.2.2 CT RATIO Submenu: adjustment of the primary and secondary ratings of the current sensors From inside the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, press the " button as many times as necessary to reach the heading of the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. As indicated below: Press the $ button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears: CT RATIO Value of the primary rating of the phase CTs Press once on the " button. The following cell appears: PRIM PH =

1000

In this cell, indicate the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs. For example, for a CT with a ratio of 200/5, set the value 200 as explained below.

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 17/22

Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000: PRIM PH = 1000 Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 1st digit. Then press the # button. The cursor moves under the 2nd digit. Using the ! and " buttons, increase and/or decrease the 2nd digit. Then do the same for the 3rd and 4th digits. Confirm by pressing the % button. Value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs Press the " button once. The following cell appears: SEC PH = 1 If the current circuits coming from the secondaries of the phase CTs are connected to the phase current inputs with a rating of 1 A (terminals 49-50; 51-52; 53-54) of the MiCOM P220, do nothing. This implies that the secondaries of the phase CTs have the rating of 1 A. On the other hand, if the current circuits are connected to the phase current inputs with a rating of 5 A (terminals 41-42; 43-44; 45-46) of the MiCOM P220, this implies that the rating of the secondaries of the phase CTs is 5 A, press the % button. A cursor appears under the 1: SEC PH = 1 Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button. The following cell appears: SEC PH = 5 Value of the primary of the earth sensor. Press once on the " button. The following cell appears: PRIM E = 1000 Press the % button. A cursor appears under the last 0 of 1000: PRIM E = 1000

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 18/22 Two possibilities arise:

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT. In this cell, set the value of the ratio of the core balanced CT using the buttons !, " and #. Confirm by pressing % . The earth current input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the primary rating of the phase CTs using the buttons #, !, and ". Confirm by pressing % .

Value of the secondary of the earth sensor Press the " button once. The following cell appears: SEC E =

Two possibilities arise: The earth input is connected to a core balanced CT. Do nothing, leave this value at 1. The earth input is connected to the residual connection of the three secondary circuits coming from the phase CTs. In this cell, set the value of the secondary rating of the phase CTs (this implies that the residual connection circuit is cabled to the earth current input corresponding to the secondary rating of the phase CTs).

If the rating is 1A, do nothing. On the other hand, if the rating is 5 A, press the % button, and a flashing cursor appears. SEC E = 1 Press the ! button. Confirm by pressing the % button. The following cell appears: SEC E = 5

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220 8.3.3 COMMUNICATION Menu

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 19/22

Starting from the preceding cell, press the " button once. The heading of the CT RATIO submenu appears. Press the ! button once. The heading of the CONFIGURATION menu appears. Then press the $ button 4 times. The heading of the COMMUNICATION menu appears. COMMUNICATION Press the " button once. The following cell appears: COM. OK =

YES

You wish to use the MiCOM P220 relay for communication, so check that the word YES appears. If it does not appear, press % once and then ! once. YES appears, so confirm with % . If the relay MiCOM P220 is used for communication (via the RS485 port at the rear), set the various parameters of the COMMUNICATION menu using the buttons: " to move from one line to another and also to reduce the value of a parameter; % to select a parameter to be modified and also to confirm the entry of a parameter, ! to increase the value of a parameter.

Then press the " or ! button as many times as necessary, to return to the heading of the COMMUNICATION menu. 8.3.4 PROTECTION G 1 Menu Press the $ button once. The heading of the PROTECTION group 1 menu appears. PROTECTION G1 8.3.4.1 Setting the threshold of thermal current I> Press the " button once. appears : [49] THERMAL OVER-LOAD Press the " button once, the following cell appears. THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCT ? YES Check that the word YES actually appears. If not, press once on %, then once on ! the word YES appears, confirm with %. Press the " button twice. The following cell appears : The heading of the THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 20/22 I > =

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

0.2 In

Press the % button. A flashing cursor appears: I > = 0.2 In Using the !, " and # buttons, set the value of the thermal current threshold I> corresponding to the machine. Confirm by pressing the % button. From this point, a minimum configuration has been given for starting up the MiCOM P220 relay. This minimum configuration makes it possible to start up the MiCOM P220 relay. It is not in any way sufficient to ensure that the motor is protected. For this, it is appropriate to configure the MiCOM P220 relay completely.

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220 8.4 COMPLETE CONFIGURATION OF THE MiCOM P220 The MiCOM P220 relay can be completely configured:

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 21/22

Either by using the interface on the front (buttons !, ", $, # and % and the display unit); or by using the control and setting software MiCOM S1.

You can set the protections and automatic controls of the MiCOM P220 you wish to use in the following submenus: [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD. [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT. [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT. [46] UNBALANCE. [48] EXCES LONG START [51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR. [37] LOSS OF LOAD. [49/38] RTD (optional). [49] THERMISTOR + RTD (optional). [66] START NUMBER. MIN TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS. RE-ACCELER AUTORISATION. You can also set : the binary inputs, INPUTS submenu; the AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu; the time delays associated with AND logic equations, AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu; the auxiliary output relays, AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu; the holding of the auxiliary output contact, LATCH OUTPUT Submenu; the tripping output relay, TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu; the holding of the tripping command, LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu. Other parameters can be configured: monitoring of the breaking device, CIRDCUIT BREAKER SUPERVISION submenu; characteristics of the disturbance recording, DISTURB RECORD submenu; motor feeder reference name, OP PARAMETERS submenu; motor start detection criterion, CONFIG. SELECT submenu; allocation of illuminated indicator LED 5, LED 5 submenu; allocation of illuminated indicator LED 6, LED 6 submenu; allocation of illuminated indicator LED 7, LED 7 submenu; allocation of illuminated indicator LED 8, LED 8 submenu. For further information, refer to chapter 4 and 5 of the MiCOM P220 User Guide. Do not forget to configure the trip output relay (Relay No. 1, terminals 2-4-6) in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY. Submenu.

P220/EN GS/B43 Page 22/22

Technical Guide Getting Started MiCOM P220

9.

COMPANY CONTACT INFORMATION


If you need information regarding the operation of the MiCOM product that you have, please contact your local AREVA agent or the After Sales Service Department of AREVA T&D. and mention the reference of your MiCOM product. The MiCOM product references are mentioned under the upper flap of the product front plate. PLEASE MENTION THE FOLLOWING DATA WHEN YOU CALL US : CORTEC code of the MiCOM relay Serial number of the MiCOM relay AREVAs order reference AREVAs operator reference

AFTER SALES SERVICE DEPARTMENT ADDRESS AND PHONE/FAX NUMBER: Service Aprs Vente/After Sales Service AREVA T&D 95 avenue de la Banquire BP75 34975 Lattes Cedex FRANCE Phone : 33 (0)4.67.20.55.58 ou 33 (0)4.67.20.55.55 Fax : 33 (0)4.67.20.56.00 E-mail :franois.chupot@areva-td.com

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN CO/B43

Connection Diagram

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 1/14

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4

CONNECTION DIAGRAM
MiCOM P220 typical connection Typical application diagram MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options) MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and analogue output options)

3
3 4 5 6

2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.7.1 2.7.2 2.7.3 2.7.4 2.7.5 2.8 2.9 2.10

CONNECTION
Earth connection Auxiliary power Current inputs Binary inputs Output relays Front port connection (RS232) RS485 rear port Description Connection RS485 cable Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus RS232 / RS485 converter Analogue output RTDs Thermistors

7
7 7 7 7 7 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 11 11 12 13 13

2.10.1 PTC type thermistors 2.10.2 NTC type thermistors

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 2/14

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

1.

1.1

Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
A B
36

The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.


P2
37

A S1 Auxiliary voltage RL1 1A


12 10 8 18 2 4

P2 P1 WD
35

P1 Watch dog (4)

B C S2 S1

S2

S1

49

Programmable tripping output relay

1A

1A

1A

RL2

Programmable output relay

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

1A
14 5

1A

RL3

Programmable output relay

1A

1A

RL4

3 1 11

Programmable output relay

5A

5A

RL5

Programmable output relay

5A

5A
4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

RTD1 common RTD2

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

5A

5A

MiCOM P220
If 6 RTD option :

5A

5A

MiCOM P220 typical connection

RTD3
12c 8a 10a 12a 16c 18c 14a 16a

Case earth
1 3 5 7 8 6 4 2

RTD4

Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core blanced CT.


Switchgear status 52a input L1 Speed switch signal input L2
11 12
24 + 26 + 22

RTD5 common RTD6 common

S2

S1

C Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4


23 25 27 28 26 24
28 + 13 15 + 17

S2
a 14c 14a a 16c 16a a 18c 18a

S1 1

49

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10a a

1A

1A Programmable input L5

Earth connection (5)

19 + 21 23 -

2c

If thermistor option :
2a 4a

1A Orange connector Module terminal bl viewed from rear (with integral case earth link)

a 22c 22a a 24c 24a 26a a a 28c 28a a 30c 30a a 32c 32a

5A

Analogue output active source mode


30c

Nota :
(1) (a) (b) (c) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect

Case earth connection

32c -

5A

*
30

(6) If analogue output option :

Analogue g output passive source mode

5A (d)

Pins terminals (pcb type)

5A

(3) Earth connection are typical only (4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off (5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector.

RS 485 communication port

30a 32a

2-24 Volt

P220/EN CO/B43

Page 3/14

P0186ENb

(6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode

Orange connector

1A

Orange connector

P2

P1

1.2

Vaux

Page 4/14

Fuse CT phase B Motor


14

Core balanced CT CT phase A

Stator temperature

P220/EN CO/B43

CT phase C

Bearings temperature 52a


55 56 48 33 41 42 43 44 45 46 5A A 49 50 51 52 53 54 1A A

Contactor coil Vaux


34

Ambient temperature

2 thermistors and 4 RTD + (orange connector) -

power

Typical application diagram

22 24 6

+ Contactor status 52a - Input L1


Communication + RS485 - 32

On Off
2 4

Programmable tripping output relay

PC/PLC supervisor

Emergency stop
12

MiCOM P220
Speed switch signal input L2 Programmable output RL2 relay Analogue output (orange connector) Programmable output RL4 relay Watchdog

26

Auxiliary voltage Vaux Klaxon


10 8

+ + -

(see see note below) )

Signalling lamp
5 3 1

32 a/c

PLC

37 35 36 18

Signalling

Emergency g y startup p
13 15

+ Programmable - Input L3 + Programmable - Input L4 + Programmable - Input L5


Programmable output RL3 relay

Signalling
14 11 9

External reset
17 19

Signalling Programmable output RL5 relay


7

Fuse blown
21 23

ATTENTION : the logic input shall be supplied by a DC auxiliary voltage only

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

the auxiliary power could be Ac or DC according to the model number of the relay

The MiCOM P220 is shown with power supply off.

P0187ENa

1.3

Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
A B
36

The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.


P2
37

A S1 Auxiliary voltage RL1 1A


12 10 8 18 2 4

P2 P1 WD
35

P1 Watch dog (4)

B C S2 S1

S2

S1

49

Programmable tripping output relay

1A

1A

1A

RL2

Programmable output relay

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

1A

1A

RL3

14 5

Programmable output relay

1A

1A

RL4

3 1 11

Programmable output relay

5A

5A

RL5

Programmable output relay

5A

5A
4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

RTD1 common RTD2

5A

5A

MiCOM P220
If 6 RTD option :

5A

5A

RTD3
12c 8a 10a 12a 16c 18c 14a 16a

Case earth
1 3 5 7 8 6 4 2

RTD4

Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core blanced CT.


Switchgear status 52a input L1 Speed switch signal input L2
11 12
24 + 26 + 22

RTD5 common RTD6

S2

S1

C Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4


23 25 27 28 26 24

S2
a 14c 14a a 16c 16a a 18c 18a

S1 1

49

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10a a

28 + 13 15 + 17 19 + 21

1A

18a

common

Earth connection (5)

1A

Programmable input L5

1A Orange connector Module terminal bl viewed from rear (with integral case earth link)

a 22c 22a a 24c 24a 26a a a 28c 28a a 30c 30a a 32c 32a

23 -

1A

5A

Analogue output active source mode


30c

Nota :
(1) (a) (b) (c) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect

Case earth connection

32c -

5A (d)

30

Pins terminals (pcb type)

5A

(3) Earth connection are typical only (4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off (5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector.

MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 6 RTD and analogue output options)

RS 485 communication port

30a 32a

2-24 Volt

P220/EN CO/B43

Page 5/14

P0188ENb

(6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode

Orange connector

5A

(6) If analogue output option :

Analogue g output passive source mode

Orange connector

P2

P1

1.4

Alternative :The earth current input is connected to the sommation of the three phase CTs.
A B
36

The earth current input is connected to a core balanced CT.


P2
37

A S1 Auxiliary voltage RL1 1A


12 10 8 18 2 4

P2 P1 WD
35

P1 Watch dog (4)

B C S2 Programmable tripping output relay S1

S2

S1

Page 6/14

49

1A

P220/EN CO/B43

1A

1A

RL2

Programmable output relay

1A
14 5

1A

RL3

Programmable output relay

1A
1 11

1A

RL4

Programmable output relay

5A RL5

5A

Programmable output relay

5A

5A
4c 6c 2a 4a 8c 10c

5A

5A

MiCOM P220
If 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option :

5A

5A

RTD1
12c 8a 10a

Case earth
1 3 5 7 8 6 4 2

RTD2
12a 16c 18c 14a 16a 18a

Alternative : Connection to 2 phase CTs + a core blanced CT.


Switchgear status 52a input L1 Speed switch signal input L2
11 12
24 + 26 + 22

RTD3 common RTD4 common

S2

S1

C Programmable input L3 Programmable input L4


23 25 27 28 26 24
15 + 17 19 + 21 23 28 + 13

S2
a 14c 14a a 16c 16a a 18c 18a

S1 1

49

2c 4c 6c 8c 10c

2a 4a 6a 8a 10a a

1A

Earth connection (5)

1A Programmable input L5

1A Orange connector Module terminal bl viewed from rear (with integral case earth link)

a 22c 22a a 24c 24a 26a a a 28c 28a a 30c 30a a 32c 32a

1A

5A

Analogue output active source mode


30c +

Nota :
(1) (a) (b) (c) CT shorting links make before (b) and (c) disconnect

Case earth connection

32c

5A (d) Pins terminals (pcb type)

30

5A

(3) Earth connection are typical only (4) The MICOM P220 relay is shown with power supply off (5) The shielding is bonded to the earth point located next to the connector.

RS 485 communication port

30a 32a

2-24 Volt

MiCOM P220 typical connection (with 2 thermistors and 4 RTD option and analogue output options)

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

P0189ENb

(6) Important : the analogue output option shall be used either in active source mode or in passive source mode

Orange connector

5A

(6) If analogue output option :

Analogue g output passive source mode

Orange connector

P2

P1

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 7/14

2.

CONNECTION
The rear face of the MiCOM P220 relay comprises at least 2 connectors. The relay may have an optional orange third connector dedicated to the connection: of 6 temperature RTD sensors or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors and one analogue output

2.1

Earth connection The case shall be earthed according to the local standards.

2.2

Auxiliary power The auxiliary power for the MiCOM P220 relay can be either Direct (range 24 - 60 Vdc, 48-150Vdc, 130-250Vdc) or Alternating (100-250Vac 50/60Hz). The range of voltage is specified on the relay indicator plate under the top flap of the front face. The power should be connected to terminals 33 and 34 only. A minimum 1.5mm wire size is recommended.

2.3

Current inputs The MiCOM P220 relay has 4 analogue inputs for phase and earth currents. The nominal value of current of these measuring inputs is either 1 Amp or 5 Amp (according to the wiring diagram). The operator can, for the same relay, mix the 1 and 5 Amp inputs (phase and earth). A minimum 2.5mm wire size is recommended.

2.4

Binary inputs The MiCOM P220 relay has five opto-insulated logic inputs of which three are programmable. Each input has its own polarity and it shall be powered with a dc voltage (see chapter 3 of this guide: Technical Specifications). The control and signalling functions to which the programmable logic inputs are assigned can be selected by means of the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu. A minimum 1mm wire size is recommended. NOTE: A 52a contact (CB auxiliary contact: open when CB is opened) shall be wired to the binary input n1 (terminals 22-24).

2.5

Output relays Six output relays are available on the MiCOM P220 relay. Five relays are programmable, the last relay being assigned to the signalling of an equipment fault (WATCH DOG). All these relays are of the changeover type (1 common, 1 normally opened, 1 normally closed). The protection and control functions to which these relays are assigned can be selected via the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 8/14 2.6 Front port connection (RS232)

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 serial data communication (asynchronous RS232 connection according the IEC870 requirements) and is intended for use with a PC locally to the relay (up to 15m distance). The relay is a Data Communication Equipment (DCE) device. Thus the pin connections of the relays 9-pin front port are as follows: Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Tx Rx 0V Transmit data Receive data Zero volts common

None of the other pins are connected in the relay. The relay should be connected to the serial port of a PC, usually called COM1 or COM2. PCs are normally Data Terminal Equipment (DTE) devices which have a serial port pin connection as below (if in doubt check your PC manual): Pin no. 2 Pin no. 3 Pin no. 5 Rx Tx 0V Receive data Transmit data Zero volts common

For successful data communication, the Tx pin on the relay must be connected to the Rx pin on the PC, and the Rx pin on the relay must be connected to the Tx pin on the PC. Therefore, providing that the PC is a DTE with pin connections as given above, a straight through serial connector is required, i.e. one that connects pin 2 to pin 2, pin 3 to pin 3, and pin 5 to pin 5. The cable between the MiCOM relay and the PC is a standard RS232 shielded cable (male connector on the MiCOM relay side, usually female connector on PC side).

P0179ENb

FIGURE 1 PC<->FRONT PORT CONNECTION

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220 2.7 2.7.1 RS485 rear port Description

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 9/14

The rear RS485 interface is isolated and is suitable for permanent connection whichever protocol is selected. The advantage of this type of connection is that up to 32 relays can be daisy chained together using a simple twisted pair electrical connection. 2.7.2 Connection The communication connection (port RS485) is assigned on terminals 31-32 according to the MiCOM P220 relay wiring diagram.
communication connections

1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 21 23 25 27

2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28

29 31 33 35 37 39 41 43 45 47 49 51 53 55

30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56

Rear terminals

P0180ENa

FIGURE 2 RS485 CONNECTION

The total communication cable from the master unit to the farthest slave device is a spur, and no branches may be made from this spur. The maximum cable length is 1000m and the maximum number of devices per spur is 32. Polarity is not necessary for the 2 twisted wires. The transmission wires should be terminated using a 150 resistor at both extreme ends of the cable. To this effect, link terminals 30 and 32, if the relay is connected at the end of the RS485 bus, as indicated in figure 3. Terminal 29 of each MiCOM relay shall be connected to the RS485 cable shielding, as mentioned figure 3. For only one MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, link terminal 29 to the case earth as indicated in figures 2 and 3.

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 10/14

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220


At the extreme end of the RS485 bus, link terminals 30 and 32

For one and only MiCOM relay connected to the RS485 bus, terminal 29 is linked to the case earth

Shielding

Terminal 29 shall be connected to the RS485 cable shield

RS485 bus

2 core screened cable

Relay connected at the extreme end of the RS485 bus


P0181ENa

FIGURE 3 RS485 CONNECTION

2.7.3

RS485 cable It is recommended that a 2 core screened cable is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or 200 nF total cable capacitance. Typical specification: Each core: Nominal conductor area: Screen: Linear capacitance between conductor and earth: 16/0.2 mm copper conductors, PVC insulated 0.5 mm2 per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed 100 pF/m

2.7.4

Protocol convertor: RS232 -> K-Bus KITZ 101,102 and 201 can be used. Configuration is: 19200 bauds, 11 bits, full duplex.

2.7.5

RS232 / RS485 converter The following RS232/RS485 converters have been tested by AREVA T&D: RS_CONV1 : convertor suitable for a short length and for up to 4 connected relays industrial convertor, suitable for up to 32 connected relays.

RS_CONV32 :

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220 2.8 Analogue output

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 11/14

The MiCOM P220 relay can include an optional analogue output assigned on the 30-32 terminals (orange coloured connector) which allows certain data and measuring values to be reassembled on a current loop towards an automatic controller. The selections of the type of analogue output (options: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA) and of the type of data to be reassembled are effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. It is recommended that a 2-core screened cable is used. The cable shield shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. N.B.: The analogue output shall be used either in active source mode (terminals 30c-32c), or in passive source mode (terminals 30a32a).

(1) If the current loop monitoring device is not earthed (floating potential), the cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. In the other case, do not connect the cable shielding. Earthing (1) shielding Current loop monitoring device 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA 30c + 32c -

Case earth connector

MiCOM P220 orange connector


P0182ENa

Screened cable

FIGURE 4 CONNECTION FOR ANALOGUE OUTPUT IN ACTIVE SOURCE MODE

2.9

RTDs The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 6 RTD's or to 4 RTDs (2 thermistors option), which enables it to monitor temperature (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice of these types of RTD sensors is effected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. It is recommended that connections between the relay and the RTD's are made using a 3-core screened cable with a total resistance less than 25 in case of PT100, Ni100 or Ni120 RTD. For Cu10 RTD, the cable total resistance shall be less than 2.5 . the wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of cores connected to both terminals 2c and 4c (see figure 5) shall be of identical value. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. Typical specification: Each core: Nominal conductor ana: Screen: Conductor impedance: 7/0.2 mm, copper conductors heat resistant PVC, 0.22 mm2 per core Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed Strictly identical for 2 of the 3 cores. Accuracy difference less than 1%

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 12/14

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

earthing shielding RTD1

Case earth connector

2c 4c 6c MiCOM P220 orange connector

Screened cable
P0183ENa

FIGURE 5 RTD CONNECTION

2.10

Thermistors The P220 relay can, as an option, be connected to 2 thermistors which allows it to protect against over-temperature conditions (PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2 menu). The choice between these types of thermistor is effected in the CONFIG. SELCT submenu. It is recommended that connections between the relay and the thermistors are made using a screened 2-core cable with a total resistance less than 100 . The wire also should have a minimum voltage rating of 300 Vrms. Impedance of the 2 cores shall have similar values. The cable shielding shall be bonded to the MiCOM relay case earth connector. Typical specification: Each core: Nominal conductor ana: Screen: 7/0.2 mm copper conductors heat resistant PVC 0.22 mm2 per core Nickel-plated copper wire braid heat resistant PVC sheathed.

earthing Thermistor 1 shielding 2c 4c 6c Screened cable

Case earth connector

MiCOM P220 orange connector

P0184ENa

FIGURE 6 THERMISTOR CONNECTION

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220 2.10.1 PTC type thermistors

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 13/14

For PTC type thermistor, it is usually possible to connect to the same input several thermistors in series as indicated in figure 7.
Thermistor placed on phase A winding

Thermistor place on phase C winding

2c 4c MOTOR

Thermistor 1 input

2a 4a

Thermistor 2 input

Thermistors placed on mechanical bearings

Thermistor placed on phase B winding

MiCOM P220 orange connector


P0185ENa

FIGURE 7 PTC THERMISTORS CONNECTED IN SERIES

2.10.2 NTC type thermistors For NTC type thermistors, it is recommended that only one thermistor is connected to each MiCOM relay input. Exceptionally, certain NTC type thermistors can be connected in parallel to the same input. However, we do not recommend such a connection.

P220/EN CO/B43 Page 14/14

Technical Guide Connection Diagram MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43

Technical Data

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 1/30

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Thermal replica Short-circuit protection Earth fault protection Unbalance protection Too long start-up protection Locked rotor protection Under current protection RTD temperature detection or thermistors

3
3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4

2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 2.8 2.9 2.10 2.11

AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Limitation of the number of start-ups Time between 2 start-ups Re-acceleration authorization Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers Logic Equations Logic equation time delay Auxiliary Output Relays Latching of the output relays Trip Output Relay Latching of the Trip Order Control and monitoring of the breaker device

5
5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 6

3.
3.1 3.2 3.3

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Optional analogue output Optional 6 RTD inputs Optional 2 thermistors inputs

7
7 7 7

4.
4.1 4.2 4.3

RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Fault recorder Oscillography

8
8 8 8

5.
5.1 5.2

COMMUNICATION
MODBUSTM communication Front communication

9
9 9

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 2/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS


Inputs Logic inputs Output relays Auxiliary voltage

10
10 10 10 11

7. 8. 9. 10. 11.

ACCURACY CT DATA HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT ENVIRONMENT

11 11 11 12 12

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 3/30

1.
1.1

PROTECTION FUNCTIONS
Thermal replica Thermal current threshold 1> Overload time-constant Te1 Start-up time-constant Te2 Cooling time-constant Tr 0.2 to 1.5 In by steps of 0.01 In 1 to 180 min by steps of 1 min 1 to 360 min by steps of 1 min 1 to 999 min by steps of 1 min

Negative sequence current recognition factor Ke 0 to 10 by steps of 1 Trip thermal threshold Trip thermal threshold hysteresis Thermal alarm threshold Thermal alarm threshold hysteresis Start-up inhibition 1.2 Short-circuit protection Current threshold I>> Time-delays tl >> Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 1.3 Earth fault protection Current thresholds lo>, lo>> Ion Time-delays tlo>, tlo>> Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 1.4 Unbalance protection Negative sequence current threshold li> Time-delays tli> Negative sequence current threshold Ii >> IDMT time-delay Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 0.05 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.025 In 0.04 to 200 s by steps of 0.01 s 0.2 to 0.8 In by steps of 0.05 In operating time t = 1.2 / (I2/In) < 30 ms < 30 ms 95% 0.002 to 1 Ion by steps of 0.001 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms < 30 ms 95% 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.01 s < 30 ms < 30 ms 95% Set to 100% 97% 20 to 100% by steps of 1% 97% 20 to 100% by steps of 1%

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 4/30 1.5 Too long start-up protection Start-up detection criteria Current threshold Istart Time-delays T Istart 1.6 Locked rotor protection Current threshold Istall Hysteresis Time delays tlstall Locked rotor at start-up detection 1.7 Under current protection Current threshold I< Time-delays tl< Inhibition time at start-up Tinhib Operating time Drop-off time Hysteresis 1.8 RTD temperature detection or thermistors RTD (or THERMISTOR + RTD) function -Optional YES/NO

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

(Closing 52) or (closing 52 + current threshold) optional 1 to 5 I by steps of 0.5 I 1 to 200 s by steps of 1 s

1 5 I by steps of 0,5 I 95% 0.1 60 s by steps of 0.1 s Yes/No

0.1 to 1 In by steps of 0.01 In 0.2 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s 0.05 to 300 s by steps of 0.1 s < 30 ms < 30 ms 105%

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 5/30

2.
2.1

AUTOMATION FUNCTIONS
Limitation of the number of start-ups Reference period Treference Number of cold starts Number of hot starts Restart inhibition time Tinterdiction 10 to 120 min by steps of 5 min 0 to 5 by steps of 1 0 to 5 by steps of I 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min

2.2

Time between 2 start-ups Inhibition time Tbetw 2 start 1 to 120 min by steps of 5 min

2.3

Re-acceleration authorization Voltage collapse duration Treacc 0.2 to 10 s by steps of 0.05 s

2.4

Logic Inputs / Auxiliary timers 1Logic input 1Logic input 3 Programmable Logic inputs Logic inputs with alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT1 and EXT2 CB position Speed Switch

Logic inputs without alarm message on occurence 2 external signals, EXT3 and EXT4 (from V3.A software version) Timers tEXT1, tEXT2, tEXT3 and tEXT4 2.5 Logic Equations 4 AND logic equations 2.6 Logic equation time delay Pick-up time delay Reset time 2.7 Auxiliary Output Relays 1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) 4 Auxiliary Output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5) 1 watchdog relay.( for equipment default) 2.8 Latching of the output relays Latching of the output relays (RL2,RL3,RL4,RL5)on Short-circuit, earth fault, unbalance, AND logical gates 2.9 Trip Output Relay 1 Trip Output Relay (RL1) Programmable Programmable Programmable 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s 0 to 60 min by steps of 0.1 s 0 to 200 s by step of 0.01s

(Association of one or more information to the Trip Output Relay). 2.10 Latching of the Trip Order Latching of the information(s) associated to the RL1.

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 6/30 2.11 Control and monitoring of the breaker device SW Operating time alarm Number of operations alarm Summated contact breaking duty Adjustment of the exponent n Close command hold Open command hold

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

0.05 to 1 by steps of 0.05 s 0 to 50 000 operations by steps of 1 106 to 4000.106 by steps of 106 1 or 2 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s 0.2 to 5 s by steps of 0.1 s

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 7/30

3.
3.1

OPTIONAL FUNCTIONS
Optional analogue output Rating Insulation Maximum load with active source mode Maximum voltage with passive source mode Accuracy 0-20 mA, 4-20 Ma 2 kV 500 for ratings 0-20 mA, 4-20 mA 24 Volt 1% full scale

3.2

Optional 6 RTD inputs RTD type Connection type Insulation Setting of thresholds Settings of timings Influence of thermal image PT100, Ni120, Ni100, Cu10 3 wires + 1 shielding 2 kV, active supply 0 to 200 C by steps of 1 C 0 to 100 s by steps of 0.1 s Yes/No

3.3

Optional 2 thermistors + 4 RTD inputs Thermistor type Setting of thresholds Time-delay PTC or NTC 100 to 30000 by steps of 100 Set to 2 seconds

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 8/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

4.
4.1

RECORDING FUNCTIONS
Event recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers 75 events To 1 millisecond Any protection alarm and threshold Any logic input change of state Self test events Any setting changes

4.2

Fault recorder Capacity Time-tag Triggers Data 5 records To 1 millisecond Any trip order (relay RL1 operation) Fault date Active setting group Faulty phase(s) Fault type, protection threshold Magnitude of the fault current Phases and earth currents magnitudes

4.3

Oscillography Capacity Sampling rate Pre-time setting Post-time setting Triggers 5 records of 3 s each 32 samples per frequency cycle 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s 0.1 to 3 s by steps of 0.1 s Any protection threshold overreach or any trip order (relay RL1 operation) Logic input Remote command 4 analogue channels (3 phase currents + earth current) Logic input and output states Frequency value

Data

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 9/30

5.
5.1

COMMUNICATION
MODBUSTM communication Mode Transmission mode Interface Data rate Relay address Connection Cable type Maximum cable lengt Connector Insulation RTU (standard) Synchronous RS 485, 2 wires and 1 Earth 300 to 38400 baud (programmable) 1 to 255 Multi-point (32 connections) Half duplex (screened twisted wire pair) 1000 meters Connector screws or snap-on 2 kV RMS

5.2

Front communication Interface Protocol Connectors Cable type RS232 MODBUSTM RTU Sub-D 9 pin female connector Screened twisted wire cable, no-crossed

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 10/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

6.
6.1

INPUTS AND OUTPUTS


Inputs Phase current In Earth current Ion Frequency Burdens Range Nominal Phase current inputs Earth current input Thermal withstand of the phase and earth current inputs 1 and 5 Ampere 1 and 5 Ampere 45 to 65 Hz 50/60 Hz < 0.3 VA (5A) < 0.025 VA (1A) < 0.01 VA at 0.1 Ion (5A) <0.004 VA at 0.1 Ion (1A) 100 In - 1 s 40 In - 2 s 4 In continuous

6.2

Logic inputs Type Number Burden Recognition time Independent optical isolated 5 (3 programmable, 2 fixe) < 10 mA for each input = 2.5 ms

The logic inputs shall be powered with a dc voltage. Logic input operation Cortec Relay auxiliary Code voltage range* A F M 24 60 Vdc 48 150 Vdc 130 250 Vdc 110 250 Vac * The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations for the logic inputs is 20% 6.3 Output relays Type Number Commutation capacity Dry contact AgCdO 6 (5 programmable + 1 watchdog) Make 30 Amps for 3 s Carry continuously 5 Amps Break 135 Vdc, 0.3 Amps (L/R = 30 ms) 250 Vdc, 50 W resistive 250 Vdc, 25 W inductive (L/R = 40 ms) 220 Vac, 5 Amps (50/60Hz-cos =0.6) < 7 ms > 100 000 operations Minimum voltage Minimum current level (Volt) level (milli-Amp) 15 V 25 V 38 V 3,35 mA 3,35 mA 2,20 mA

Operation time Durability

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220 6.4 Auxiliary voltage Auxiliary voltage 3 ranges

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 11/30

24-60 Vdc 48-150 Vdc 130-250 Vdc /110-250 Vac 20% 12 % 50 ms <3 W standby + 0.25 for each output relay energized in Vdc < 6 VA in Vac

Variations Residual peak to peak ripple Power off withstand Burden

7.

ACCURACY
Protection thresholds Time delays NOTE: 2% 2 % with a minimum of 10 ms The user shall take into consiredation the Operating Time (30ms) of the protection functions when setting the timers to low values. Typical 0.2 % at In for currents 2 C for temperatures 500Hz

Measurements Pass band for measurements of true RMS values

8.

CT DATA
Phases CT primary Earth CT primary Phases CT secondary Earth CT secondary Recommended phases CT Recommended earth CT 1 to 3000 by steps of 1 1 to 3000 by steps of 1 1 or 5 1 or 5 5P10 - 5VA (typical) Residual connection or core balanced CT (preferred in isolated neutral systems)

9.

HIGH VOLTAGE WITHSTAND


Dielectric withstand (50/60Hz) IEC 60255-5 BS 142 ANSI C37.90 IEC 60255-5 BS 142 EC 60255-5 2 kV in common mode 1 kV in differential mode 5 kV in common mode 1 kV in differential mode > 100 M

Impulse voltage (1.2/50 s)

Insulation resistance

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 12/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

10.

ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT
High frequency disturbance IEC 61000-4-12 Fast transient disturbance Electrostatic discharge Radio frequency impulse IEC 61000-4-4 ANSI C37.90.1 IEC 61000-4-2 ANSI C37.90.2 IEC 61000-4-3 2.5 kV in common mode, class 3 1 kV in differential mode, class 3 4 kV auxiliary supply, class 4 2 kV other, class 4 8 kV, class 4 35 V/m 10 V/m

11.

ENVIRONMENT
Temperature IEC 60255-6 Storing and transportation Operation IEC 60068-2-3 IEC 60529 IEC 60255-21-1 IEC 60255-21-2 IEC 60255-21-3 40C to + 70C 25C to + 55C

Humidity Enclosure protection Vibration Shock and bump Seismic withstand

56 days at 93% RH and 40C IP 52, IK 07 Response and endurance, class 2 Response and withstand, class 1 Class 2

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 13/30

12.

THERMAL OVERLOAD CURVES

Thermal overload characteristic curves Thermal constant times :


- overload condition : T e1 = 12 minutes - start-up condition : T
10 000 e2

= 6 minutes

1 000

Cold curve Thermal status = 0 %

Operating time (seconds)

100

10

Hot curve Thermal status = 90%

0 0.1

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >

10

P0159ENa

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 14/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

Thermal overload characteristic curves Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%


100 000

10 000

Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn


1 000

Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn

Operating time (seconds)

100

10

Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn Te1 = Te2 =24 mn Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn

0 1

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >

10

P0160ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 15/30

Thermal overload characteristic curve Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%


100 000

10 000

Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn

1 000

Operating time (seconds)

Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn


100

Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn
10

Te1 = Te2 =26 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn


1

Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn

0 1 10

Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current thermal threshold I q >

P0161ENa

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 16/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

Thermal overload characteristic curves Cold curves Initial thermal state of 0%


100 000

10 000

Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn


1 000

Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn

Operating time (seconds)

Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn


100

Te1 = Te2 =34 mn


10

Te1 = Te2 =28 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn


1

Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn

0 1

Thermal equivalent current Ieq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >

10

P0162ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 17/30

Thermal overload characteristic curves Hot curves Initial thermal state of 90%
100 000

10 000

1 000

Operating time (seconds)

Te1 = Te2 = 60 mn Te1 = Te2 = 54 mn


100

Te1 = Te2 = 48 mn Te1 = Te2 = 42 mn Te1 = Te2 = 36 mn

10

Te1 = Te2 = 30 mn
1

Te1 = Te2 =24 mn Te1 = Te2 = 18 mn Te1 = Te2 = 12 mn Te1 = Te2 = 6 mn Te1 = Te2 = 1 mn

0 1

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >

10

P0163ENa

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 18/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

Thermal overload characteristic curves Hot curves Initial thermal state of 90%
100 000

10 000

1 000

Te1 = Te2 = 62 mn

Operating time (seconds)

Te1 = Te2 = 56 mn

100

Te1 = Te2 = 50 mn

Te1 = Te2 = 44 mn Te1 = Te2 = 38 mn


10

Te1 = Te2 = 32 mn Te1 = Te2 =26 mn


1

Te1 = Te2 = 20 mn Te1 = Te2 = 14 mn Te1 = Te2 = 8 mn Te1 = Te2 = 2 mn

0 1 10

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold >

P0164ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 19/30

Thermal overload characteristic curves Hot curves Initial thermal state of 90%
100 000

10 000

1 000

Te1 = Te2 = 64 mn

Operating time (seconds)

Te1 = Te2 = 58 mn Te1 = Te2 = 52 mn


100

Te1 = Te2 = 46 mn Te1 = Te2 = 40 mn

10

Te1 = Te2 =34 mn Te1 = Te2 =28 mn Te1 = Te2 = 22 mn


1

Te1 = Te2 = 16 mn Te1 = Te2 = 10 mn Te1 = Te2 = 4 mn


0 1

Thermal equivalent current I eq in terms of the current thermal threshold I >

10

P0165ENa

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 20/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220 Page 21/30


Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 90%

P220/EN TD/B43

100

90

80
Tr = 96 mn

70
Tr = 84 mn

60
Tr = 72 mn

50

Tr = 60 mn Tr = 48 mn Tr = 36 mn

Thermal state (en %)

40

30

20
Tr = 24 mn Tr = 12 mn

10

Tr = 5 mn

0 100
Operating time (minutes)
P0221ENa

P220/EN TD/B43

Page 22/30
Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 90%

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

100

90

80
Tr = 204 mn Tr = 192 mn Tr = 180 mn

70

60
Tr = 168 mn

50

Thermal state (en %)

40

Tr = 156 mn

30
Tr = 144 mn Tr = 132 mn

20
Tr = 120 mn Tr = 108 mn

10

0 100
Operating time (minutes)

200
P0222ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220 Page 23/30


Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 90%

P220/EN TD/B43

100

90

80
Tr = 450 mn Tr = 425 mn Tr = 400 mn Tr = 375 mn

70

60

50
Tr = 350 mn Tr = 325 mn

Thermal state (en %)

40

30
Tr = 300 mn Tr = 275 mn

20

10

Tr = 250 mn Tr = 225 mn

0 100 200 300 400


Operating time (minutes)

500

600
P0223ENa

P220/EN TD/B43

Page 24/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 100%

100

90

80
Tr = 96 mn

70
Tr = 84 mn Tr = 72 mn

60

50
Tr = 60 mn

Thermal state (%)

Tr = 48 mn Tr = 36 mn

40

30

20
Tr = 24 mn

10

Tr = 12 mn

Tr = 5 mn

0
Operating time (minutes)

100
P0224ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220 Page 25/30

P220/EN TD/B43

Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 100%

100

90

80
Tr = 204 mn Tr = 192 mn

70
Tr = 180 mn Tr = 168 mn

60

Thermal state (%)

50

Tr = 156 mn

40
Tr = 144 mn Tr = 132 mn

30

20
Tr = 120 mn

10
Tr = 108 mn

0 100
Operating time (minutes)

200

300
P0225ENa

P220/EN TD/B43

Page 26/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

100

Cooling down thermal curves Initial thermal state of 100%

90
Tr = 450 mn

80
Tr = 425 mn Tr = 400 mn

70

60
Tr = 375 mn Tr = 350 mn

Thermal state (%)

50

40

Tr = 325 mn

30
Tr = 300 mn Tr = 275 mn

20

10

Tr = 250 mn Tr = 225 mn

0 200 300 400

100

500
Operating time (minutes)

600
P0226ENa

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 27/30

Negative phase sequence protection Inverse time characteristic curve Ii>> element
10

Ii>> setting range from 0,2 to 0,8 I2/In

Operating time (seconds)

0 0.1 1 10

Ratio "Negative phase sequence current/rated current" : I2 / In


P0227ENa

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 28/30

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

13.

EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN THE RTD IMPEDANCE MEASURED VALUE AND TEMPERATURE
100 OHM Platinum () 84.27 88.22 92.16 96.09 100.0 103.9 107.8 111.7 115.5 119.4 123.2 127.1 130.9 134.7 138.5 142.3 146.1 149.8 153.6 157.3 161.0 164.8 168.5 172.2 175.8 100 OHM Nickel () 79.13 84.15 89.23 94.58 100.0 105.6 111.2 117.1 123.0 129.1 135.3 141.7 148.3 154.9 161.8 168.8 176.0 183.3 190.9 198.7 206.6 214.8 223.2 231.6 240.0 120 OHM Nickel () 92.76 99.41 106.41 113.0 120.0 127.2 134.5 142.1 149.8 157.7 165.9 174.3 182.8 191.6 200.6 209.9 219.3 228.9 238.8 249.0 259.3 269.9 280.8 291.9 303.5 10 OHM Copper () 7.490 7.876 8.263 8.649 9.035 9.421 9.807 10.19 10.58 10.97 11.35 11.74 12.12 12.51 12.90 13.28 13.67 14.06 14.44 14.83 15.22 15.61 16.00 16.38 16.78

Temperature (C) -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 29/30

14.

EQUIVALENCE TABLE BETWEEN ANALOGUE OUTPUT SIGNAL VALUE AND REMOTE MEASUREMENT
The hereafter table provides equivalence data between the current signal issued from the analogue output of the MiCOM P220 and the measurement value. Rating 0 - 20 mA : Measurement type HMI sign
Phase A current (True RMS value) Phase A current (True RMS value) Phase A current (True RMS value) Earth current (True RMS value) Motor thermal state Load in % of the full load current Time before a permitted start TH STATE % I LOAD Tbef Start % % 0 to 150 % 0 to 150 % Ias * 150 / 20 mA Ias * 150 / 20 mA Ias * 120 / 20 mA Ias * 120 / 20 mA Ias * 255 / 20 mA 40C IE RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA IC RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In Ias * 2 In / 20 mA IB RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In Is s* 2 In / 20 mA IA RMS

Unit

Variation range

Rating 0 - 20 mA
Ias * 2 In / 20 mA

Ampre 0 to 2 In

Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes C - 40 to 215 C

Time before a thermal Tbef Trip trip RTDs temperature TC RTD

P220/EN TD/B43 Page 30/30 Rating 4 - 20 mA : Measurement type HMI sign


Phase A current (True RMS value) Phase A current (True RMS value) Phase A current (True RMS value) Earth current (True RMS value) Motor thermal state Load in % of the full load current Time before a permitted start TH STATE % I LOAD Tbef Start % % 0 to 150 % 0 to 150 % IE RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In IC RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In IB RMS Ampre 0 to 2 In IA RMS

Technical Guide Technical Data MiCOM P220

Unit

Variation range

Rating 4 - 20 mA
(Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 2 In / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 150 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 120 / 16 mA (Ias 4 mA) * 255 / 16 mA 40C

Ampre 0 to 2 In

Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes Minutes 0 to 120 Minutes C - 40 to 215 C

Time before a thermal Tbef Trip trip RTDs temperature TC RTD

NOTE :

Ias is the value of the current signal generated by the analogue output. In the case where the measurement value to remote through the analogue output is outside the permissible variation range, the current signal is restricted to the limit value of the variation range. In the case where the thermal alarm ALARM is not energised, the current signal value meaning the time before a thermal trip Tbef Trip is equal to 20 mA.

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43

Application Guide

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 1/40

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.1.6 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.2.4 1.3

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS


Induction motors General Thermal model Start-up Short circuits Motor Duty rating Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature Environment Fused contactor or circuit breaker Residually connected or core-balance current transformers. Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring. Dimensioning of phase CT Characteristics acquisition

3
3 3 3 4 5 5 5 6 6 6 7 8 8

2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3

SETTING FUNCTIONS
PROTECTION Menu Thermal overload [49] Short Circuit.[50/51] Earth fault [50N/51N]

9
9 9 15 15 16 17 17 17 18 19 19 20 20 20 21 21 22

2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance 2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral : 2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.1.6 Unbalance [46] Excessive long start [48] Locked rotor [51LR/50S]

2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S] 2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR] 2.1.7 2.1.8 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 Loss of load [37] RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49] AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66] Time between two successive start-ups [66]

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 2/40 2.2.3 Re-acceleration

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 22 23 23

2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration 2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip

3.
3.1 3.2 3.3

EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION


Network data Motor data: List of settings:

25
25 25 26

4.
4.1 4.2 4.3

SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
Logic selectivity Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips Setting groups

30
30 33 35

5. 6. 7.

BIBLIOGRAPHY APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT

36 37 39

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 3/40

1.
1.1 1.1.1

MOTOR CHARACTERISTICS AFFECTING SETTINGS


Induction motors General Currently the majority of motors used in industry are induction and this application guide deals with these motors. The P220 relay can nevertheless be used as multifunction relay to protect a high-power synchronous motor. In this case, one should draw on the principles of protection of synchronous generators, the characteristics of synchronous generators being very close to those of synchronous motors.

1.1.2

Thermal model The physical and electrical construction of the motor is very complex, the various applications, the variety of the possible conditions of abnormal operations and the various modes of failures which can occur make the relations of its thermal state very complex. This is why, it is difficult to create a mathematical model of the thermal characteristics of the machine. There are two principal causes of damage to motors, short-circuits and heating of the windings. With regard to the heating, it is possible to model the heat propagation within the motor. In a sequence of heating at a constant current, the temperature of the motor varies with time similar to the charge of a capacitor under a constant voltage applied via a resistor. The applied voltage is proportional to the square of the current. The time-constant of the phenomenon is then = RC.

So the thermal image takes into consideration the fact that the temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current. TEMPERATURE = K. (IR).(1-e-t/) With IR = current circulating in the Motor and producing Tmax. For a current value I, the temperature is TEMPERATURE = K. (I).(1-e-t/) This results in : The time t during which the motor can support the overload current I is: t = . Ln [ 1/ { 1- ( IR / I) }] There are three stages of heat exchange, each of them having its own time-constant: The start (the value of current >2*[I>], [I>] being the threshold of thermal overload current) during which the temperature of the copper stator windings grows before diffusing heat into the laminations, and the temperature of the rotor rises quickly, The common overload (the value of current between 0 and 2*[I>]), the current being close to nominal or a few percentage points higher. The phenomenon consists of a slow thermal diffusion process through the mass of the rotor and the stator. The cooling-down (motor stopped), which is a slower phenomenon compared to the heating-up since the air gap is not cooled by the rotor fan.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 4/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

The simulation takes into account the square of the positive phase sequence component of the current, plus the product of the square of the negative component of the current by a factor Ke, to give the equivalent thermal current

Ieq: Ieq = I12 + KxI2 2


NOTE: The presence of the negative sequence component of voltage across the motor terminals creates a pulsating current with a frequency of 2 inside the rotor. This overheats the rotor considerably. The inclusion of the factor Ke in the equation above allows for the additional heating in the rotor. Negative sequence components can be created by: an unbalanced three phase load the presence of an external asymmetrical fault, the loss of one or two phases.

1.1.3

Start-up Induction motors can be started ; direct-on-line star-delta through an auto-transformer with a liquid starter, by the addition of external rotor resistance with an electronic starter

These limit the rotor torque and the rotor current to acceptable limits Depending on the type of start, the magnitude of the start-up current fluctuates and can even become zero (for example, during the change of connection types in a stardelta start-up). It is thus advisable to consider, the total duration of the sequence as being the start up time. The duration of start-up depends on the characteristics of the load and the motor and, therefore, cannot be derived only from the characteristics of the motor. By way of illustration one can consider the following equation:
td = J 2N 1 , 60 Cam

where

td : J: N:

start time moment of inertia of the load + motor set measured about the motor shaft, in kgm2 speed of rotation, in RPM

Cam : average accelerating torque, in Nm

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 5/40

The start-up current depends on the characteristics of the motor and the type of start (direct on_line, soft). In the case of direct-on-line start-up (100% of the nominal voltage is applied across the terminals) the currents are large and can reach values up to 10 times higher than the rated current of the motor, a typical average value being of order of 5 times the rated current. During soft start-ups, however the current can remain at the rated motor values. However, one should remember that during the re-acceleration stages (caused by a provisional, total or partial, loss of voltage), the motor will absorb a reacceleration current equal to its direct start-up current. This must be taken into account when adjusting the Locked rotor and Short-circuit functions.

1.1.4

Short circuits In the event of a short-circuit close to the motor, the motor will feed the fault by transforming its kinetic energy into electric power. The resulting current is of short duration: a few hundreds of milliseconds, except for the high-inertia motors where the current can last several seconds. In the first moments, the amplitude of this current is as high as that of the direct-on-line start-up current. Therefore, the constraints to be taken into account when setting the Locked Rotor and Shortcircuit functions are the same as for the re-acceleration, and this contribution to the fault current should not activate these two functions. When calculating a possible short-circuit currents on the network, it will be necessary to take into account the contribution of motors to the fault current. This current contribution may even exceed double the fault current value during the first 100 milliseconds. Consequently, they affect the setting of instantaneous current base protections and the rating of the equipment to withstand the fault currents.

1.1.5

Motor Duty rating The duty ratings can be: Continuous Temporary Intermittent (periodic)

The manufacturers of motors oversize their power by a factor depending on the service duty. For the service duty chosen, one also obtains the maximum number of motor starts per hour (or, in other words, a motor will tolerate more or less starts per hour depending on its oversizing). 1.1.6 Motor rating as a function of altitude and of temperature As the altitude increases, the air becomes more rarefied so the quality of the motor cooling deteriorates. Because of this a correction factor being a function of the altitude must be applied. Likewise, as the ambient temperature rises, the efficiency of cooling decreases. This should be taken into account by applying a correction factor.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 6/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

Shown below is a monogram relating the derating factors applicable to motors at various altitudes.
Temperature correction factor
40C 45C 50C 55C 80C

1 0.9 0.8 0.7 0.6 0.5

1000

2000 altitude (m)

3000
P0169ENa

The P220 relay . incorporates these derating factors within the relay. The correction is linear between 40C (correction factor =1) and 65C (correction factor = 0,75). For this purpose, the relay measures the ambient temperature using an external RTD (resistance temperature detector) probe. This RTD probe is usually placed near the cooling air inlet of the motor. 1.2 1.2.1 Environment Fused contactor or circuit breaker The majority of motors, especially the low-power ones, are connected to the network via a fused contactor or fused switch. This breaking device may not have sufficient breaking capacity to interrupt the fault (short-circuit) current. The fault current can easily reach values of up to ten times the rated current of the motor. Consequently, when the current exceeds the breaking capacity of the contactor, contactor tripping should be disabled. This tripping would generate a permanent arc across the contacts leading to the destruction of the contactor. Back up fuse protection must be used to ensure that the contactor/switch is not destroyed in the event of excessive current flow. This problem does not arise when a circuit breaker is used. 1.2.2 Residually connected or core-balance current transformers. The readings of the zero-sequence current which is characteristic of an earth fault can be taken either: by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CT) (connecting in parallel the 3 CTs and adding up the secondary currents), or by the use of a core balance current transformer with a core incorporating the 3 phase conductors (adding up of the magnetic fields inside the core).

If the neutral of the network is grounded through a limiting impedance or, isolated in the case of an insulated neutral, a core balance current transformer is preferred as it avoids the possible problems of a false zero-sequence current created by the asymmetrical saturation of the phase CTs, or even the complete saturation of one of them during the start-up. These currents can reach values up to several times the motor rated current (typically 5 Inmotor), and this phenomenon can be aggravated by the magnetisation of CTs when opposite retentive fluxes exist in the CTs. These shortcomings may be overcome by employing suitable earth fault settings and by careful selection of the CTs, but the use of a core balance transformer is recommended.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 Type of grounding Solidly earthed neutral point Neutral earthed through impedance (ex: current limited to30A by a resistance) Insulated neutral Preferential solution 3 CT (+a stabilising resistance) 3 CT + core balance transformer

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 7/40 Solution alternative 3 CT + core balance transformer 3 CT (+a stabilising resistance), or 2 CT + core balance transformer (cost-effective solution) 3 CT + core balance transformer 2 CT + core balance transformer (cost-effective solution)

1.2.3

Choice of CT secondary (1A/5A) and of cross-section of secondary wiring. A current transformer (phase CT or balance-core current transformer) must supply the power consumed by: its internal resistance (design feature of CT) the secondary wiring (cross-section 2.5 mm2, 4mm2, 6mm2) connected loads (one or more protection relays etc.)

If the protection relay is situated at a considerable distance from CTs, the load constituted by the wiring cannot be considered to be negligible: Example: relay 200 m distant from CTs rated secondary current 5A wiring: copper, cross-section 2.5 mm2

calculation of cable consumption: cable length = 2 x 200m = 400m cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9 Hence the cable losses = 2.9 x (5A)2 = 73 W. cable resistance R = 0.4 km x 18 / 2.5 mm2 = 2.9 hence the wiring consumption is = 2.9 x (1A)2 = 2.9 W

If the rated secondary current is chosen to be 1A, the cable losses are

If the CTs are not in close proximity to the relay it is advisabe to use 1A CTs to minimise the cable losses and to reduce the burden on the CTs.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 8/40 1.2.4 Dimensioning of phase CT

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

The consumption of the phase current input terminals of the MiCOM P220 relay is: 0.3 VA In = 5A In = 1A 0.025 VA

The rule to follow in the case of CT saturation is: The threshold for the short-circuit current should be set below 90% of the limiting overload current of CTs. Under these conditions the tripping is guaranteed for fault currents up to 50 times the value of saturation current without an aperiodic component of CT current.

Choice of phase CTs: Applications only for voltages 20 kV Rf = total resistance of the wiring (+ other possible loads on CT), in Ohms In = rated secondary current for CT and relay (1A or 5 A) Icc = maximum symmetrical three-phase fault current of the secondary wiring of CT (in Amps). CT rating (IEC 185) Load in VA 5A 1A 5A Circuitbreaker (0.3 + Rf x In2) (0.025 + Rf x In2) (0.3 + Rf x In2) Accuracy 5P10 5P10 5P K with K 1A (0.025 + Rf x In2) Note

Phase CT Breaking device Contactor or Switch + Fuse

Icc Setting of the 50 In threshold of short Icc 50 In


circuit current: 0.9 x K x In

5P K with K

NOTE:

For economic reasons, a CT with a 10% accuracy (10P) can be used instead of one with 5% (5P), however the thresholds of thermal overload and unbalance protections will be less precise, which can be perfectly acceptable if the motor has been oversized in relation to its duty or not used for heavy-duty services.

1.3

Characteristics acquisition Before setting the relay it is vital to ensure that the correct motor parameters detailed in appendix have been obtained.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 9/40

2.
2.1 2.1.1

SETTING FUNCTIONS
PROTECTION Menu Thermal overload [49] Overloads can result in excessive stator temperature rises in excess of the thermal limit of the winding insulation. Whilst this may not cause the motor to burn out immediately, it has been shown that the life of the motor can be shortened if these overloads persist. The life of the motor is not purely dependant on the temperature of the windings but on the time that it is exposed to these temperatures. Due to the relatively high thermal storage capacity of induction motors, infrequent overloads of a short duration may be tolerated without damage. Sustained overloads of a small percentage may result in premature ageing and insulation failure. In the same way, an unevenly distribution of load or a slight unbalance of the network brings about the appearance of negative sequence currents which also contribute to the heating of the rotor (for more details, see the negative overcurrent protection function). The motor temperature varies exponentially with the increase of the current. Similarly, the temperature decreases in the same way. So to provide a close sustained overload protection, the relay incorporates three thermal time constants, thanks to which the thermal reproduction of the relay is paired narrowly with the protected motor during heating and cooling conditions. The thermal withstand capability of the motor is affected by heating in the winding prior to the fault. The thermal replica is designed to take into account the extremes of zero pre-fault current, known as the cold condition, and full rated pre-fault current, known as the hot condition. With no pre fault current, the relay will be operating on the cold curve. When the motor is , or has been, running at full load prior to a fault, the windings will already be dissipating heat and the hot curve is applicable. Therefore, during normal operation, the relay will be operating within these two limits, unless programmed to do otherwise. However, it should be noted that the overload protection includes the monitoring of both the stator and the rotor. This protection can be realised in various ways: 1: direct measurement through the use of temperature sensors (see the corresponding paragraphs), 2: indirect measurement by the means of current measurement, 3: by a combination of the two preceding principles.

The P220 relay design combines all three principles listed. No.1 is detailed below in the paragraph dealing with overload protection through the use of temperature sensors. No.2 and No.3 are described in this paragraph.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 10/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

In the case of minor overloads and of light-duty service conditions, stator current measurement is sufficient to ensure protection. This control can be achieved using a time-independent current threshold setting for a definite time overcurrent protection or, still better, IDMT overcurrent protection. The thermal protection elements which are overheated by a fraction of the main current, have a time-constant which is very close to that of the motor. This makes it possible to obtain a real-time image of the thermal status of insulation. This type of protection takes into account the fact that the steady-state temperature of the motor is proportional to the square of the absorbed current, the protection is also provided with a cold curve and a hot curve to ensure that the relay takes into account the initial motor temperature. The thermal protection described above makes use of current measurement to protect the motor. Hence it will monitor balanced and unbalanced overloads. The thermal time-constant is adjustable in order to match any type of motor. The positive (I1) and negative (I2) components of the current are composed together in order to result in a equivalent thermal current replica of the temperature of the motor. This equivalent thermal current is given by the equation : Ieq = (I1 + Kex I2 ), where Ke is an adjustable parameter used to account for the effects of heating produced by the negative component of the current when developing the thermal image. From this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor is calculated every 5 cycles (every 100ms for a network of 50 Hz or 83.3ms for 60 Hz) by the relay in accordance with the following formula. i+1 = (Ieq/I>) . [1-e(-t/T) ] + i . e(-t/T) i : is the initial thermal state. If the absorbed current is less than the thermal overload threshold [I>], thus typically less than the nominal current or the full load current, then the thermal state will be less than 100% , so no tripping occurs. If the absorbed current is greater than the thermal overload threshold [I>], in this case the thermal state will be greater than 100% and so tripping will take place. In the thermal model selected, the time of tripping depends on the initial state of the motor. The equation used to calculate the tripping time for a thermal state of the motor at 100 % is: t = T x ln[ (K - i) / (K -1)] The equation is valid for currents whose value is constant over a certain period of time, where: the value of T, thermal time-constant which depends on the value of the ratio Ieq / I: T = Te1 if 0 < Ieq 2*I (overload curve ) T = Te2 (start-up curve ) if Ieq > 2*I T = Tr Ieq=0 (cooling curve motor stopped) if NOTE: Ieq = 0 is obtained through the logic input No.1 of the relay which recovers the information contactor position open.
2 2 2 2

I = thermal current threshold setting K = Ieq/ I i = initial thermal state of the motor (ex.: thermal state of 50% ! i=0.5)

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 11/40

The heating time-constant Te1 can be estimated from the motor heating curve as shown below.
Motor heating curve Temperature

m 0.632 m

Te

Time
P0170ENa

This curve corresponds to the following law: (t) = m * (1 e-t/Te) ,

Where: m Te t = = = maximum temperature after stabilisation of heat exchange, in degrees C heating time-constant time elapsed

The heating time-constant can be clearly defined. When a motor is absorbing its rated current indefinitely, it reaches 63.2% of its steady-state temperature (T = 63.2% m) after one time-constant Te. The cold curve of the motor is thus given by: t = Tr x ln[ K / (K 1)] Where the equation for the motor cooling temperature is given by.
2 2

= K (1 e t/Tr ).
When the motor is stopped, the rotor fan cooling is stopped also, hence the motor cooling down is few efficient. This causes the cooling time-constant to increase considerably This constant is generally much longer than the heating time-constant. In order to compensate for this phenomenon and to obtain a correct thermal replica, the cooling time constant is used by the relay. An adjustable cooling time-constant (Tr) is provided in order to take into account the various modes of cooling. The cooling time-constant Tr can be estimated from the motor cooling curve in the following way:

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 12/40


Motor cooling-down curve Temperature

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

0.368 m

Tr

Time
P0171ENa

This curve corresponds to the following law: (t) = m * e-t/Tr, Where: m Tr t = = = maximum temperature when motor is stopped cooling time-constant time elapsed

The cooling time-constant can be clearly defined . When a motor is stopped, its internal temperature decreases with time. This internal temperature reaches 36,8% of the initial temperature (temperature at the time when the motor was turned off) at the end of the period, which is equal to its time-constant Tr. The P220 relay also has: a thermal alarm to inform the user (when in operation mode) if the motor is likely to become overloaded before a trip occurs. Remedial action can then be taken before the motor is tripped. Inhibition of a thermal tripping during starting

During the start-up stage (i.e. during the parametrically defined start-up delay time tIstart), it is possible to inhibit thermal tripping. When thermal inhibition during start-up is enabled, the calculation of the thermal state during the start-up delay time tIstart remains effective but should this value exceed 90%, the value of the thermal state would be retained at 90%. When the start-up delay time expires, the thermal inhibition during start-up disappears. This function does not affect the operation of the thermal alarm feature. This inhibition during start-up can be useful for certain motors which can withstand a locked rotor for a very short time but normally have very long start up times. This can be the case of certain motors started using reduced voltage. The time-constant Te2 is then set to take into account rapid heating which occurs if the rotor is locked, whereas the motor would be thermally protected during the start-up stage by the function Start-up too long and, as the case may be, by the temperature sensors.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 Thermal prohibition of restart

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 13/40

To a certain extent, the thermal overload protection can limit the number of startups by selecting a curve located just above the point of start-up. It is is actually very difficult to satisfy the manufacturers recommendations, for the limit of the number of starts by the thermal overload protection. This may allow the motor to start and then to exceed the maximum temperature.

The purpose of the "Thermal prohibition of start-up "function is to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up sequence of the motor. The motor will have to cool down before it will be authorised to start. The tripping time for the thermal replica protection is calculated in the following way: ttrip = T * ln { [(Ieq / I>)2 - initial] / [(Ieq / I>)2 - 1] } (1)

in order to avoid thermal tripping during the start-up stage, ttrip > td. Therefore, according to (1), td < Te2 * ln { [(Id / I>)2 - forbid start] / [(Id / I>)2 - 1] } Hence it follows that the setting of the threshold of prohibition of start-up forbid must be lower than: forbid start < [(Id / I>)2 * (1 exp(td / Te2))] + exp Where: Id td Te2 I> ttrip = = = = = actual start-up current, actual start-up time, thermal time-constant at the moment of start-up, current threshold of thermal overload, time of tripping for the thermal replica protection.
(td / Te2) start

Thermal image influenced by the ambiant temperature

At the beginning of this paragraph we said that the overload protection afforded by the P220 relay can also be ensured by a combination of a temperature sensor (direct heating measurement), and a current measurement (indirect heating measurement). In this case, it is possible to modify the calculated thermal image of the motor by making use of information about the temperature outside of the motor. The programmed thermal current threshold can be corrected using correction factors to give a more precise representation of the thermal state of the motor. This thermal current threshold correction factor is applied automatically by the relay when calculating the thermal state of the motor if this facility is set on. The values of this factor is given below: Ambient temperature Thermal current threshold correction factor (Coef) 40 1 45 0.95 50 0.90 55 0.85 60 0.80 65 0.75

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 14/40 A typical setting of the thermal protection is :

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

Thermal overload current threshold [I >] : between 105% et 108% (max.) of the motor rated current (this threshold is typically equivalent to the full load current). NOTE: The nominal current : is the current value for which the moteur supplies his maximum efficiency. The Full Load current : is the limit value of the thermal current value of the motor with the time under its continuous duty rating (This term is used in North of America)

Negative sequence current recognition factor : [Ke] = 3 Heating time-constants (Te1), during the start-up (Te2) and the cooling-down time constants (Tr): The manufacturer should be consulted for the heating and cooling time constants. Te1 must be set to be equal to, or even slightly lower than the motor manufacturers value ( Stator thermal heating). Te2 must be typically set to be lower than or equal to Te1. It is used to modify the thermal curve of the motor during the start phase . In case of a SOFT start, (Yye/Delta) for example, the current absorbed by the motor after the start phase is 57% of the current controlled by the relay (Delta connection) while durning the start phase ( Yye connection), the current absorbed by the motor is equal to the current monitored by the relay. For that, Te2 is used to reduce the operating time during the start up. For application with Direct-on-line start up, adjust Te2=Te1, which results in one thermal curve. It is important to plot the thermal characteristics chosen to assure that the COLD curve has no intersection area with the start up charactersistics. In certain applications, the time constants could not be available. However, a graphical presentation of these values could be given. In this case, Te1 should be selected so once it is plotted, it will match the cold motor curve. For applications where neither constant time values nor thermal curves are given, Te1 and Te2 should be chosen in such a way that they fall above the start up characteristics but below the motor locked Rotor current threshold. In this way, the thermal overload protection assure to a certain degree the protection under locked rotor conditions. The cooling-down time-constant Tr should ideally be set slightly higher than the value provided by the manufacturer. This element is important with motors having differents functionning cycles because the precise information of the motor thermal state is needed during heating and cooling phases. Il is usually a multiple of Te1.

REMARK: IF HOWEVER THE MANUFACTURERS DATA ARE NOT KNOWN, ONE SHOULD SET THE FOLLOWING VALUES: TE1 = TE2 = 14MIN AND TR = 28MIN.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 15/40

Alarm threshold ALARM: Its setting is primarily related to the motor operation modes and the concept of protection. A typical adjustment consists of setting the threshold ALARM to be slightly higher than the ratio (Irated motor / I>)2 , which generally corresponds to a value of about 90%.

2.1.2

Short Circuit.[50/51] A phase to phase short-circuit at the terminals of the motor or in the feeder cables, draws very large currents capable of damaging the motor and its feeder cable This also poses the threat of fire within the motor room. In this case ,it is essential to detect the fault and to send the tripping command rapidly to the breaking device. To attain these objectives, the P220 relay is provided with an overcurrent element operating on fundamental component, with a settable definite time delay. The current threshold must be set as low as possible, without tripping due to the start-up current of the motor the contribution of the motor to an external fault as well as the re-acceleration current due to voltage drops.

In order to achieve this, the direct on-line start-up current must always be taken into account in the calculation of the setting even if the motor started under reduced voltage (soft start). Thus the short-circuit current threshold must be set higher than the direct on-line start-up current value. Taking into account aperiodic current components, the typical settings are: [I>>] = 130% x kstart x Inmotor [I>>] = 180% x kstart x Inmotor and and [tI>>] = 100ms [tI>>] = 0 ms

where kstart : start-up current of the motor in per unit. It should then be checked that the threshold [I>>] is lower than : 90% of the limiting saturation current of the CTs used, and 1/3 of the minimum three-phase fault current at the motor terminals.
IF A FUSED CONTACTOR IS USED TO CONTROL THE MOTOR , THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST NOT TRIP THE CONTACTOR. THE SHORT CIRCUIT PROTECTION MUST BE DISABLED AND THE FUSE SHOULD INTERRUPT THE FAULT CURRENT. IF THE CONTACTOR IS ALLOWED TO INTERRUPT FAULT CURRENT, SERIOUS DAMAGE COULD BE CAUSED DUE TO EXCESSIVE ARCING AT THE CONTACTS.

IMPORTANT:

2.1.3

Earth fault [50N/51N] Overheating of the stator windings is likely to lead to insulation deterioration. Since the windings are surrounded by an earthed metal case, stator faults usually manifest themselves as earth faults. To protect against this, the P220 relay is provided with two independent earth fault overcurrent elements with settable definite time delays. This function reacts only to the fundamental component of the earth fault current, and thus remains insensitive to the disturbances of the higher-order harmonics (equal to or higher than 2).

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 16/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

The earth fault protection function may be provided either by residual connection of the 3 phase current transformers (CTs), or by the use of a core-balance current transformer. It is preferable to use a core balance current transformer as this is more stable and is more sensitive. If residually connected CTs are used, the tripping setting would have to be increased by as much as 10 % higher than the rated current of the CT. This is highly undesirable because of the resulting increase in the earth fault current setting. Incorrect tripping can result from the saturation of one or more CTs during motor starting. Increased stability can be achieved in two ways : increasing the current threshold, insertion of a stabilising resistance in series with the P220 relay.

The value of stabilising resistor can be found from the following equation. Rstab > (Id / Is) * (RCT + 2*Rf + RRE), where: Id Is RCT Rf RRE = = = = = start-up current magnitude brought to the secondary earth fault setting in Amps (threshold Io> or Io>>) dc resistance of CT secondary windings. resistance of single lead from CT to relay other resistances connected in series to the CT (relays etc.)

The following earthing systems may be employed. 2.1.3.1 Neutral earthed through an impedance The earth fault current is mainly comprising active current component resulting from the resistance of neutral point, the capacitive zero sequence (residual) contribution from the cables being of much lower value, even negligible. Typical settings are : in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs: [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point, and [t Io>>] = 100 ms [Io>>] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and lower than the residual current resulting from the resistance of neutral point, [tIo>>] = 100 ms

in the case of a core balance transformer.

Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 2.1.3.2 Insulated neutral :

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 17/40

A core balanced transformer is used as the fault current is due to the cable capacitive leakage current. A single earth fault will not cause the relay to trip but the fault should be localised . Typical settings are : [ Io>> ] is 2 times higher than the capacitive residual current resulting from the motor feeder cables in case of external fault, and lower than the capacitive residual current resulting from the other cables, [tIo>>] = 100 ms.

Note that current settings lower than 1 Amps are usually not applied. If these settings are not compatible with the maximum value of the earth fault current, it is then necessary to use a directional earth fault relay. 2.1.3.3 Solidly earthed neutral The earth fault current is mainly inductive current, with magnitude being close to that of the three-phase short-circuit fault currents. The contribution of capacitive residual current from the cables is negligible. Typical settings are : in the case of a residual connection to three phase CTs: 2.1.4 [Io>>] is higher than 10% of the CT rated primary current, and [tIo>>] = 100 ms

Unbalance [46] Under normal motor running conditions only positive sequence current components flow. The presence of a negative sequence component produces a field revolving in an opposite direction to that of the rotor. It induces rotor winding currents at double the supply network frequency. The skin effect in the rotor winding bars at this frequency can cause a significant increase in the resistance of the rotor. The rotor will overheat leading to deformation of the rotor bars and damage to them. This imposes additional heating of the stator that is in excess of the manufacturers rating. Even if the thermal protection provided by this relay takes into account negative sequence component of the current, it will not account for the additional heating due to high unbalance rate. In the event of the motor losing one phase of its supply, considerable overheating would occur, hence protection for negative sequence is employed separately In order to provide this function, the P220 relay is equipped with two independent negative sequence overcurrent elements. The first one, denoted by [Ii>], is an alarm threshold associated with an adjustable constant time. The second, denoted [Ii>>], is a threshold of tripping associated with a inverse time characteristic curve. The features of this curve are described in chapter 5.3 of this technical guide. The equation of this curve is : for 0.2 < (I2/In) < 2 --> t = 1.2 / (I2/ In)

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 18/40 This type of curve has the following advantages: 1. For an external fault:

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

to desensitise the relay during a violent unbalance fault occurring upstream or on external feeders, when the motor temporarily behaves like a negative current generator ; selective tripping at the faulty feeder level is secured - the inverse time characteristic curve allows co-ordination with the faulty feeder protection relay. to avoid nuisance tripping which may occur due to high starting currents causing the CTs to saturate. For a motor fault. To ensure rapid fault interruption, but to retain co-ordination with protective fuses when fused contactors are used.

2.

It should be noted that the single-phase and two-phase faults also generate negative currents. However, the value of the single-phase fault current is generally limited, and in any case these faults are eliminated by relevant protection with a time shorter than that afforded by the IDMT curve. Typical settings are 2.1.5 alarm threshold : [Ii>] = 15% of the motor rated current, with a delay time of about 8 to 10s, tripping threshold : [Ii>>] = 20% of the motor rated current.

Excessive long start [48] The start-up current is specific to each motor and depends on the start-up method used (direct on-line, autotransformer, rotor resistance insertion, etc.). As for the startup time, it is dependent of the load connected to the motor. During the start-up period, this current surge imposes a thermal strain on the rotor. This is exaggerated as the rotor will have lost all of its ventilation because it does not rotate at the full speed. Consequently, a long start-up causes a rapid heating of the motor. For this reason, this protection is complementary to the thermal overload protection, and makes it possible to check that the start-up sequence does not exceed the parameters given by the manufacturer The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of motor start-up detection as follows : closure of the contactor/circuit breaker, or closure of the contactor/circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current threshold [Istart].

The user can configure either option using the CONFIGURATION menu. Method 1 is recommended. This detects the start sequence on the circuit breaker closure. The function " Excessive long start " is initiated either by the detection of a start-up sequence, or (under normal operation) by the detection of a phase of re-acceleration. If at the end of delay time [tIstart] the current remains higher than the threshold [Istart], then a trip takes place.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 Typical settings are : [Istart] is equal to:

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 19/40

1.5*[I>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated current; 2*[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current; 3*[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the rated current. 2.1.6 [tIstart] = 120 % of the time of start-up and shorter than withstand time for the motor.

Locked rotor [51LR/50S] There are two possible conditions for the rotor becoming locked : at motor start-up or during normal run. Whatever the case, a locked rotor produces an input current equivalent to the direct on-line starting current. The most frequent cause of a locked rotor is to a phase break (eg: melting of a fuse protecting the motor, or one pole of a contactor remaining open.). A stationary motor can not start and remains stationary with two phases feeding the stator. In the same way, a locked rotor can take place after the loss of a phase after the motor has been working normally. The appearance and the importance of a locked rotor depend on the motor load at the time when the loss of phase occurs. In both cases the result is likely to be a thermal overloading of the rotor windings. Under healthy conditions, a revolving flux is induced in the rotor, which generates balanced rotor current in the windings which produce symmetrical rotor heating. In the event of the loss of one phase of the supply, a heterogeneous flux is induced in the rotor as a result of the positive component and the negative components of the current. This causes uneven heating of the rotor windings which depend on the position of the rotor bars. This can lead to the damage of the rotor bars. For these reasons, it is important to eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.

2.1.6.1 Locked rotor during the start-up stage [50S] This function is enabled only during the motor start-up stage. In order to take advantage of this function, the motor has to be equipped with a tachometric control, which indicates if the motor turns. This information is carried to a digital input of the relay so that the relay can detect whether the motors speed is or is not zero. A locked rotor is detected if, after expiration of delay time [tIstall], the digital input indicates zero speed (logic 0). Motors for which the real start-up time is shorter than their locked rotor withstand time can be protected against locked rotor condition at start-up without the help of a tachymetric control device (speed switch). For such cases, the use of [tIstart] time setting (refer to [48] Excessive long start function) shorter than the motor locked rotor withstand time allows to provide efficient protection against both too long start-up sequence and locked rotor at start-up conditions.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 20/40 2.1.6.2 Rotor stalled during normal run [51LR]

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

This function is valid only outside the re-acceleration and start-up stages. Tripping takes place if the current remains higher than [Istall] for a time period equal to or higher than delay time [stall]. Typical settings of the function [ 51LR/50S ] are : [Istall] : 1.5*[I>] if the motor start-up current is lower than 4 times the rated current; 2*[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 4 times the rated current and lower than 8 times the rated current; 3[I>] if the motor start-up current is equal to or higher than 8 times the rated current. [tIstall] is 1 to 2 s for a pump and a fan, and 5 to 10 s for a crusher. In all the cases, this setting must be lower than the withstand time for the motor with the rotor stalled.

2.1.7

Loss of load [37] This function makes it possible to detect the motor running without a load connected on the output shaft. It is automatically disabled when the motor is off, and it is reactivated after the inhibit time has expired [Tinhib]. This delay time [Tinhib] allows the motor to perform an off-load start. The use of this undercurrent protection function allows: protection against the electrical pumps becoming unprimed. protection against a drive belt or drive shaft breakdown.

Typical settings are: [I<] = higher than the no-load running current of the motor and lower than the normal running current of the motor in normal operation, [Tinhib] = This setting depends on the load connected to the motor. If the motor is started on load , this delay time is set to its minimal value, that is to say 0,05 s. If the motor is idle-started, this delay time is set to be slightly longer than the load increase time of the motor. [tI<] = depends on the load driven by the motor (often set to a few seconds).

2.1.8

RTD probe [49/38] and Thermistor [49] Prolonged overloads make the windings hot, which can cause a premature ageing of the insulation. In the same way, the excessive heating of the bearings can lead to irreversible damage. As explained in the paragraph dealing with the thermal overload protection [ 49], this function can be realised either indirectly, by the means of an overcurrent relay or using the thermal replica, and/or by the means of direct temperature measurement. Certain motors can be equipped with resistor probes, placed in the stator slots. They are resistors made out of platinum, or sometimes out of nickel or copper, their resistance varying with the temperature. There are generally six of them, distributed in the stator winding.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 21/40

The setting of the tripping and alarm thresholds depends on the temperature class of the motor, the ambient temperature and the altitude of the site where the motor is installed. When the correction of the thermal replica by the measurement of the motor outside temperature is used, RTD1 probe should be placed near the cooling air inlet of the motor. 2.2 2.2.1 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu Limitation of the number of start-ups during a given period of time [66] The start-up of a motor is often carried out at the price of an increase in temperature above the normal level especially in the case of several successive start-ups having relatively long start-up times. In this situation there exists the danger of premature ageing of the motor insulation and, furthermore, the rotor undergoes high thermal strains. For more precise details, see the paragraphs relating to the excessive start-up times functions and locked rotor. In order to limit the start-up repetition frequency for a motor, the P220 relay has a counting and locking system based on four following parameters: duration of the reference period; the number of cold starts; the number of hot starts; the restart prohibition delay time [Tinterdiction].

The reference delay time is activated once a start-up is detected, and provided that it was initially equal to zero for the reference period, a counter records the number of hot starts, and another one records the number of cold starts. If one of them reaches the upper limit threshold programmed by the user, the delay time [Tinterdiction] is initiated but the start-up inhibition signal will be activated only at the moment when the motor stops the next time. As long as this delay time has not expired, any start-up is inhibited. It should be noted that a start-up is considered as cold start if the motors thermal status is lower than 50%, and that a start-up is described as hot start if the thermal state is equal to or higher than 50%. The recommended settings have to be compared to the motor characteristics provided by the manufacturer. Nevertheless, the programming of these parameters can also depend on the operation mode of the set motor and/motor-driven unit as a whole. If these data are not available, the default settings are as follows: duration of the reference period = 60min; the number of cold starts = 3; the number of hot starts = 2; the delay time of prohibition of restart-up [Tinterdiction] = 30min

It should be noted that this function does not make it possible to limit the repetition frequency for any two successive sequences of start-ups as long as [Tinterdiction] has not been initiated. This limitation is ensured by the complementary function " Time between two successive start-ups " (see the corresponding paragraph).

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 22/40 2.2.2 Time between two successive start-ups [66]

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

This function is complementary to that limiting the number of successive starts during a given period of time. It makes it possible to prevent two consecutive motor starts . This may be a limitation of the motor or of the motor starting equipment. The setting of the delay time [Tbetween which is required between 2 start-ups. 2.2.3 Re-acceleration A fault in an installation, or a fault close to the sources of supply may cause high voltage drops which will result in supply voltages lower than the minimal permissible levels. For example, a three-phase fault in a point of the network produces voltage dip in the equipment in the neighbourhood. This voltage dip could result in difficulties, which do not necessarily disappear with elimination of the fault and the ultimate return to a normal voltage. As the voltage dip appears, the motor torque, which is roughly proportional to the square of the voltage, undergoes a brutal reduction causing the deceleration of the motor. This deceleration is a function of the amplitude and the duration of the voltage dip. It is mainly governed by the moment of inertia of the rotating masses and by the torque-speed characteristic of the motor-driven motor. In the most unfavourable case, the motor can stall, the new torque that it develops being lower than the braking torque of the motor-driven unit. This phenomenon is illustrated on the following figure.
Torque Cm1 Cm0 = Cr0
2 start

] should be based on the minimum time

Cr1

Cm

Cm N1

Cm0 Nn Ns Speed of rotation


P0172ENa

The curves shown above represent, respectively: motor torque Cm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to the rated voltage Vn; motor torque C'm versus rotation speed N and corresponding to a voltage V lower than Vn; braking torque Cr of the motor-driven unit, versus rotation speed.

When the voltage dip appears, the motor torque passes abruptly from the value Cm0 = Cr0 to the value C'm0 < Cr0. Therefore, the motor-drive unit will slow down, and when the voltage is restored, the motor torque abruptly increases to the value Cm1, whereas the braking torque is of value Cr1. Hence the motor cannot accelerate and would return to its normal speed only if Cm1 is higher than Cr1 (see the figure above).

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 23/40

After the fault has cleared, the motor has a value of internal impedance close to the corresponding value when it is stopped. So, when the system voltage is reestablished, the motor draws a current close to its start-up current at the full voltage. This current is higher if the motor slip becomes high. This stage of re-acceleration does not always involve serious consequences, except if a number of large motors are re-powered on simultaneously. In this case, these motors can result in large voltage dip further restricting the re-acceleration of the motors. So, it may be necessary to carry out load shedding of a certain number of motors, in order to be able to ensure the re-acceleration of the priority motors. The parameters of MiCOM relay can either be set so as to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor after a voltage dip, or they can also be set to give a command to stop the motor in the event of prolonged voltage dip. 2.2.3.1 Authorisation of re-acceleration An external voltage relay connected next to busbars is used to report on any voltage dip as well as to indicate any restoration of the voltage. This voltage dip information is sent via a wiring link to a logic input of the MiCOM P220 relay programmed at VOLT. DIP Treacc delay time should be set to be equal to the maximum duration of voltage dip of the network for which one wishes to authorise a re-acceleration of the motor. Thus, for any voltage dip shorter than Treacc delay time, an authorisation of re-acceleration will be activated. On the other hand, if the voltage dip lasts longer than Treacc delay time, the relay does not modify its operation and any attempt of re-acceleration of the motor could be seen by the relay as a Rotor locked condition (the amplitude of the re-acceleration current being the same as that in Rotor locked condition) and, consequently, causing a possible tripping command. 2.2.3.2 Load shedding on voltage dip The same voltage relay can be used to realise load shedding when the supply voltage dips. Two cases are possible: When it is desired to turn off the motor in the event of the voltage dip, When it is desired to turn off the motor only if the voltage dip lasts longer than the value it was assigned in the re-acceleration authorisation.

A programmed logic input on EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) should to be connected to the voltage relay detecting the presence of a voltage dip. Associated delay time tEXT1 (or tEXT2) will be set as follows: equal to the duration of voltage dip for which one wishes to carry out a load shedding, equal to Treacc.

The external tripping command EXT. 1 (or EXT. 2) will be programmed to send the shutdown command (assignment on the output relay RL1). Thus any voltage dip longer than the programmed duration will result in a shutdown command.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 24/40 NOTE:

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

The determination of the maximum duration for which one wishes to authorise re-acceleration of the motor is specific to each site and it depends on the characteristics of the network (source impedance, impedance of the other loads - in particular, presence of other revolving machines) as well as of the characteristics of the given motor and its load (magnitude of the direct-on-line start-up current, inertia). The value of this duration is generally obtained as a result of a study of the dynamic stability of the system. The voltage dip information generated by the voltage relay must exist as long as the conditions of voltage dip exist. With the return of the voltage on the busbars, this voltage dip information must disappear as soon as possible. The voltage relay used to generate voltage dip information must have very short pick-up time and drop off time, ideally less than one and half periods (times lower than 30 ms for a 50 Hz system). This assumes that the value of the voltage is the same on the busbars as on the terminals of the motor. If this is not the case, it will be necessary to estimate the voltage drop between the busbars and the motors terminals and to take this into account when setting the voltage relay thresholds corresponding to appearance and disappearance of the of voltage dip conditions.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 25/40

3.
3.1

EXAMPLE OF NUMERICAL APPLICATION


Network data MiCOM P220 current input ranges: Phase current input : In = 5 A ; Earth current input : Ion = 1 A Breaking device type : circuit breaker Maximum value of the three-phase short-circuit current on the busbars 6.2 kV: Icc3 = 9 kA Neutral point connection mode for the network 6.2 kV : by a resistance limiting the maximum value of the earth fault current to 30 A Length of the feeder cable connecting the motor to the busbars 6.2k V : 100 m Measuring transformers : CT ratio: 300 / 5A Core balance CT connection: ratio 25

"Speed switch" device available

3.2

Motor data:

Induction motor: rated power rated voltage rated current open-circuit (no-load) current start-up type (direct-on -line, soft) start-up current direct start-up current (if soft start used) start-up time maximum repetition frequency of starts withstand time for locked rotor (for hot & cold start) heating curve transient characteristic curve at unbalance permanent allowable unbalance motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, crasher, mill, pump, fan...) start-up : no-load/ load ==> Pn = 2200kW - cos = 0.8 ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ==> ----> ----> ==> ----> ----> ==> ----> Vn = 6.2kV 50 Hz In = 256 A Ino-load = 134A Direct --Id = 5.4*In i.e. 1382A td = 4 s Hot = x 2, cold = x 3 2s --14min, 10min, 28min ----pump no-load (30 s loading after the end of start-up)

time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling- down ==>

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 26/40 3.3 List of settings: OP PARAMETERS Menu Password Reference Frequency CONFIGURATION Menu CONFIG.SELECT Submenu Change Group Input Setting Group Default display Start detection criterion Analogue output type (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional) RTD type (optional) CT RATIO Submenu Primary rating of the phase CT Secondary rating of the phase CT Primary rating of the earth CT Secondary rating of the earth CT LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus Assignment: thermal tripping (overload) Assignment: thermal alarm ALARM Assignment: tI>> Assignment: tIo> Assignment: tIo>> Assignment: tIi> Assignment: tIi>> Assignment: tI< Assignment: tIstart (excessively long start) Assignment: tIstall (stalled rotor when running) Assignment: locked rotor at start Assignment: emergency restart Assignment: forbidden start Assignment: tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM, tRTD3 ALARM (optional) Assignment: tRTD1TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP, tRTD3 TRIP (optional) 300 5 25 1 LED 5 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No LED 6 No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes No No No No EDGE 1 % I LOAD AAAA ALST 50 Hz

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

52A (closing of the breaking device) 4 - 20 mA % I LOAD PT100

LED 7 Yes No No No No No No No No No No No No No Yes

LED 8 No Yes No No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes No

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 Submenus Assignment: tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM, tRTD6 ALARM (optional) Assignment: tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP, tRTD6 TRIP (optional) Assignment: Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional) Assignment: tEXT1 Assignment: tEXT2 Assignment: motor stopped Assignment: motor running Assignment: successful start Configuration Inputs submenu Inputs : 54321 COMMUNICATION MODBUS Menu Communication enabled ? Data transmission rate Parity Number of data bits Number of stop bits Relay address Date Format Yes 19 200 Bauds No 8 1 1 PRIVATE 11111 LED 5 No No No No No No No No LED 6 No No No No No No No No

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 27/40 LED 7 No Yes No No No No No No LED 8 Yes No No No No No No No

Programming for Group No.1 of PROTECTION Menu: THERM.OVERLOAD[49] Submenu Thermal overload function enabled ? Thermal inhibition on start enabled ? Threshold I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr Influence RTD (optional) ALARM enabled? Thermal alarm threshold ALARM FORBID START enabled ? FORBID START 270 A Primary setting Secondary Comments setting Yes No 0.9In (CT) 3 14 min 10 min 28 min No Yes 92% Yes 78% 0,78 < (1382 / 270)2 * (1-exp(4 / 10*60)) +exp(5 / 10*60)) 0,92 > (256 / 270)2 See motor characteristics See motor characteristics See motor characteristics 5.5% of overload authorised = 1.055 x In(motor)

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 28/40 Submenu [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT Short-circuit function enabled ? Threshold I>> tI>> Submenu [50/51] EARTH FAULT Earth fault function enabled ?: threshold Io> Thresholds Io> tIo> Earth fault function enabled ?: threshold Io>> Threshold Io>> tIo>> Submenu [46] UNBALANCE Function Unbalance enabled ?: threshold Ii> Threshold Ii> tli> Function Unbalance enabled ?: threshold Ii>> Threshold Ii>> 51.2A 25.6 A Primary setting 2A Primary setting 1800A Primary setting Secondary Comments setting Yes 6In 0.1s Secondary Comments setting No 0.002Ion 0s Yes 0.08Ion 0.1s Secondary Comments setting Yes 0.085 In (CT) 10s Yes 0.171 In (CT)

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

130% of motor start-up current

Only one earth fault current threshold can be programmed

Setting to 6,7 % of maximum earth fault current

Alarm threshold enabled Setting to 10% of Inmotor

Tripping threshold enabled Setting to 20% of Inmotor

Submenu [48] EXCESS LONG START Excess long start function enabled ? Threshold Istart tIstart

Primary setting

Secondary Comments setting Yes

540A

2I 5s

Id = 5.4*Inmotor ! Istart = 2*I 1.2 * td = 4.8s

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 Submenu [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR Block rotor function enabled ? tIstall Stalled-in-run rotor function enabled ? Threshold Istall Blocked-at-start rotor function enabled ? Submenu [37] LOSS OF LOAD Loss of load function enabled ? Threshold I< tI< Tinhib Submenu [66] START NUMBER Start number limitation function enabled ? Treference Hot starts number Cold starts number Tinterdiction Submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START Time between starts function enabled ? Tbetween 2 start Submenu RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? Treacc Primary setting Primary setting Primary setting 165A Primary setting 540A Primary setting Secondary Comments setting Yes 1.8s Yes 2I Yes

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 29/40

See motor characteristics

Id= 5.4*Inmotor ! Istall = 2*I Presence of zero speed detector is necessary (speed switch)

Secondary Comments setting Yes 0.55In 3s 40s Motor-driven pump Higher than no-load current Depends on process Tinhib > (5 + 30)

Secondary Comments setting Yes Parameters depend on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

60 min 2 3 30 min Secondary Comments setting Yes Parameter depends on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

10min Secondary Comments setting Yes Parameter depends on trade-off of motor characteristics against process requirements

0.2s

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 30/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

4.
4.1

SPECIFIC APPLICATIONS
Logic selectivity The objective is to reduce the fault clearing times by reducing the selectivity steps. Thus the logic selectivity makes it possible to reduce the clearing time of the busbar fault while preserving a perfect co-ordination between protection devices. The example given below involves the MiCOM P122 relay but it is absolutely possible to replace it by another MiCOM relay used as lead-in protection, for example a standard relay P123, P141, P142 or P143.

P122
26 28 _

Logic selectivity

+ 7 11 7

+ 11 7

+ 11

P220
M1

P220

P220

M2

M3
P0173ENa

In our example, the delay times of short-circuit protection (I>>) and earth fault protection (Io>>) of the P220 (downstream protections) and P122 (upstream protection) relays are set to 100 ms. A fault on the busbars will be detected only by protection (P122) and the command to clear the fault will be generated after 100ms. In the event of fault on a motor feeder cable, the P220 relay protecting it will send a signal through to the P122 relay. On receipt of this logic signal the P122 relay will use a logically selected delay that has been separately set. This delay time will replace the normal delay time while there is an output from one of the P220 relays. In our example, it could be set to 350 ms to correspond to a 250 ms selectivity step between the downstream protection and the upstream protection. Thus, 100 ms after the appearance of the fault, protection P220 of the outgoing motor feeder will generate the command to clear the fault. In the event of non-clearance of the fault, the fault can be eliminated selectively 250 ms later thanks to the upstream protection used in logic selectivity.

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 NOTE:

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 31/40 The MiCOM P220 relays located downstream can deliver following instantaneous information indicating that a current threshold was exceeded: phase overcurrent threshold I>> earth overcurrent threshold Io> earth overcurrent threshold Io>> If this facility is required then additional cabling will be required between the output contacts of the motor protection relay and the selected logic input of the upstream relay. The logic selectivity delay time of the upstream relay must be set selectively with reference to the settings of normal delay times for the I>> and Io>> thresholds of the downstream relays.

Example of programming: Logic selectivity between the P220 protections installed on the motor outgoing feeders and the MiCOM P122 protection relay on the lead-in. P220 relay PROTECTION menu: SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51] Designation FUNCTION I>> ? tI>> Function Use of the short-circuit threshold (I>>) enabled ? Delay time of the phase overcurrent threshold Programming yes 100ms

PROTECTION menu: EARTH FAULT submenu [50N/51N] Designation FUNCTION Io>> ? tIo>> Function Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold 5 1 1 4 0 0 Programming yes 100ms 3 0 0 2 0 0

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: Submenu AUX OUTPUT Assignment I>> Assignment Io>>

The instantaneous information of one of thresholds I>> and Io>> being exceeded is transmitted to the output relay RL5 of the P220 relay.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 32/40 MiCOM P122 (or P123 or P140) relay PROTECTION menu: [50/51] PHASE O/C Submenu Designation [51] I>> tI>> Function Use of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ? Delay time of the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

Programming yes 100ms

PROTECTION menu: [50N/51N] E/Gnd Submenu Designation [51N] Ie>> tIe>> Function Use of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Io>>) enabled ? Delay time of the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold Programming yes 100ms

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu Designation INPUT 2 Function Parameter setting of the logic input No.2 to receive the logic selectivity command Programming SL LG1

AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: SEL LOG1 Submenu Designation SEL1 tI>> SEL1 tIe>> tSEL1 Function Use of "logic selectivity" function to protect the 2nd phase overcurrent threshold (I>>) enabled ? Use of "logic selectivity" to protect the 2nd earth overcurrent threshold (Ie>>) enabled ? Setting of delay time associated to the "logic selectivity" function Programming yes yes 350 ms

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 4.2

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 33/40

Authorisation of re-acceleration Load shedding on voltage dips Let us consider three motors M1, M2 and M3 connected to the same busbars. A voltage relay, for example MiCOM P922 relay, is used to detect any voltage dip on the busbars. Each MiCOM P220 relay receives from the P922 relay the voltage dip information via its logic inputs. The following functioning is required: In the event of voltage dip shorter than 250 ms, the re-acceleration of the motor M1 must be possible, but if the voltage dip is longer than 250 ms the motor M1 must be stopped. In the event of voltage dip duration equal or longer than 100 ms, the motors M2 and M3 must be stopped.

MiCOM P922
18 20

_ 17 19

_ 21 23 P220

_ 17 19 P220

_ 17 19 P220

M1

M2

M3
P0174ENa

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 34/40 Programming the P220 relay associated to the motor M1: REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu Function Authorisation of re-acceleration enabled ? Treacc INPUTS Submenu Assignment input No.3 Assignment input No.4 Assignment input No.5 tEXT1 NONE EXT 1 VOLT. DIP 250 ms Yes 250 ms

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a prolonged voltage dip, logic input No.5 is used to authorise re-acceleration. AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu EXT 1 ? Yes

Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1). Programming the P220 relays associated to the motors M2 and M3: REACCEL AUTHORIZ Submenu Re-acceleration authorisation function enabled ? Treacc INPUTS Submenu Assignment input No.3 Assignment input No.4 Assignment input No.5 tEXT1 NONE EXT 1 NONE 100 ms No 0,2 second

Logic input No.4 is used to stop the motor in the event of a voltage dip whose duration is equal to or more than 100 ms. AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: TRIP OUTPUT RLY Submenu EXT 1 ? Yes

Information of tripping EXT 1 is sent to the trip output relay (RL1).

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220 4.3 Setting groups

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 35/40

If an electrical network can be fed from two different sources of supply, the relay can make use of two different setting groups each individually set to accommodate the parameters of the two networks. For example if a network is normally fed via the mains distribution system, and it is provided with a standby emergency generator, the relay can be provided with two groups of fault settings for the two sources of supply. The passage of a group of parameters to another will have to be carried out each time the networks supply mode changes (distributor mains/generator). A pulse will have to be sent to a logic input of the relay that has been programmed to allow this. The use of the two groups of settings also proves useful for double-speed motors. For these motors, the setting group No.1 could be used when the motor turns at the lower speed (1), the setting group No.2 being used when the motor turns at the higher speed (2) An impulse must be sent to the relay each time the motor changes speed so that it passes from one setting group to the other.

_
13 15 P220

_
13 15 P220

_
13 15 11 P220

M1

M2

M3
P0175ENa

Programming the P220 relays associated with the motors M1, M2 and M3: AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu: INPUTS Submenu Assignment input No.3 SET GROUP

Logic input No.3 is used to pass from one setting group to another.

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 36/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

5.

BIBLIOGRAPHY
Moteurs asynchrones triphass ferms, AREVA Rseau Commercial France Guide de lingnierie lectrique, ELECTRA, Lavoisier Protective relays APPLICATION GUIDE, AREVA Electrotechnique Industrielle, Guy SEGUIER Francis NOTELET, Lavoisier Symmetrical components for power systems engineering, J.Lewis BLACKBURN

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 37/40

6.

APPENDIX A : SERVICE DUTY

P0229ENa

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 38/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P0230ENa

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 39/40

7.

APPENDIX B : INFORMATION NEEDED FOR ADJUSTMENT


Maximum short-current between phases at the motors terminals Neutral point connection mode for the network feeding the motor Characteristics provided by the motor manufacturer - rated power - rated voltage - rated current - start-up type (direct-in-line, soft) - start-up current - direct start-up current (if soft start-up used) - start-up time - maximum repetition frequency of start-ups -- withstand time for blocked rotor (for hot & cold start) - heating curve - time-constants of: heating , start-up, cooling-down - transient characteristic curve at unbalance allowable permanent unbalance - motor service use (driven equipment: compressor, breaker, pump, ventilator...) - open-circuit current (for loss of load protection Ratios for measured-value converters (CT, PT and balance-core CT) connected to the protection Assignment output contacts of the protection relay

P220/EN AP/B43 Page 40/40

Technical Guide Application Guide MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43

User Guide

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 1/54

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2

INTRODUCTION
Object of this document Definitions

3
3 3

2. 3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4

DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY THE OPERATOR INTERFACE
Description of the front panel The LEDs The keypad ALARM keys Programming keypad Liquid crystal display screen

4 6
6 7 8 8 8 8

4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10

THE MENUS
Default display Access to the menus Access to the setting parameters Protection by password Entering the password / modification of the parameters The OP. PARAMETERS menu The CONFIGURATION menu The CONFIG. SELECT submenu The CT RATIO submenu The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus The MEASUREMENTS menu The PROCESS menu The TRIP STATISTICS menu The COMMUNICATION menu The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus

9
10 11 11 11 11 13 13 13 16 16 17 18 19 19 20

4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload conditions 21 4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu 25 4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu 26 4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu 26 4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts 27 4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu 28 4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load conditions 29

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 2/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 30 31 32 32 34 36 39 43 44 45 45 46 46 47 48 48 49 50 51 51 51

4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional) 4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional) 4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu 4.11.1 4.11.2 4.11.3 4.11.4 4.11.5 4.11.6 4.11.7 4.11.8 4.11.9 4.11.10 4.11.11 4.12 4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3 4.13 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays The SW SUPERVISION submenu: The RECORD menu The FAULT RECORD submenu The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu The SW MONITORING submenu ALARM messages

4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages 4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages

5.
5.1 5.2

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Event records Recording of the form of the starting current

53
53 53

6.
6.1 6.2

PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS


Connection configuration Configuration of the relay and PC

54
54 54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 3/54

1.
1.1

INTRODUCTION
Object of this document The purpose of this document is to present the characteristics of the P220 motor protection relay and to guide the operator through the setting procedures. After an overview of the product, this manual explains the functions performed by this protection relay and how they must be used. The menu associated with each of these functions is presented and explained.

1.2

Definitions Tripping This operation consists of a command to open the breaking device (circuit breaker or fuse contactor) connected to the motor. A tripping command can be given: either on detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay, or by the operator (in this case it is an external tripping command).

Alarm The detection of a fault by the MiCOM P220 relay leads to the display of an alarm message. Acknowledgement of an alarm This operation consists of making an alarm message disappear. Function in service / out of service The MiCOM P220 relay offers a certain number of protection, monitoring and control functions. The operator can select from these functions the ones he wishes to use: he must bring into service the functions he chooses to use, he can take out of service the functions he does not wish to use.

Activated / deactivated function Not all the protection functions of the P220 relay are activated at the same time. They are alternately activated / deactivated automatically by the P220 relay itself to ensure that the motor has protection specific to its various operating conditions: underload or overload conditions, starting phase, locked rotor condition, and motor shut down. NOTE: A function cannot be activated or deactivated unless the operator has previously brought it into service.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 4/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

2.

DESCRIPTION OF THE MiCOM P220 MOTOR PROTECTION RELAY


The MiCOM P220 relay uses digital techniques to fulfil the functions of protection, control and monitoring of motors. It is equipped with 4 analogue inputs (3 phase current inputs and 1 earth current input). The current inputs have dual ratings of 1 or 5 amperes (it is possible to combine an earth current rating of 1 A and a phase current rating of 5 A). It is possible to program the output relays to respond to any of the protection or control functions available. The different logic inputs can also be allocated to control functions. The auxiliary power supply is provided by a direct current or alternating current auxiliary source via an internal converter. Satisfactory operation of the P220 relay is guaranteed during brief interruptions of the auxiliary power supply lasting less than 50 ms. The front panel gives the operator access to the data of the MiCOM P220 relay either via LEDs or via the display unit and the keypad. The various alarms are stored in the memory and made available to the operator on the backlit display device. These alarms can be read and acknowledged directly without a password. All the parameters and measurements are accessible without a password. The setting values can only be modified after entering the password stored in the memory. The MiCOM P220 relay records and measures a large number of data with very great accuracy. It continuously measures the phase and earth currents taking into account the true RMS values up to the 10th harmonic for a 50 Hz motor and the 8th harmonic for a 60 Hz motor. The MiCOM P220 relay has on the rear connector a RS485 type link with a choice of MODBUS, RTU mode, Courier or IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocols. This enables the operator to read the data stored by the relay (measurements, alarms, parameters), or modify the different settings and allocations of outputs of each relay, or transmit remote orders. It is also possible to reassemble or modify these data via the RS232 communication located on the front panel by using the MiCOM S1 support software. The MiCOM P220 relay can be connected directly via this link to a digital monitoring and control system (for example: MiCOM S10, SCADA). All the data available are then at the disposal of the supervisor and can be utilised either locally or remotely. The MiCOM P220 relay can be withdrawn while it is live. This means that its live parts can be withdrawn from the metal housing while the relay is supplied with power via the auxiliary source. When the relay is drawn out of its housing: the current circuits from the phase and earth CTs are not interrupted thanks to the presence of internal short-circuiting devices located at the current inputs (metal housing part), no tripping order is generated, the watchdog relay drops out, the RS485 link is not interrupted. However, communication is no longer possible for the relay which is drawn out.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 5/54

REMOTE COMMUNICATION parameterisation, measurements, control MMI LCD display device 8 LEDs for indication 7 pushbuttons RS232 port

MOTOR

PROTECTION + measurements, automatic controls, monitoring, disturbance recording

ELECTRICAL POWER SYSTEM phase currents earth current

CONTRACTOR/ CIRCUIT BREAKER Status (closed, open) tripping/closing commande

MCC MOTOR CONTROL


P0190ENa

FIGURE 1 - ENVIRONMENT OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 6/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

3.
3.1

THE OPERATOR INTERFACE


Description of the front panel The front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay serves as an interface between the human and the protection relay. It enables the operator to enter settings, to gain access to the display of measured values and alarms, and also to display in a simple manner the different actions performed by the MiCOM P220 relay.

FIGURE 2 - FRONT PANEL OF THE MiCOM P220 RELAY

The front panel of the relay has three separate parts: The display device and keypad, The LEDs, The two zones under the upper and lower flaps

The display device on the front of the MiCOM P220 relay is equipped with a liquid crystal display (LCD). This screen displays data such as settings and measured values, even under difficult conditions, thanks to the backlighting of the data. The keypad has 7 touch-sensitive keys. The two keys located under the screen are dedicated to alarms; the other 5 keys are for reading the measurements and modifying the parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay. The LEDs are located on the left side of the front panel. The first four LEDs are dedicated to the operation of the relay (tripping LED, alarm LED, equipment fault LED, and auxiliary power supply LED). The following four LEDs are programmable by the operator. The wording associated with the LEDs appears by default in English on the front panel but the operator has self-adhesive labels supplied with the P220 relay on which he can write the titles of his choice using a ball-point pen.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 7/54

Under the upper flap, there is a label identifying the relay by its model number and serial number. This information defines the product uniquely and specifically. When requesting any information from the factory, do not forget to indicate these two numbers. The auxiliary power supply range of the relay is also indicated on the lower part of the label. Under the lower flap, the RS232 link permits the connection of a portable PC to the MiCOM P220 relay. The live part can be withdrawn from the housing by opening the two flaps and applying traction to the two notches located behind these flaps.
ATTENTION : IT IS NECESSARY- AFTER PIVOTING THE EXTRACTOR - TO WAIT 2 OR 3 SECONDS BEFORE MAKING COME OUT THE ACTIVE PART, TO LEAVE DISCHARGING THE CAPACITORS IN THE ACTIVE PART THUS AVOIDING POSSIBLE ELECTRIC ARCS IN THE EVENT OF DIRECT CONTACT OF THE CONNECTOR BLOCKS WITH METAL LIMP.

3.2

The LEDs The LEDs are numbered from 1 to 8 starting from the top. NOTE: LED 1 The LEDs are turned off when the auxiliary power supply is lost. When the power supply is back the state of the LEDs is restored. Colour: RED Wording: TRIP

The LED indicates that the relay has transmitted a tripping order to the breaking device (fuse-contactor / circuit breaker). This LED copies the tripping command sent to logic output No. 1 (tripping relay). Its normal state is extinguished. It lights up as soon as a tripping command is issued. It is extinguished when the associated alarm is acknowledged (disappearance of the fault and acknowledgement by the operator). LED 2 Colour: YELLOW Wording: ALARM

This LED indicates that a motor alarm has been taken into account by the MiCOM P220 relay. The management of the ALARM LED is directly linked to the status of the motor alarms in the memory (MOTOR ALARM menu). If one or more messages are not read and not acknowledged, the ALARM LED flashes. If all messages are read but not acknowledged, the ALARM LED shows a steady light. If all messages have been read and acknowledged, the ALARM LED is extinguished. LED 3 Colour: YELLOW Wording: WARNING

This LED indicates equipment faults of the MiCOM P220 relay. The management of the WARNING LED is directly linked to the status of the equipment alarms in the memory (HARDW ALARMS menu). When a minor internal alarm (minor equipment fault, typically a communication failure) is detected, the WARNING LED flashes. When the fault is classed as serious, (major equipment failure) the WARNING LED is lit. The WARNING LED can only be extinguished when the cause which produced the alarm has disappeared (repair of the module, disappearance of the fault).

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 8/54 LED 4 Colour: GREEN

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 Wording: HEALTHY

This LED indicates that the MiCOM P220 relay is energised within the rated range (0.8 to 1.2 Vaux). LEDs 5 to 8: Colour: RED

These LEDs can be programmed by the operator in the CONFIGURATION menu. 3.3 The keypad The keypad has seven keys arranged in two groups: The two keys located immediately below the screen (keys ! and "), The five keys positioned in the centre of the front panel for programming. 3.3.1 ALARM keys The two keys ! and " are dedicated to reading and acknowledgement of the alarms respectively. To display the successive alarms, press the ! key. The alarms are arranged in the order in which they were detected (the most recent last, the oldest first). To acknowledge the alarms, the operator can either acknowledge each alarm by pressing the " key, or go to the end of the MOTOR ALARMS menu and perform a general acknowledgement. 3.3.2 Programming keypad The five keys situated in the centre of the front panel of the MiCOM P220 relay are dedicated to programming The keys # $ % and & make it possible to move in the direction indicated in the different levels of the menus. The ' key permits the confirmation of a choice or a value (modification of parameters). 3.4 Liquid crystal display screen The liquid crystal display screen has two lines each with sixteen characters. The screen lights up as soon as a key on the keypad is activated. It remains lit up for 5 minutes after a key on the keypad was last used. The screen has backlighting which makes it easy to read, regardless of the ambient lighting conditions.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 9/54

4.

THE MENUS
The menu of the P220 relay is organised into main menus, some of which are subdivided into submenus. The operator dialogue of the MiCOM P220 relay is divided into 10 menus ( menu column)

HEADING OP PARAMETERS CONFIGURATION

SUB MENU

DESCRIPTION Data for general settings of MiCOM P220

CONFIG. SELECT

Change of Group, default display setings, Start detection criterion, Analogical Output (4-20mA), RTD and Thermistors. Settings of the CT Ratio Configuration of Programmables LEDs Configuration of logic inputs Measured (Ia, Ib, Ic ) and calculated parameters (Idirect, I inverse), Max values. Measurements related to the application: Thermal Overload, Time before thermal tripping, RTD Temperature, Permit start number, time before start, Emergency start number Number of different type of tripping Settings of the protocol parameters. Configuration of the protection functions

TC RATIO LED LED 5 to LED 8

CONFIGURATION INPUTS MEASUREMENT PROCESS

TRIP STATISTICS COMMUNICATION PROTECTION G1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT [46] UNBALANCE [48] EXCESS LONG START

Submenu of thermal overload function Submenu of short circuit function Submenu of earth Fault function Submenu of Unbalance function Submenu of excess long start function

[51LR-50S] BLOCKED Submenu of Blocked rotor function ROTOR [37] LOSS OF LOAD Submenu of Loss of load function [49/38] RTD SENSORS Submenu of RTD sensors function option [49] THERMISTORS option Submenu of Thermistors function

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 10/54 HEADING Protection G2 AUTOMATIC CTRL [66] START NUMBER MIN TIME BETW 2 START REACCEL AUTORIZATION INPUTS AND LOGIC EQUATION HOT and COLD start numbers SUB MENU DESCRIPTION Like PORTECTION G1

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

Configuration of the minimum time between two consecutive starts. Autorization of reacceleration after a dip voltage detection Configuration of logic inputs. Configuration of 4 Logic Equations

AND LOGIC EQUAT T Configuration of time delays associated to the DELAY logic equations. AUX OUTPUT RELAYS Configuration of Auxiliary output relays ( other than tripping relay RL1) LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS TRIP OUTPUT RELAY LATCH TRIP ORDER SW SUPERVISION Latching of the auxiliary output relays Configuration of the trip output relay ( RL1) Latching of the tripping output relay (RL1) configuration of operating time, operation number, sum of interrupted current, closing and tripping time Visualization of last five faults Configuration of disturbance records Data related to real functioning of the switching devise (CB)

RECORD FAULT RECORD DISTURBANCE RECORD SW MONITORING

From the default display, access is gained to these different menus by using the # and & keys. To return to the default display from any one of the menus, press the $ key. 4.1 Default display By default, a value is continuously displayed, and the operator can select this value from a list in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. As soon as an alarm is generated by the MiCOM P220 relay, the relay indicates it by an alarm message: this display takes priority and replaces the default value (see the ALARMS menus).

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.2 Access to the menus Access is gained to the different menus via the # and $ keys.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 11/54

It is possible to read all the parameters and measurements without the password. The parameters can only be modified after entering the password. 4.3 Access to the setting parameters Access to the setting parameters of the MiCOM P220 relay is possible in different ways: 4.3.1 either locally: by using the keys or the RS232 port on the front panel, or remotely: via the RS485 port at the rear.

Protection by password Modification of the relay parameters via the pushbuttons on the front panel is protected by password. This protection applies to the relay configuration settings, particularly the selection of the different thresholds, time delays, communication parameters, allocation of the binary inputs, logic gates and output relays. The password consists of four alphanumerical characters in capitals. On leaving the factory, the password is AAAA. The operator can define his own combination of characters. If the password is lost or forgotten, modification of the parameters stored in the memory of the relay is inhibited. All that is required then is to contact AREVA T&D or its agent, stating the serial number of the relay, to receive an emergency password specific to the relay concerned.

4.3.2

Entering the password / modification of the parameters To modify a parameter, first press the ' key to go into updating mode (or parameterisation mode). The operator is asked to enter the password as soon as a parameter is modified in any of the menus or submenus. So when the operator presses the ' key, to make an adjustment, and the password is not active, the following display appears on the screen: PASSWORD ? AAAA The password consists of the letters between A and Z. The password is entered letter by letter by using the $ and # keys to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet. After each letter, press the & key to enter the next letter. At the end of the input press the ' key to confirm the password. If the password is correct the message PASSWORD OK appears on the screen. After 2 seconds, the display returns to the previous point in the menu. Press the ' key again. A cursor appears on the first field of the data to be updated: Example: modification of the current threshold I >> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu)

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 12/54 I >> =

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

1.0 In

A flashing cursor indicates that the operator can change the value in the cell. To scroll through the possible values for a cell, use the # and $ keys. After each value, press the & key to enter the next digit. At the end of the input, press the ' key to confirm the modification. While the relay is in setting mode, the letter P (Parameter) is displayed at the bottom right of the menus and submenus headers. For instance, the letter P is displayed in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu header: [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

If no action is taken on the keypad for 5 minutes, the password is deactivated and the letter P disappears. Any subsequent modification of parameters will give rise to a further request for the password. NOTE: The parameterisation mode only allows modification of the relay configuration via the interface through which is was activated: if for example the password was entered by the keys on the front panel, only modifications carried out using these keys will be accepted. When the parameterisation mode is activated by entering the password via the front panel (pushbuttons), as long as this mode of parameterisation remains active, it is no longer possible to modify the relay parameters via the RS485 or RS232 communication ports. The parameters of the P220 relay can only be modified by using the pushbuttons. Once the parameterisation mode is deactivated (no action on any pushbutton for 5 minutes), it is then possible to modify the parameters of the P220 relay by using one of the communication ports. Pressing the " key during modification makes it possible to return to the value before modification. To modify the active password, gain access to the OP. PARAMETERS menu then to the PASSWORD point in the menu.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.4 The OP. PARAMETERS menu In this menu, the operator has access to the following information: the type of MiCOM relay, here it is the model P220 the software version of the relay the Active Group the state of all the logic inputs the state of the programmable output relays

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 13/54

In this menu, the operator can also: 4.5 modify the password give the relay/motor feeder a reference (4 characters, letters or figures) indicate the rated frequency of the motor (50 or 60 Hz) modify the date and time.

The CONFIGURATION menu The CONFIGURATION menu makes it possible to configure the MiCOM P220 relay. This menu is divided into 7 submenus: CONFIG. SELECT CT RATIO LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 CONFIGURATION INPUTS

4.5.1

The CONFIG. SELECT submenu

4.5.1.1 Change of Active Setting group The MiCOM P220 relay has two configuration groups corresponding to two protection groups (menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2). The operator can thus carry out 2 settings for each parameter: one for configuration group 1 and the other for configuration group 2. This menu allows the selection between the 2 groups. The active group by default is group 1.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 14/54 The changeover of the configuration can be ordered by: a) a local command:

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

via a logic input which must have been previously configured by the operator, via the keys on the front panel via the RS232 port on the front panel. NOTE: For the changeover via a logic input, it is necessary to Know that:

When the user selects the option LEVEL, in the CONFIGURATION/CONFIG SELECT submenu, the changeover of the groups is ONLY authorized by a logic input, (no possibility to change the active group neither by communication, nor by the front panel). ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH LEVEL OPTION : When switching ON the auxiliary supply, the selected group corresponds to the logic input state. This means: A - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 0 Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active Groupe 2 = logic Input is active If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1. If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V , then the active group will be G2. B - LEVEL option and Logic input configuration = 1 Groupe 1 = logic Input is not active Groupe 2 = logic Input is active If the programmed logic input is supplied with +V, then the active group will be G2. If the programmed logic input is not supplied with +V, then the active group will be G1. If the user wishes to change the groups by the communication or by the front panel, he has to select the option EDGE. ACTIVE GROUP CHANGEOVER WITH EDGE OPTION : A- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 1 The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes state from 0V to +V. Switch OFF the relay, then if we 1. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =0V: The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =+V: The group will change and it will change after every switching off.

2.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 B- FRONT option with Logic input configuration = 0

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 15/54

The active group changes every time the voltage applied to the logic input changes state from +V to 0V. Switch OFF the relay, then if we 1. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =0V: The group will change state and it will change after every switching off. Switch ON the power supply of the relay with the voltage applied to the logic input =+V: The group will not change. It will remain as before the switching off of the relay. NOTE : It is important to set properly the change active group with FRONT option via a logic input. In general the customer should be conform to the cases A-1 and B-2, so no group changes will take place upon energizing the relay. LEVEL could be high or low level EDGE could be riding or falling edge The list of access methods above is given in the order of priority: for example the configuration changeover order given by a logic input takes priority over the one given by the keys on the front panel.

2.

b)

a remote command via the RS485 port at the rear. NOTE:

4.5.1.2 Selection of a default value to be display The operator can select the measured value permanently displayed on the LCD screen from the following list: one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, the neutral current IN RMS, the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE, the current value consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold value I >: %ILoad.

4.5.1.3 Criterion for detecting a start The MiCOM P220 relay offers the choice of start detection criteria as follows: closure of the contactor / circuit breaker: criterion listed as 52A, closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and overshoot of the starting current threshold Istart ([48] EXCES. LONG START submenu). These two events must appear within an interval of time of approximately 90 ms for the detection of a start to be accepted. This criterion is known as 52A + I.

This facility makes it possible to adapt the configuration of the P220 relay to the type of starting used: direct on_line or soft start. NOTE: The P220 relay detects the information "contactor / circuit breaker position" via logic input No. 1 (paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs). The connection of this logic input to the status of the breaking device is obligatory.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 16/54 4.5.1.4 Analogue output (optional)

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The MiCOM P220 relay offers an optional analogue output to make the data available to a logic controller, at 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA as desired. The current loop support can be used as an active source circuit or a passive source circuit. The measured value which can be transmitted by this analogue output is selected from the following list: one of the 3 phase currents IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, the neutral current IN RMS, the thermal state of the motor TH. STATE, the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal current threshold value I >: % Ioad, the waiting time before another start is permitted: T bef Start, the time before a thermal trip occurs: T bef Trip, one of the temperatures measured by the RTD (optional): TC RTD1, TC RTD2, TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6.

The table of correspondence of the analogue output is given in the chapter 5-3. 4.5.1.5 Type of RTD temperature probes or thermistors (optional) The P220 relay offers optional monitoring of 6 RTD temperature probes or 2 thermistors + 4 RTD temperature probes to provide protection against temperature rises in the stator and mechanical bearings of the motor (PROTECTION menu). The type of RTD (PT100, Ni100, Ni120, Cu10), or the type of thermistor (PTC/NTC) is selected in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu. The table of correspondences between the temperature and resistance of the RTD is defined in the chapter 5-3. 4.5.2 The CT RATIO submenu In the CT RATIO submenu, the operator sets the primary and secondary ratings of the Phase and Earth CTs. NOTE: Where the earth current input is connected to a CT summation of the 3 phase current circuits (residual connection, no core CT), the primary and secondary values of "Earth CT" must be set to the same values of those of the "Phase CTs".

4.5.3

The LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Four identical submenus LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 permit configuration of the 4 programmable LEDs of the MiCOM P220 relay. These data can originate inside the relay (protection, automatic control, or internal logic state function) or outside the relay (logic input). One LED is lit if at least one of the pieces of information associated with it is valid (logic OR). It is extinguished: either after acknowledgement of the of associated data item or items or on the disappearance of the data item or items which gave rise to it.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 The "EMERG. RESTART" information is activated:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 17/54

either following reception of an emergency start command via the logic input programmed on "EMERG. RESTART". It stays lit up as log as the associated logic input is excited or following an emergency start remote order sent via the communication network. It will be extinguished when the "SUCCESSFUL START" information appears. The "FORBIDDEN START" information is active if at least one of the three pieces of data inhibiting starts is active: either thermal inhibition of starting " FORBID. START" or inhibition due to limitation of the number of starts " START NB LIMIT " or inhibition due to a minimum time between 2 starts "T betw 2 start". The motor shut down information "MOTOR STOPPED" is activated when logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is not excited. It remains active until logic input No. 1 is excited. The motor running information "MOTOR RUNNING" is activated when logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) is excited. It remains active until logic input No. 1 is de energized. The successful start information "SUCCESSFUL START" is activated after a motor start phase if at the end of the time delay t Istart the following criteria are respected: the locked rotor at start information ""LOCKED ROTOR" is not present the excessively long start information "EXCES NG START" is not present. 4.6 This information stays active until the motor shuts down (deenergisation of logic input No. 1).

The MEASUREMENTS menu The measurements of the phase currents and the earth current are expressed as true root-mean-square values. For a 50 Hz motor, the harmonics are taken into account up to the 10th order; for a 60 Hz motor the harmonics are taken into account up to the 8th order. The measurement of the symmetrical components is taken from the fundamental component of the current. The positive and negative sequence components of the current are calculated on the basis of the three phase currents, and the zero phase sequence component is calculated from the earth current input. The following formulae are used to calculate the symmetrical components:
Ipositive = 1/ 3 (I A + a IB + a IC ) Inegative = 1/ 3 (I A + a IB + a IC ) I zero phase sequence = 1/ 3 Iearth

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 18/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The frequency measurement is given if the amplitude of at least one of the three phase currents is greater than 10 % of In (In is the rating of the phase current inputs, 1 A or 5 A defined in the CT RATIO submenu, on the line "SEC PHASE ="). Where the frequency cannot be calculated, the relays displays "****". The phase current maximeter retains the greatest current value of one of the three phases outside the motor starting phase. This variable is expressed as a true RMS value.

4.7

The PROCESS menu A set of measurements relating to operation displayed in the PROCESS menu makes it possible to monitor the utilisation and state of the motor. The estimate of the time before a thermal trip T before TH TRIP is given under the following conditions: the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is reached the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than the thermal current threshold I > considering the constant motor overload rate Ieq / I >. When the above conditions are not respected, the P220 relay displays the value ****. The number of authorised starts of the motor PERMIT START NB takes into account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions: "limitation of the number of starts", "minimum time between 2 starts", "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start". When there is no limit to the number of authorised starts, the relay displays the value ****. The indication of the time before a further start is authorised T before START" is given when an inhibition on starting is in progress. This indication takes into account all the criteria for limiting or inhibiting starting, that is, the functions: "limitation of the number of starts", "minimum time between 2 starts", "thermal criterion for inhibiting a start". The counter for the number of starts of the motor is incremented at each start. In contrast, authorisation for the motor to re-accelerate does not increment this counter. The counter for the number of motor operation hours is the sum of hours during which the motor is running. NOTE: After confirming the password, the user can reset the value of the THERMAL STATE value to zero by pressing the " key.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.8 The TRIP STATISTICS menu In the TRIP STATISTICS menu the following are displayed: the total number of tripping operations, the number of tripping operations per type of fault.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 19/54

Tripping can have two possible causes: tripping on a fault: when the P220 relay detects a fault (exceeding a threshold), it generates a tripping order; deliberate tripping: the operator can order tripping from three access points: a logic input, the RS232 port on the front panel, the communications network via the RS485 rear port. NOTE: The tripping orders stored in the memory of the MiCOM P220 protection relay for the statistics are only those transmitted to the tripping relay (logic output No. 1). This relay is one of the logic outputs of the MiCOM P220. It is configured in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. Motor shutdowns for which the command was not relayed via the output relay No. 1 of the MiCOM P220 are not taken into account in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.

4.9

The COMMUNICATION menu The MiCOM P220 relay can communicate under the MODBUS, Courier or IEC 60870-5 protocols via the RS485 port located at the rear. These protocols are based on the master-slave principle. The P220 relay can therefore be integrated, as a slave, in a digital monitoring and control system. In this system, the supervisor (master), for example a PC, can: read and modify the setting values, remote the measurements, alarm data, changes of state (changes of state of inputs/outputs, changes of setting group), values relating to fault recordings, disturbance recording and the form of the starting current, issue remote orders such as commands to open or close the circuit breaker/contactor (motor On / Off), to trig disturbance recording or to acknowledge the relay remotely.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 20/54 4.10 The PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 menus

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The menus PROTECTION G1 and PROTECTION G2 are identical and enable the operator to program 2 different configuration groups (CONFIGURATION menu). Each of these 2 menus is divided into 8 submenus corresponding to the different protection functions: [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT [46] UNBALANCE [48] EXCES. LONG START [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR [37] LOSS OF LOAD [49/38] RTD SENSORS or [49] THERMISTOR (optional)

The operator can bring each of these protections into service or take them out of service in the submenus of the menu PROTECTION G1 or PROTECTION G2. The setting parameters of the functions taken out of service do not appear on the LCD unit and are not accessible via the communication If the threshold or thresholds of these functions are reached, a time delay with a duration preset by the operator is started. When this time delay expires, if the fault is still present, an instantaneously signal is generated and can be used to excite one of the output relays. All the algorithms of the protection functions are based on the fundamental component of the current.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 21/54 STATE OF THE PROTECTION FUNCTIONS (ACTIVE/INACTIVE) ACCORDING TO THE OPERATION MODE OF THE MOTOR

The MiCOM P220 protection functions are automatically* activated or deactivated by the relay itself according to the motor's operation mode (motor halted, start-up sequence, re-acceleration phase or normal running condition). The table below indicates under which conditions these protection functions are active or inactive. Protective functions Thermal image Short-circuit Motor halted Activated (Tr)** Activated Start-up sequence Activated (Te2)** Activated Activated Activated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated*** Activated Motor running Activated (Te1)** Activated Deactivated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated Activated*** Activated Re-acceleration phase Activated (Te2)** Activated Activated Deactivated Deactivated Activated Activated Activated*** Activated

Excessive long start Deactivated Locked rotor at start Deactivated Stalled rotor whilst running Unbalance Earth fault Loss of load Over temperature Deactivated Activated Activated Deactivated Activated

* These protection functions are activated by the relay only if they have previously been commissioned by the user. ** The time constant used in the thermal model depends on the value of the motor load current and on the motor's operating mode. The time constant indicated in brackets is the one used by the relay. *** The "loss of load" function is activated upon expiry of the Tinhib timer. This timer is user settable, it is initiated by the relay when a motor start is detected. 4.10.1 The [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu: protection against thermal overload conditions The MiCOM P220 relay produces a thermal image of the motor from the positive and negative components of the current consumed by the motor, in such a way as to take into account the thermal effects created in the stator and in the rotor. The negative component currents consumed in the stator generate in the rotor large amplitude currents which create a substantial temperature rise in the rotor winding. The composition carried out by the MiCOM P220 results in an equivalent thermal current Ieq, the image of the temperature rise caused by the current in the motor. The current Ieq is calculated according to the following formula:
Ieq = (Ipositive + Ke Inegative )0.5

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 22/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

Starting from this equivalent thermal current, the thermal state of the motor is calculated every cycle by the MiCOM P220 relay according to the following formula: i+1= (Ieq/I>) . [1- e(-t/T)] + i . e(-t/T) in which: Ke is the negative sequence current recognition factor (adjustable). I > is the thermal overload current threshold. i is the value of the thermal state calculated previously. is the time constant of the motor. As a function of the operating conditions of the motor, the relay uses one of the following 3 thermal time constants: the thermal time constant e1 which is applied when the equivalent thermal current Ieq lies between 0 and 2 I >, that is when the motor is running (load or overload conditions); the starting time constant e2 which is applied when the equivalent thermal current Ieq is greater than 2 I >, that is when the motor is in the starting phase or locked rotor condition; the cooling time constant r which is applied when the motor is shut down (logic input L1 in the zero logic state - terminals 22-24). In this case, the motor no longer consumes current and the value of the thermal state therefore decreases as time passes according to the formula: i+1= i . e(-t/Tr) A thermal overload signal THERM.OV is generated when the value of the thermal state reaches 100 %. NOTE: On interruption of the auxiliary power supply to the P220 relay, the value of the thermal state is stored in the nonvolatile memory. On reenergisation of the relay, the value of the thermal state is reset to its value before the interruption if it was lower than 90 %. In the opposite case (greater than 90 %), it is reset to 90 %, to avoid premature tripping of the relay P220 when the auxiliary voltage returns. The thermal state of the motor is displayed in the PROCESS menu. On the second line of the PROCESS menu, after having entered the password, it is possible to reset the value of the thermal state of the motor to zero. Even if the "thermal overload" protection function is not used, the thermal current threshold I > must be set so that it is possible to use the excessively long start EXCES LONG START and stalled rotor while motor is running STALLED ROTOR protection functions. Examples of the thermal overload curve are shown in chapter 5-3.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.10.1.1 Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 23/54

This function permits inhibition of the thermal tripping information THERM. OV. during the starting phase. It may be necessary to use this function for some motors with temperature rise characteristics in a starting phase very different from those in a locked rotor condition. If the user brings this function into service, this inhibition is activated as soon as the starting time delay tIstart begins (cf. submenu [48] EXCES. LONG START). On expiry of tIstart (end of the time allowed for starting), this inhibition is deactivated. When this function is activated, that is during the motor starting phase, the value of the thermal state calculated cannot exceed 90 %. This means that thermal tripping cannot take place under any circumstances. At the end of the time allowed for starting, the value of the thermal state is authorised to exceed 90 %. NOTE: This function has no influence on the thermal alarm signal ALARM and thermal inhibition of starting function FORBID. START. When this function is brought into service, the motor is still thermally protected by the monitoring of the starting time.

4.10.1.2 Function of the thermal image influenced by ambient temperature (optional): INFLUENCE RTD When the ambient temperature exceeds + 40 C, the admissible motor current diminishes in relation to its rated current. A setting of the protection parameters which is suitable under normal temperature conditions is no longer suitable when the ambient temperature rises above + 40 C. The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of taking into account this necessary derating of motors. The thermal image can be modified by the ambient temperature measurement. When this function is brought into service by the user, if the ambient temperature rises above + 40 C, the value of the thermal threshold I > is automatically modified to adapt the motor protection to the external temperature conditions. The rule for the ambient temperature measurement influencing the thermal image is: For an ambient temperature lower than or equal to + 40 C, the thermal image is not modified. For an ambient temperature between + 40 C and + 65 C, the thermal threshold I > is modified by a multiplying coefficient in compliance with the following formula: Multiplying coefficient = 1 - (ambient temperature in C - 40) / 100 For a temperature greater than or equal to + 65 C, the thermal threshold I > is modified by a multiplying coefficient of 0.75.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 24/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The table below gives the relationship between the ambient temperature measurement and the influence on the thermal image: Ambient temperature (in Celsius) Correction coefficient for the thermal threshold I > (multiplying coefficient) NOTE: This function can only be used if the relay has the option "6 RTD monitoring". The probe used for this function is RTD 1 (terminals 2c-4c-6c). To use this function, a probe measuring the ambient temperature of the place where the motor is located must be connected to terminals 2c-4c-6c. The operator can program the temperature thresholds of RTD 1 ([49/38] RTD submenu) even if he has brought this INFLUENCE RTD function into service. +40 C +45 C +50 C +55 C +60 C +65 C

1.00

0.95

0.90

0.85

0.80

0.75

ATTENTION :

FOR 2 THERMISTORS + 4 RTD OPTION, THIS FUNCTION WILL BE PROVIDED BY THE RTD CONNECTED TO TERMINALS 8C-10C-12C.

4.10.1.3 Thermal alarm function: ALARM The purpose of this function is to produce an alarm signal indicating that the thermal state of the motor has exceeded an adjustable threshold: ALARM. Corrective action can thus be taken before thermal tripping occurs. Once the threshold ALARM is exceeded, the MiCOM P220 relay calculates and displays, in the PROCESS menu (cf. chapter 4.7 The PROCESS menu), an estimate of the time remaining before a thermal trip THERM. OV. occurs. This estimate is given for a constant overload rate. 4.10.1.4 Thermal start inhibition function: FORBID. START This function makes it possible to inhibit a start on a hot motor, or not, as a function of its thermal state. When this function has been adjusted in service by the user, a further start is inhibited for the motor as long as its thermal state is higher than an adjustable threshold FORBID START. It is then necessary to wait until the motor cools down. When the value of the thermal state falls below the threshold FORBID START, the starting of the motor is authorised. The information inhibiting starting on a thermal criterion FORBID START is activated if the following two conditions are fulfilled: Motor shut down: logic input L1 in the zero state (terminals 22-24). Thermal state value higher than the threshold FORBID START.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 25/54

The following diagram illustrates the operation of the thermal start inhibit criterion:
Shutdown of the motor Restarting of the motor

Thermal state of the motor

FORBID START threshold

Time Binary input L1 : interlock o/o (52A)

FORBID START signal

P0191ENa

4.10.2 The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT function which protects the motor against short-circuits between phases uses a definite time phase overcurrent protection. In this menu a short-circuit current threshold I >> and its associated time delay tI >> are adjustable. The P220 relay generates a signal if the phase current exceeds the threshold I >> for a length of time greater than tI >>. In addition to this time-delayed threshold, an instantaneous information (threshold I >> without time delay) is available.
IA IB IC

>=1

I>>

tI>>

Internal logic signals


P0192ENa

NOTE:

The time delay tI >> can be set to instantaneous. When the operator has adjusted the SHORT-CIRCUIT [50/51] function in service, this function is always active whatever the mode of operation of the motor (motor running, shut down, starting phase, locked rotor condition). In the event of saturation of the phase CTs, the MiCOM P220 will detect a short-circuit under the following conditions: Fault current lower than 200 times the limit current value for saturation of the CTs. No remanent flux in the CTs at the time of establishing the fault. No direct current component at the time of establishing the fault. Short-circuit threshold I >> set below 0.9, the limit current value for saturation of the CTs.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 26/54 4.10.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function which protects the motor against faults between one or more phases and earth uses a definite time zero phase sequence overcurrent protection. Earth faults create a zero phase sequence current measured either by 3 phase CTs in a residual connection, or directly by a core balanced CT surrounding the 3 conductors. Two independent earth current thresholds (Io > and Io >>) with their associated time delays (tIo > and tIo >>) enable the operator to configure for example an alarm threshold and a tripping threshold. The settings of the thresholds are expressed as a function of the residual current (3 times the zero phase sequence component). For each earth current threshold, time-delayed information and instantaneous information is available.
Io> 3 Io Io>> tIo>>
0

tIo>

Internal logic signals

P0193ENa

4.10.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu The [46] UNBALANCE function, which protects the motor against unbalance conditions, broken conductor and phase inversions, is based on the measurement of the negative sequence component of the current. Two negative sequence overcurrent thresholds are available: one of them, Ii >, is associated with a definite time delay, the other, Ii >>, is associated with a inverse time characteristic.

The user can use the threshold Ii > to detect the inversion or loss of a phase, or to give an unbalance alarm. The threshold Ii >> has an inverse time characteristic which enables it to allow slight instantaneous unbalances to pass whilst more substantial unbalances will be detected more quickly. This inverse time characteristic permits selective clearance of external two-phase faults which appear on the system. This operating characteristic in compliance with the withstand of the motors is given in the appendix.
Ii> IA IB IC Inegative Ii>>
P0194ENa

t Ii>

Internal logic signals

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 27/54

4.10.5 The [48] EXCES LONG START submenu: protection against excessively long starts The [48] EXCES LONG START function protects the motor if the starting phase lasts too long. To do this, it uses a starting current threshold Istart> and a starting time delay tIstart. This threshold and this time delay can be adjusted to allow the starting current to pass. This function is activated (time delay tIstart initiated) as soon as the MiCOM P220 relay detects a start (the criterion for detection of a start is selected in the CONFIGURATION menu). It is deactivated on expiry of the starting current time delay tIstart. If, on expiry of the time delay tIstart, the current consumed by the motor has not fallen below the threshold Istart> again, a prolonged start signal LONG START t Istart will be generated.
IA IB IC

>=1
Motor start-up detection Successful start signal

Istart > tI start


0

&
>=1
Internal logic signals

&
Re-acceleration authorisation

tI start

P0195ENa

Information indicating a "successful start" is generated on expiry of the time delay tIstart if no tripping order has been given. NOTE: During normal operation of the motor, the excessively long start function EXCES LONG START can be reactivated during a flying restart of the motor (re-acceleration of the motor following a voltage dip), that is when re-acceleration is authorised (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu).

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 28/54 4.10.6 The [51LR/50S] LOCKED ROTOR submenu 4.10.6.1 Rotor stalled whilst the motor running

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

This function, which makes it possible to detect stalling while the motor is running, is activated immediately after the starting period, that is on expiry of the starting time delay tIstart (submenu [48] EXCES LONG START). Two parameters can be set: the stalled rotor current threshold Istall with its associated time delay tIstall, the stalled rotor time. The MiCOM P220 relay detects the overcurrent caused by stalling and generates information that the rotor has stalled while the motor is running if the phase current exceeds the threshold Istall for a length of time greater than tIstall.
IA IB IC

>=1

Istall>

Successful start signal Reacceleration in progress

&

tI stall

>=1

Internal logic signals

Motor starting criterion : 52A+I Motor startup non detected Motor shutdown ( EL1 = 0 )

&

tI stall

P0196ENa

NOTE:

During authorisation of re-acceleration (AUTOMAT. CTRL menu), this function is deactivated during the time delay allowed for starting tIstart. On starting the motor, when the start detection criterion selected is "closure of the contactor / circuit breaker and exceeding of the starting current threshold Istart (52 A + I)", if the relay sees only one of these events, (closure of the breaking device or the appearance of a current greater than Istart), then the function of monitoring a stalled rotor whilst the motor is running is activated.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.10.6.2 Locked rotor at start

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 29/54

This function, which makes it possible to detect that the motor is locked at the start, is activated only during the starting phase, that is during the course of the starting time delay tIstart. It uses speed signal from the motor received by logic input No. 2 of the P220 relay (terminals 26-28), and the time delay tIstall: locked rotor time (a speed switch device must be connected to this logic input: paragraph 4.11.4.1. "Fixed" inputs). On detection of a start, the "locked rotor at start" function is activated: the time delay tIstall begins. At the end of this time delay, the motor speed logic input (input No. 2) must be in logic state 1 to indicate that the motor speed is not zero. The opposite case (zero speed) means that the rotor is locked, so the P220 relay generates a locked rotor at start order LOCKED ROTOR.
Motor start-up detection Speed switch open (EL2 = 0)

t Istall

&

Internal logic signals

P0197ENa

NOTE:

The speed switch device sends information to the P220 relay indicating, by the closing of a contact, that the rotor is rotating. The time delay tIstall is common to the protection functions for "rotor stalled while motor is running" and "rotor locked at start". If the motor is not fitted with a speed switch device, this function cannot be used and must therefore be deactivated.

4.10.7 The [37]LOSS OF LOAD submenu: protection against undercurrent/loss of load conditions The [37] UNDERCURRENT function which makes it possible to detect a loss of load (for example the draining of a pump or breakage of a conveyor belt), uses definite time undercurrent protection. The user sets the following parameters: undercurrent threshold I < time delay tI < associated with the undercurrent threshold the inhibit start time delay Tinhib.

This function is deactivated when the motor is shut down (logic input No. 1 in the 0 state) and also during the inhibit time delay Tinhib. When the P220 relay detects that the motor is starting, this function is activated at the end of the inhibit time delay Tinhib. The time delay Tinhib is useful for motors with no-load starting which take on load gradually at the end of starting. When the motor is running (and after expiry of the inhibit time delay Tinhib), if the value of one of the phase currents consumed by the motor is lower than the threshold I < for a period greater than or equal to tI <, the P220 relay will generate a loss of load signal t I< .

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 30/54


IA IB IC >=1 I<

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

&
Motor start-up detection Motor shutdown ( EL1 = 0 )

tI<

tinhib

Internal logic signals

P0198ENa

4.10.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu: temperature protection by RTD (optional) The [49/38] RTD SENSORS [49/38] function is temperature rises of the motor by direct temperature monitoring 6 RTDs (Remote Temperature Detectors). the following types: PT100, Ni120, Ni100 or CONFIGURATION menu). For each RTD, the user sets: an alarm threshold RTD # ALARM, a time delay associated with the alarm threshold t RTD# ALARM, a tripping threshold RTD # TRIP, a time delay associated with the tripping threshold t RTD TRIP #. intended to detect abnormal monitoring. This is achieved by The RTDs can be selected from Cu10 (types selected in the

An alarm signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed alarm threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold. A tripping signal is generated if the temperature measured exceeds the programmed tripping threshold for a period of time equal to the time delay associated with this threshold. The P220 relay continuously monitors the satisfactory operation of the RTD's. An alarm will be generated if: a RTD wiring circuit is opening a RTD is short-circuited.

On detection of a RTD failure, a RTD/Therm ERROR alarm message is generated and the over temperature thresholds corresponding to this RTD will be deactivated. The RTD can be located: at the stator windings (protection of the stator, indirect protection of the rotor, detection of failure of the cooling system), at the mechanical bearings (to detect failure of the lubrication), outside the motor (ambient temperature measurement), at the same level as that of the entry of cooling air.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 NOTE:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 31/54 The symbol # corresponds to the number of the RTD. The RTDs monitored must obligatorily be all of the same type (all of type PT100, or Ni100, or Ni120, or Cu10). It is possible to connect only the RTDs that one wishes to monitor. RTD 1 can be used to measure the ambient temperature and thus influence the thermal image (see 4.10.1.2).

4.10.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu: temperature protection by thermistor (optional) This submenu provides the monitoring of 2 thermistors + 4 RTD sensors. The [49] THERMISTOR function, like the preceding one, detects abnormal temperature rises. It operates with thermistors of type PTC or NTC (selected in the CONFIGURATION menu). The P220 relay can monitor 2 thermistors. Each thermistor input is linked to an independent threshold (Thermist#) with a fixed time delay of 2 seconds. For each thermistor, the user sets a threshold in ohms. A "Thermist#" order is generated if the thermistor resistance measured exceeds this threshold for a length of time greater than or equal to 2 seconds. NOTE: The symbol # corresponds to the number of the thermistor.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 32/54 4.11 The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu The AUTOMAT. CTRL menu comprises the following 10 submenus: [66] START NUMBER MIN TIME BETW 2 START RE-ACCEL AUTHORIZ INPUTS AND LOGIC EQUATION AND LOGIC T EQUA DELAY AUX OUTPUT RLY LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS TRIP OUTPUT RLY LATCH TRIP ORDER SW SUPERVISION

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

4.11.1 The [66] START NUMBER submenu : limitation of the number of starts per period The [66] NB DEM function allows the number of motor start-ups over a given period to be limited. In effect, starting the motor too frequently can be too constraining for the motor (over-heating), for its starting system (starting impedance, electrolytic bath,...) or can in some cases reveal an anomaly in the process operation, The [66] NB DEM function uses the following adjustable parameters. a monitoring period Treference a number of hot starts limit HOT START NB a number of cold starts limit COLD START NB a start inhibit time delay Tinterdiction.

Each time an motor start is detected, the Treference time delay is initiated and the number of starts registered by the counter corresponding to the temperature of the motor (hot or cold) is incremented by one. At the end of this time delay, the counter in question will be decremented by one. Each time the motor is stopped (change of state of logic input No. 1: from state 1 to state 0) relay P220 establishes whether either of the two counters has been reached. If so, start inhibit signal START NB LIMIT will be generated for a length of time equal to Tinterdiction. At the end of Tinterdiction, this signal drops out, and it is possible to start the motor again. Examples: Taking as an example cold starts where the limit of the number of cold starts has been set at 3 for a period of Treference.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 Case n1:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 33/54

The number of cold starts limit has been reached and the motor is stopped before the end of the Treference period: the Tinterdiction time delay is therefore initiated when the motor stops. A new start up is permitted at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay.

Istart

2 more starts permitted

1 more start permitted

No start permitted

IN

motor

T reference T reference T reference T inter diction START NB LIMIT

P0199ENa

Case n2: The number of cold starts limit is reached but the motor is not stopped until after the end of the Treference period: therefore the Tinterdiction time delay is not initiated. There is no start inhibit.

Istart

2 more starts permitted

1 more start permitted

No start permitted

1 more start permitted

IN

motor

T reference

T reference T reference

START NB LIMIT (logic state at 0)


P0200ENa

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 34/54 Case n3:

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

Particular cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay, the number of starts counter is still reached (the Tinterdiction time delay period is completed before the end of Treference): any new start up is inhibited until the end of the Treference period (the START NB LIMIT signal is extended).

Istart

2 more start permitted

1 more start permitted

No start permitted

IN

motor

T reference T reference T reference T interdiction

START NB LIMIT

P0201ENa

NOTE:

A start is considered cold if the value of the motors thermal state is less or equal to 50% when an motor start phase is detected. A start is considered warm if the value of the motors thermal state is more than 50% when an motor start phase is detected. In cases where at the end of the Tinterdiction time delay period, one of the counters is still reached, the START NB LIMIT start inhibit signal will not drop out until the counter in question is decremented (example case No.3). The number of authorised starts and the waiting time before a new start is authorised are available in the PROCESS menu (see section 4.7. The PROCESS menu).

4.11.2 The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu: minimum time between two starts Excessive motor or starting system heating caused by two consecutive starts can be avoided by means of the MINI TIME BETW 2 START function. It is based on the use of an adjustable time delay: minimum time between 2 starts T betw 2 start . This time delay is initiated on detection of an motor start up by the P220 relay. When the motor stops, if the T betw 2 start time delay has not finished, start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated until the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 Examples Case n1: The stopping of the motor takes place before the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period. A start inhibit signal Tbetw 2 start is generated during the Tbetw 2 start period. Case n2:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 35/54

The stopping of the motor takes place after the end of the Tbetw 2 start time delay period, no start inhibit signal is generated.

Istart

Istart

IN motor

IN motor

t T betw 2 start T betw 2 start


T betw 2 start

T betw 2 start (logic state at 0)


P0202ENa

P0203ENa

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 36/54 4.11.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu: Reacceleration authorization

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

A fall in voltage from the electrical network causes a reduction in rotor speed. When the voltage is restored, the rotor starts on a re-acceleration phase in order to regain its nominal speed. This re-acceleration manifests itself as a intake of current of approximately the same value as that of the locked rotor current, its duration being relative to the magnitude of the fall in voltage. The MiCOM P220 can be informed of the fall in voltage from the mains. A programmable logic input of the relay (input VOLT. DIP - the submenu INPUTS, see section 4.11.4.2. The submenu INPUTS: programmable inputs) receives a binary siganl indicating that there is a reduction in voltage from the mains. By comparing how long this voltage reduction lasts with an adjustable time delay Treacc, the relay will authorise or prevent the motors re-acceleration. The user adjusts a time delay Treacc. This time delay corresponds to the maximum duration of a voltage sag for which the motor re-acceleration is to be authorised. On receipt of binary signalling a voltage sag, the MiCOM P220 relay initiates the Treacc time delay. Two circumstances are possible: If the duration of the voltage sag is less than the time delay Treacc and if in the 5 seconds following the end of the voltage sag the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the lstall> threshold ([51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR function), then: The P220 goes into monitoring of a start phase (initiation of the tIstart time delay, EXCES LONG START function) and it deactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function. At the end of the tIstart delay allowed for a start, the relay P220 reactivates the stalled rotor whilst running function. If the duration of the voltage sag is more than the Treacc time delay, the P220 relay does not modify its operation. When the motor tries to reaccelerate, an tripping order will be generated by the stalled rotor whilst running function if the current absorbed by the motor exceeds the Istall> threshold for a length of time exceeding tlstall.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 Examples Case n1:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 37/54

The duration of the drop in voltage is less than the Treacc time delay, when the mains voltage is restored, re-acceleration of the motor is authorised.
Voltage sag Network/mains voltage

Current absorbed by the motor

Istall > threshold Motor reacceleration

T reacc

Fixed window of 5 s

" Drop in voltage " signal (binary input)

t Istart Reacceleration authorization

" stalled rotor whilst running " function active " stalled rotor whilst running " function deactivated
P0204ENa

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 38/54 Case n2:

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

The duration of the voltage drop is greater than the Treacc time delay, reacceleration of the motor is not authorised. When the current absorbed exceeds the current threshold Istall> (non authorised re-acceleration attempt), the stalled rotor whilst running function starts up in order to give an instruction to stop the motor.
Voltage sag Network/mains voltage

Current absorbed by the motor

Istall > threshold Motor reacceleration

T reacc "Drop in voltage" signal (binary input)

t Istall

No reacceleration authorisation (logic state 0) Instruction to stop the motor given by the "stalled rotor whilst running" function

P0205ENa

NOTE:

A drop in voltage is only taken into account if it lasts for at least 100 ms.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.11.4 Binary inputs and outputs Logical gates

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 39/54

Thanks to its programmable scheme logic, inputs and outputs, the MiCOM P220 relay allows control and logic diagrams to be realised. The P220 relay has: 5 logic inputs of which 3 are programmable 6 logic outputs of which 5 are programmable 4 AND logic gates

In order to realise the control and logic diagrams, two types of data are taken into account by the relay: internal type data: logic state of protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals) logic state of an logic or state function (start inhibit, successful start) external type data: data received via its logic inputs data received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor).

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 40/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

Below, a logic diagram shows the different possibilities offered by the MiCOM P220 relay:

&
PROTECTION functions

toperation

treset

&
AUTOMAT. CTRL EXT 1 Logic input EXT 2 Logic input EXT 3 Logic input EXT 4 Logic input External and internal logic signals

toperation

treset
Output relays allocation: RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5

& &

toperation toperation

treset treset

Internal logic signals Remote communication


P0206ENa

4.11.4.1 Fixed inputs Two of the P220s logic inputs are predefined for a fixed use, these are: Logic input No 1 (terminals 22 - 24) is linked to the position of the fuse-contactor or circuit breaker (52a). This input should be linked to the 52a interlock of the cut off device (the 52a interlock is open when the cut off device is open, it is closed when the cut off device is closed). The connection of this logic input is compulsory. The logic input No. 2 (terminals 26-28) is linked to motor speed binary data. This logic input links up to a speed sensor usually known as a speed switch . The speed switch should be open when the rotor is not turning and should close as soon as it detects rotor rotation. The connecting of this logic input to a speed switch device is necessary in order to be able to use the locked rotor at start protection function. NOTE: When the logic input No. 2 is not linked to a speed switch , this logic input has no assignment.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.11.4.2 The INPUTS submenu: programmable inputs

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 41/54

The user can program three of the P220s logic inputs. These are logic input No. 3 (terminals 13-15), No 4 (terminals 17-19) and No 5 (terminals 21-23). The user chooses the allocation of these logic inputs in the INPUTS menu. NOTE: Except for the "None" allocation, any other function can be allocated to only one logic input. Label EMERG ST SET GROUP DIST TRIG EXT RESET VOLT DIP EXT 1 and EXT 2 EXT 3 and EXT 4 NONE Operation mode of logic input LEVEL LEVEL/ EDGE EDGE LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL

Options of allocated information of logic inputs EMERGENCY START SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS DISTURBANCE TRIGGERING EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT RE ACCELERATION AUTHORIZATION AUXILIARY 1 and 2 AUXILIARY 3 and 4 No Assignement EMERGENCY START

An emergency start may be necessary for safety reasons. When the logic input having been assigned to the EMERG ST function is powered on (logic state is active), the P220 relay reacts as follows: The thermal state value is muzzled at 90% so that no thermal trip order THERM. OV. can occur during the motor start up phase (see section 4.10.1.1. Function inhibiting thermal tripping during a start: INHIBIT). At the end of the tIstart time delay allocated to the start up, the thermal condition value will be allowed to exceed 90%. The thermal start inhibit signal FORBID START is suppressed. The start inhibit START NB LIMIT signal from the limitation of number of starts function is suppressed. The T betw 2 start start inhibit signal from the minimum time between 2 starts function is suppressed.

The motor can therefore be restarted and no thermal tripping can take place during the start up phase. NOTE: The logic input EMERG ST must be kept powered during the whole of the motor start up phase. The relay P220 can also receive a remote emergency start command via the communication network. An emergency start up instruction EMERG ST does not order the closure of the cut off device (motor start up) but makes the motor start up possible.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 42/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

SWITCHING BETWEEN CONFIGURATIONS (PASSAGE FROM ONE SETTING GROUP TO ANOTHER) The P220 relay has two configurations (2 setting groups). The switching from one configuration to another can be achieved using one programmed logic input on SET GROUP . When you allocate the information SET GROUP to a logic input, it is possible to configure the operation of this logic input on LEVEL or on EDGE (minimum duration of 15ms). The change from one configuration to another can also be achieved via the operator menu or the communication network (see section 4.5.1.1. Configuration Group). A parameter setting group change is not possible if one of the following protection functions is in progress (that is to say if the current threshold of these functions is exceeded): [50/51] SHORT CIRCUIT function [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT function [46] UNBALANCE function [48] EXCES LONG START function [50S/51LR] BLOCK ROTOR function [37] LOSS OF LOAD function [49/38] RTD (optional) [49] THERMISTOR

TRIGGING OF THE DISTURBANCE RECORDING By assigning the command DIST TRIG to a programmable logic input, the operator will be able to initiate the disturbance recordings (RECORD menu) from this input. The energising (rising front) of this programmed logic input on DIST TRIG will trigger a disturbance recording. EXTERNAL ACKNOWLEDGEMENT By dedicating a logic input to the external acknowledgement command EXT RESET , the operator can acknowledge the alarms and unlatch the output relays if the latter were kept energised (see section 4.11.10. The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu), by energising this logic input. RE-ACCELERATION AUTHORISATION The voltage drop data VOLT. DIP can be assigned to one of the inputs to enable relay P220 to take voltage drops into account in order to authorise re-accelerations if necessary (refer to chapter REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu). AUXILIARY 1 AND AUXILIARY 2 DATA The EXT1 and EXT2 assignments allow relay P220 to acquire two lots of external binary data. A time delay (t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 respectively) is linked to each assignment. The internal EXT1 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 1 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT1 signal drops back to 0.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 43/54

The internal EXT2 signal to the relay is in logic state 1 if the associated logic input is energised for a time longer or equal to t EXT 2 time delay. When the logic input is no longer energised, the logic state of the internal EXT2 signal drops back to 0. When the t EXT 1 and t EXT 2 timers expire, the following happen: an alarm message is sent the Alarm LED is lit an event is recorded.

AUXILIARY 3 AND AUXILIARY 4 DATA The EXT3 and EXT4 assignments operate similarly to EXT1 and EXT2 , but when the associated timers expire, there is no alarm message and the Alarm LED is not lit. The only result is an event record. NO ASSIGNMENT When a logic input is programmed on NONE (None) it becomes inactive. Whether this logic input is switched on or not, relay P220 takes no account of it. 4.11.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu: AND programmable logic gates The AND LOGIC EQUAT function allows the operator to programme 4 AND logic equations, known respectively as A, B, C and D. Each equation can be the logic AND of one, two or several items of internal logic signals (protection or automatism functions) or external data (state of logic inputs EXT 1 , EXT2 , EXT 3 and EXT4 ) to the relay P220. In this menu, the user constructs each of the 4 logic equations by creating logic AND gate between several items of data. Data is assigned to a logic equation by positioning the corresponding digit to 1. When the digit is set at 0, the data is not assigned to the corresponding logic equation. Examples: You want to create 2 AND logic equations. For the first equation, you wish to implement the AND logic of the following data: time delayed earth fault 1st element (tlo>) successful start (SUCCESS START) logic state of one of the binary inputs(EXT1)

SUCCESS START EXT 1

tIo>

&
P0207ENa

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 44/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

For the second logic equation, you wish to implement le logic AND of the following data: unbalance fault 1st element (tli>) logic state of one of the binary inputs (EXT1)

tIi>

EXT 1

&
P0208ENa

Programming in the AND LOGIC EQUAT menu is carried out as follows. In this example, the first equation will be the A equation and the second B: t I0> DCBA 0001 Allocation of the t lo> data to equation A.

t Ii>

DCBA 0010

Allocation of the t li> data to equation B.

EXT1

DCBA 0011

Allocation of the EXT1 data to logic equations A and B.

SUCCESS START

DCBA 0001

Allocation of the SUCCESS START data to equation A.

4.11.6 The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY: AND logic gate time delay 2 time delays can be linked to each of the 4 programmable logic equations: one operation time delay and one reset time delay. These 8 independent time delays (4 logic equations, 2 time delays per equation) are configurable in the AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu. The operation time delay (Toperat) is initiated only if all the associated data in a logic equation are valid (AND gate). It allows the logic equation validation to be delayed for a time Toperat. The reset time delay (Treset) is initiated as soon as any of the data associated with the equation disappears. This allows the equation to remain valid after an item of data has disappeared for a length of time Treset.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 Example:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 45/54

Logic equation C obtained from the combination (AND logic) of three lots of data 1, 2 and 3 with the Toperat and Treset time delays.

1 2 3 Equation C

T operat

T reset

P0209ENa

4.11.7 The AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu : auxiliary programmable output relays In this menu the user assigns the MiCOM P220 internal or external data to the auxiliary output relays (relays No2, No3, No4 and No5). These are changeover type relays (1 common, 1 normally open contact, 1 normally close contact). One relay is switched on when at least one of the data items linked to it is valid (OR logic). It drops back once all its associated data has disappeared. Data assignable to the auxiliary output relays can be: of the internal type logic state of a protection function (instantaneous, time delayed signals) logic state of an automatism or state function (start inhibit, successful start) the result of an AND logic equation signal received via logic inputs ( EXT1 , EXT2 , EXT3 and EXT4 ) signal received via the communication network (remote control by the supervisor).

of the external type

4.11.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu This submenu makes it possible to maintain closed the contacts of outputs assigned to one or more thresholds after the disappearance of the cause; this type of latching is carried out by relay and not by function.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 46/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

4.11.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu: Configuration of the trip output relay Data which is going to control the relay No 1 (terminals 2-4-6) can be assigned using the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu. This changeover type relay is used to give a tripping order to the cut-off device. The relay No1 (tripping relay) has the same electrical and mechanical characteristics as the other output relays. Reminder: A certain number of the MiCOM P220 functions are based on the operation of relay No1, i.e. The Trip Cause Statistics (refer to 4.8) The Latching of the Trip Output Relay (refer to 4.11.10) The Surveillance of the cut-off device (refer to 4.11.11) The display of data relating to the cut-off device (refer to 4.12.3) The record of fault values (refer to 4.12.1) The triggering of disturbance record (refer to 4.12.2) 4.11.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu : Latching of the output relays In this menu, the user selects which functions are to maintain the output relays energised when an order is generated by these functions. The functions for which output relays can be latched are: time delayed threshold tl>> ([50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu) time delayed threshold tlo>> ([50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu) time delayed threshold tli>> ([46] UNBALANCE submenu) AND logic equation A (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu) AND logic equation B (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu) AND logic equation C (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu) AND logic equation D (AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu)

Thus, when one of the above functions generates a command via one or several output relays, the corresponding relays remain energised after the disappearance of the command. It will be necessary to come and acknowledge the P220 in order to switch off the output relay(s). NOTE: Latching of the output relays is optional for each of these functions. The user can chose whether to assign these functions to the output relay latching facility . There are three possible ways to acknowledge the P220, and thus switch off the output relays in the event of latching: - press the " button - send an acknowledge order to the configured logic input on EXT RESET - send a acknowledge remote order via the communication network (order given by a supervisor) On loss of auxiliary power, the output relays drop back. On return of auxiliary power, the output relays are re-energised, independently of the fault status (still present or cleared).

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.11.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu:

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 47/54

The P220 relay monitors the operation of the cut-off device (fuse-contactor or circuit breaker). Three criteria are monitored and for each of these an adjustable alarm threshold is available to the user. These thresholds are based on: Monitoring of the time of opening of the cut-off device. This is the time from the moment when the P220 sends an order to the output relay No1 to the moment when the P220 relay receives the data on the logic input No. 1 (terminals 22-24) indicating that the cut-off device is open. Monitoring of the number of opening orders. This is the number of tripping orders which have been given to relay No 1. Monitoring of the summation of the amps to exponent n cut by the cut-off device The value of the intensity being taken into account is that of the current at the moment when the output relay No 1 receives a tripping order.

When one of the thresholds described above is exceeded, an alarm message is available on the display and logic data can be assigned by the user on one or several of the auxiliary output relays (relays No 2,3,4 or 5). So as to adapt the MiCOM P220 to any type of cut-off device, the user can also configure 2 time delays: A making time (Ttrip) for maintaining the tripping order information: For each tripping order sent on the relay No 1, this one is maintained excited for (Ttrip) time (if the trip output relay latching facility were not parameterized) A marking time (Tclose) for maintaining the closing order information: A command of interlocking (closing of the switchgear) given by the communication network (remote control CLOSE ORDER) is maintained on the auxiliary output relay during a time equal to Tclose. It is about the output relay to which the CLOSE ORDER was affected (AUX OUTPUT RLY menu). NOTE: For the summation of the amps to exponent n cut, the exponent n can be adjusted to the value 1 or the value 2. In all cases, the orders sent on the output relay No1 (tripping order) are maintained for at least 100 ms.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 48/54 4.12 The RECORD menu The RECORD menu comprises 3 sub menus FAULT RECORD DISTURB RECORD SW MONITORING

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

4.12.1 The FAULT RECORD submenu A collection of data on each of the 5 last faults registered is displayed in the FAULT RECORD sub menu. For each logging, the relay memorises: the fault number the time of the fault the date of the fault setting group (group G1 or G2) active at the time of the fault the faulty phase the function which detected the fault magnitude of fault current (in fundamental value) the 3 phase currents (in True RMS values) the earth current (in True RMS value)

The recordings of the fault are accessible: either through the Human Machine Interface (display front face) or using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port)

Fault number 5 is the last fault registered, fault number 1 is the oldest. NOTE: Data registered in the non volatile memory are available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a backup battery housed in the front face. These data are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest fault is erased. Faults are signalled by one or several alarm messages.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.12.2 The DISTURBANCE RECORD submenu

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 49/54

The MiCOM P220 relay offers the possibility of saving 5 disturbance records. The data are acquired at a frequency of 32 samples per electrical cycle, ie. 1600Hz in a 50Hz system or 1920 Hz in 60Hz system, and allows for a very faithful reconstruction of the analogue signals. For each recording, the relays memorises: the 3 phase currents the earth current the frequency the state of the 5 logic inputs the state of all the output relays (including the watchdog relay) the date and the time

The total duration of a recording is defined by the configuration of the pre-time and post-time. The pre-time defines the duration of the recording before the disturbance recording triggering order, the post time defines the duration of the recording after the disturbance recording triggering order. In all cases, the total duration of a recording cannot exceed 3 seconds.
Duration of recording : 3 seconds maximum

Pre-time Triggering order

Post-time

P0210ENa

The triggering of a disturbance recording can be generated: when a logic entry programmed on DIST TRIG is excited (see section 4.11.4.2.3 Trigging of the disturbance recording) on receipt of a remote control from a supervisor on the communications network (RS485 rear port) on receipt of a remote control from MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port) when one of the following occurs (exclusive choice): instantaneous over-stepping of one of the following current thresholds: l>>, lo>, lo>> (instantaneous short-circuit, instantaneous earth fault 1st threshold and instantaneous earth fault 2nd threshold data respectively) or when output relay No 1 is excited (relay dedicated to the tripping of the cut-off device). The excitement of this relay can be due to the detection of an electrical fault or to a voluntary opening order (opening remote control on the communication network, external order relayed by one of the logic inputs).

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 50/54 The disturbance recordings can be retrieved: either using the communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port) NOTE:

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

If the configuration of the pre-time and post-time corresponds to total recording duration of more than three seconds then the post-time duration is automatically reduced so that the total recording duration is 3 seconds. Disturbance recordings are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the oldest recording is erased. The data registered in non volatile memory are available for 1 year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. When the disturbance recordings are extracted from relay P220 using the MiCOM S1 support software, they are stored in the COMTRADE format.

4.12.3 The SW MONITORING submenu In this menu the operator with access to data relating to the cut-off device: Summation of the amps exponent n switched by the cut-off device for each phase. Total number of operations of relay No 1 Opening time of the cut-off device. NOTE: These data are those calculated by the relay P220 whilst in the SW SUPERVISION menu the operator with access to the adjustment of the parameters to generate alarm data when a threshold is exceeded. The way in which relay P220 calculates its data is explained in the section SW SUPERVISION ( 4.11.11).

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220 4.13 ALARM messages

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 51/54

The management of the alarms is carried out directly on the front face screen. The display of alarm messages takes priority over that of the value by default (selected in CONFIG. SELECT submenu), so that as soon as an alarm is detected by the, the message is displayed on the MiCOM P220 relay screen. The alarm messages are classified into 2 categories: Motor alarm message Relay hardware or software fault, or RTD/thermistor failure message

The display of a HARDWARE ALARM message takes priority over the display of a MOTOR ALARM message. NOTE: Upon loss of auxiliary power supply, the alarm messages disappear. They are restored upon return of the power supply.

4.13.1 The MOTOR ALARM messages Data considered as motor alarm are displayed in the MOTOR ALARMS menu. If several alarms appear, they are written to memory in the order of their detection. They are displayed in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the oldest last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated. Example This message indicates an earth fault (time delayed threshold tlo>>). This alarm is the 2nd out of total of 7. t I0>> 2/7

The operator can read all the alarm messages using the ! key, without needing to key in the pass word. The operator can acknowledge the alarms using the ! key. Keying in the password is not necessary. The operator can acknowledge each message one at a time, or acknowledge all the messages by going to the end of the list and acknowledging all the messages by pressing the " key. NOTE: If an alarm has not been acknowledged, it will not be possible to view the default display programmed by the operator.

4.13.2 The HARDWARE ALARM messages The safety and availability of the MiCOM P220 relay can be improved by a cyclic autotest procedure of both hardware and software. Each time the P220 relay is switched on, auto-diagnostic tests are initiated: these tests deal with the output relays (engaging / triggering tests), the microprocessor, the memories (EEPROM checksum calculation, RAM tests) and the acquisition circuit of each analogue input.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 52/54 The hardware faults are split into 2 groups:

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

Minor faults: these are faults classified as non serious (communication fault, analogue output fault, 3.6V battery, RTD or thermistor failure and date indicator fault). Major faults: these are serious faults (RAM fault, EEPROM data fault, EEPROM calibration fault, analogue signal acquisition fault, watchdog fault).

Any major fault recorded is immediately the subject of an alarm and provokes the activation of the WATCHDOG relay (relay No0, terminals 35-36-37), as well as the switching off of the other output relays. The acknowledged alarms are all written to memory in the order of their appearance. The display of the alarms is ensured in reverse chronological order (the most recent alarm first, the least recent last). Each message is numbered and the total number of messages is indicated in the top left hand corner of the display. The operator can read all of the alarm messages using the ! key, without any necessity to key in the pass word. The acknowledgement of the relay hardware alarm messages is IMPOSSIBLE. Only the disappearance of the cause of the alarm will provoke their acknowledgement. The display of a hardware fault (equipment fault) takes priority over the other alarms (non equipment fault). NOTE: In the case of major hardware alarm and even when the tripping relay is configured to be latched, it drops out.

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 53/54

5.
5.1

AUXILIARY FUNCTIONS
Event records The MiCOM P220 relay registers 75 changes of state in non volatile memory and dates them with a precision of 1 ms. For each change of state the relay indicates the date, the time and the wording of the event. This applies to any change of state of the logic inputs / outputs, the alteration of one or several setting parameters, alarm or triggering data. Please refer to Chapter 6Communications for more information. The recordings of the consignment of states can be downloaded: either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port) NOTE: The data are registered in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. These consignments are not erasable. They are managed in a circular list: when this is full, the change of state of the oldest is erased.

5.2

Recording of the form of the starting current The MiCOM P220 relay records the form of current of the last start. In order to do this, it records at each period (every 20 ms if the frequency is at 50 Hz) the maximum value of one of the three phase currents. The values recorded are expressed in True RMS values. The recording is initiated following detection by the relay of an motor start up, it stops at the end of the tlstart time delay allocated to the start up. The file containing the recording of the form of the starting current can be repatriated on a PC: either using the remote communication network (RS485 rear port) or using the MiCOM S1 support software (RS232 front port). The data will be stored in COMTRADE format. NOTE: The data are recorded in non volatile memory and are available for one year without auxiliary power, thanks to a back-up battery housed in the front face. The maximum duration of a recording is limited to 40 seconds.

P220/EN FT/B43 Page 54/54

Technical Guide User Guide MiCOM P220

6.
6.1

PC CONNECTION DUN PC LOCAL COMMUNICATIONS


Connection configuration Configuration is indicated in the figure below:

P0220ENb

The front communication port is provided by a 9-pin female D-type connector located under the bottom hinged cover. It provides RS232 (IEC60870 compliant) serial data communication and is intended for use with a PC connected locally to the relay (up to 15m distance) as shown in the figure above. This is a pin-to-pin connection which must not be used as a permanent connection. 6.2 Configuration of the relay and PC Once the physical connection is established, the relay and PC settings must be checked in order to start the communication. The default communication settings of the RS232 port are as follows: Protocol Rate Address Message format Modbus 19 200 bits/s Must be set in the "Communication" menu, "Address" line. 11 bit - 1 bit start, 8 bits data, 1 bit even, 1 bit stop.

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43

Menu of the HMI

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 1/48

CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5

THE OP PARAMETERS MENU CONFIGURATION MENU


CONFIG. SELECT submenu The CT RATIO submenu The LED submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu Date Format submenu

3 5
5 6 7 9 9

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9

THE MEASUREMENTS MENU THE PROCESS SUBMENU THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU THE COMMUNICATION MENU THE PROTECTION MENU
The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu The [46] UNBALANCE submenu The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu The [49/38] RTD submenu The [49] THERMISTOR submenu

10 11 12 14 15
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

8.
8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7 8.8 8.9

THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU


The [66] Start number submenu The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu The INPUTS submenu The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

24
24 24 25 26 27 29 30 33 34

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 2/48 8.10 8.11 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu The SW SUPERVISION submenu

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 36 37

9.
9.1 9.2 9.3

RECORD MENU
The FAULT RECORD submenu The DISTURB RECORD submenu The SW MONITORING submenu

38
38 39 40

10.

MENUS CONTENT

41

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 3/48

1.

THE OP PARAMETERS MENU


OP PARAMETERS Press the ! and " keys to move around in the OP PARAMETERS menu.

PASSWORD = ****

Modification of the password : key in the old password and confirm it. Then press the # key, key in the new password and confirm the whole input with the # key. The message NEW PASSWORD OK is displayed to indicate that the password has changed. Displays the model of MiCOM relay.

TYPE =

P220

REFERENCE = XXXX

Displays your reference code. It contains letters between A and Z. To enter it, press the # key for each letter and use the ! and " keys to move forwards and backwards in the alphabet. After each letter, press the $ key to enter the next letter. At the end of the input, press the # key to confirm your reference code. Displays the software version code.

SOFTWARE VERSION = 3.C

FREQUENCY= 50 Hz

Acquisition of the reference frequency of the electrical power system. There is a choice of: 50 Hz or 60 Hz

ACTIVE GROUP= 1

Displays the Active Group.

INPUT ST =

54321 00000

Displays the state of the binary inputs. The binary inputs are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The state of each binary input is displayed immediately below: - state 0: input inactive. - state 1 : input active Displays the state of the output relays. The output relays are numbered from 1 to 5 starting from the right. The status of each output relay is displayed immediate below: - state 0: input inactive. - state 1 : input active Selection and display of the date.

OUTPUT ST =

54321 00000

DATE

14/09/00

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 4/48 TIME Selection and display of the time. 16:35:30

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 5/48

2.

CONFIGURATION MENU
CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu

2.1

CONFIG. SELECT submenu CONFIG. SELECT To move about in the CONFIG. SELECT submenu, use the ! and " keys. To go into the CT RATIO, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the % and $ keys. Selection of the mode of operation of the logic inputs. Choice of: EDGE/LEVEL.

CHANGE GROUP INPUT = EDGE

SETTING GROUP

Selection and display of the configuration group. Choice of: group 1 or group 2.

DEFAULT DISPLAY IA RMS

Selection and display of a default value. There is a choice of: IA RMS or IB RMS or IC RMS or I0 RMS or THERM ST or % I LOAD Selection and display of the start detection criterion. Choice of: 52A or 52A +I

START DETECTION 52A + I dem

ANALOG. OUTPUT 0 - 20 mA

Selection and display of the type of analogue output: 0-20 mA or 4-20 mA (optional)

DATA TYPE ANALOG IA RMS

Selection and display of the value transmitted by the analogue output (optional). Choice of: IA RMS, IB RMS, IC RMS, I0 RMS, THERM ST, % I LOAD, Tbef START, Tbef TRIP (respectively time delay before start, time delay before thermal tripping) TC RTD1, TC RTD2, TC RTD3, TC RTD4, TC RTD5, TC RTD6. Selection and display of the type of RTD temperature probe (optional): PT100, Ni100, Ni120 or Cu10

RTD type = PT100

Thermist 1 type = PTC

Selection and display of the type of thermistor 1 (optional) : choice of PTC or NTC

Thermist 2 type =

NTC

Selection and display of the type of thermistor 2 (optional) : choice of PTC or NTC

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 6/48 2.2 The CT RATIO submenu CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

CT RATIO

To move around in the CT RATIO submenu, press the ! and "keys. To go into the CONFIG. SELECT, LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8, press the % and $ keys. **** Selection and display of the primary rating of the phase CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1. Selection and display of the secondary rating of the phase CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5. Selection and display of the primary rating of the earth CT. The value is entered on 4 figures: from 1 to 3000 in steps of 1. Selection and display of the secondary rating of the earth CT. The value is to be selected between either 1 or 5.

PRIM PH =

SEC PH = *

PRIM E = ****

SEC E = *

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 2.3 The LED submenus CONFIGURATION Press the ! and " keys to enter the CONFIGURATION menu.

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 7/48

LED 5

To move around in the LED 5 submenu, press the ! and " keys. To go to the CONFIG. SELECT, CT RATIO, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus, press the % and $ keys. To link LED 5 with the "thermal overload" function so that it lights up if the thermal overload function operates, press #, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm This links LED 5 to the thermal alarm threshold ALARM.

THERM OVERLOAD ? YES

ALARM ?

NO

t I >> ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tI>> (protection against short-circuits).

t Io > ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo> (protection against Earth faults)

t Io >> ?

NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIo>> (protection against Earth faults)

t Ii > ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi > (protection against unbalances).

t Ii >> ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIi >> (protection against unbalances)

t I< ?

NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t I< (protection against undercurrent / losses of load).

EXCES LONG START ?

NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold tIstart (protection against excessively long starts).

t Istall ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed threshold t Istall (protection against rotor stalling when the motor is running)

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 8/48 LOCKED ROTOR ?

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 This links LED 5 to the function "rotor locked on starting"

NO

EMERG RESTART ? NO

This links LED 5 to the "emergency restart" information.

FORBIDDEN START ? NO

This links LED 5 to the "forbidden start" information

t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ? NO

This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 ALARM, tRTD2 ALARM and tRTD3 ALARM (temperature protection: optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD1 TRIP, tRTD2 TRIP and tRTD3 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 ALARM, tRTD5 ALARM and tRTD6 ALARM (temperature protection: optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds tRTD4 TRIP, tRTD5 TRIP and tRTD6 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) This links LED 5 to the time delayed thresholds Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional) This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT1

t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ? NO

t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ? NO

t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ?

NO

Thermist 1, 2? NO

EXT 1 ? NO

EXT 2 ?

This links LED 5 to the auxiliary time delay tEXT2 NO

MOTOR STOPPED ? NO

This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "motor stopped"

MOTOR RUNNING ? NO

This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "motor running".

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 SUCCESSFUL START ? 2.4

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 9/48 This links LED 5 to the indication with the information "successful start"

NO

CONFIGURATION INPUTS submenu Inputs : 54321 11111 Configuration of the mode of operation of logic inputs. Choice: 0 or 1.

2.5

Date Format submenu DATE FORMAT: PRIVATE NOTE: Configuration of the Date format for synchronization. Choice: PRIVATE or IEC.

If the choosen protocol for communication is Modbus, so you will find this submenu in the "COMMUNICATION" menu.

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 10/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

3.

THE MEASUREMENTS MENU


MEASUREMENTS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the MEASUREMENTS menu.

IA RMS = 0.00 A

Display of the current of phase A (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu) Display of the current of phase B (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu) Display of the current of phase C (true RMS value) taking into account the phase CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu) Display of the earth current (true RMS- value) taking into account the earth CT ratio (CT RATIO submenu)

IB RMS = 0.00 A

IC RMS = 0.00 A

IN RMS = 0.00 A

I1 POSITIVE = 0.00 A

Display of the positive sequence current

I2 NEGATIVE = 0.00 A

Display of the negative sequence current

Io ZERO = 0.00 A

Display of the zero sequence current

FREQUENCY = 0.0 Hz

Display of the frequency of the power system supplying the motor, calculated from the phase currents

MAX PH CURRENT = PROCESS 0.00 A NOTE:

Display of the maximum phase current value outside the starting period

The 3 phase currents and the earth current are displayed as true RMS values: taking into account up to the 10th harmonic at 50 Hz, and up to the 8th at 60 Hz.

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 11/48

4.

THE PROCESS SUBMENU


PROCESS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the PROCESS menu.

% I FLC 0%

Display of the current consumed by the motor as a percentage of the thermal tripping current threshold I> Display of the thermal state of the motor (tripping at 100 %). For the test phases of the relay P220, you can reset the thermal state to zero by pressing the key &. Display of the time before thermal tripping occurs, once the thermal alarm threshold ALARM is exceeded.

THERMAL STATE = CLR ?= CL 0%

T before TH TRIP =

0s

Temperature RTD 1 = C

Display of the temperature of the probe RTD1 (optional). ... and similarly for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional). Display of the number of starts permitted. 0

PERMIT START NB

T before START 0s

Display of the time to wait before a new start is permitted.

Last Start I = 0.00 A

Display of the current of the last start.

Last Start Time 0s

Display of the duration of the last start.

MOTOR START NB CLR ? = CL 0

Display of the number of starts of the motor. To reset to zero press & key.

EMERG RESTART NB CLR ? = CL 0

Display of the number of emergency starts. To reset to zero: press & key.

MOT OPERAT HOURS CLR ? = CL 0 h

Display of the number of operating hours of the motor. To reset to zero: press & key.

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 12/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

5.

THE TRIP STATISTICS MENU


TRIP STATISTICS Press the ! and " keys to move about in the TRIP STATISTICS menu.

STATISTICS CLR ? = CL

To reset all the tripping statistics to zero, press key &. NO

TOTAL TRIP NB 0

Display of the total number of tripping operations (with and without fault)

OPERATOR TRIP NB 0

Display of the number of deliberate tripping operations (without fault)

THERM TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a thermal overload

t I >> TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a short-circuit

t Io>, t Io>> TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an Earth fault

t Ii > , t Ii >> TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an unbalance

t Istart TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by an excessively long start

t Istall TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a stalled rotor while the motor is running

LOCKED ROTOR TP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by a locked rotor when starting

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 t I < TRIP NB =

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 13/48 Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the protection against undercurrents/loss of load

RTD1 TRIP NB =

Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by probe RTD1 (optional) ...and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional Display of the number of tripping operations caused by the temperature protection function by thermistor 1 (optional) ...ditto for thermistor 2 (optional) Display of the number of tripping operations on account of the validation of equation A ditto for equations B, C and D.

thermist 1 TRIP NB =

EQUATION A TRIP NB =

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 14/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

6.

THE COMMUNICATION MENU


If communication is under the MODBUS protocol Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu

COMMUNICATION

COM. OK =

YES

Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P220 relay. To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm. Selection and display of the transmission speed. Choice of: 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 bauds. Selection and display of the parity in the communication frame. Choice of: With (even or odd) or Without Selection and display of the number of data bits in the frame. Choice of: 7 or 8

DATA RATE = 19200 Bd

PARITY = WITHOUT

DATA BITS=

STOP BITS = 1

Selection and display of the number of stop bits. Au Choice : 1 or 2

RELAY ADRESS = 1

Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255

If communication is under the Courier protocol Press the ! and " keys to move about in the COMMUNICATION menu.

COMMUNICATION

COM. OK = YES

Use of the communication (RS485) at the rear of the MiCOM P220 relay To activate the communication, press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys, then press # again to confirm. Selection and display of the address of the MiCOM P220 relay in the network. Choice from: 1 to 255

RELAY ADRESS =

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 15/48

7.
7.1

THE PROTECTION MENU


The [49] THERMAL OVERLOD submenu PROTECTION G1 Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[49] THERMAL OVER LOAD

To move about in the submenu [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD, press the ! and "keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "thermal overload" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and ". Confirm with #. To switch on the "thermal inhibition on starting" function, press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the thermal overload current threshold I>: from 0.2 In to 1.5 In in steps of 0.01 In

THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCT ? YES

INHIBIT ? YES

I > =

0.2 In

Ke =

Setting of the value of the negative sequence contribution factor Ke in the thermal image : from 0 to 10 in steps of 1 Setting of the value of the overload time constant Te1: from 1 to 180 minutes in steps of 1 min

Te1 = 1 mn

Te2 = 1 mn

Setting of the starting time constant value Te2: from 1 to 360 minutes in steps of 1 minute

Tr =

1 mn

Setting of the value of the cooling time constant Tr: from 1 to 999 minutes in steps of 1 minute

RTD1 INFLUENCE ? YES

To switch on the function of "influence of a RTD temperature probe" (optional): press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. To switch on the "thermal alarm" function: press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the choice, press the # key.

ALARM ?

YES

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 16/48 ALARM =

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 Setting of the thermal alarm threshold value ALARM: from 20 % to 100 % in steps of 1 %

20 %

FORBID START ? YES

To switch on the "thermal inhibition of start" function: press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the threshold value for thermal inhibition of start forbid: from 20% to 100% in steps of 1%

FORBID START =

20 %

7.2

The [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu PROTECTION G1 Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT

To move about in the [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu, press the ! and " keys.. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "short-circuit" function : press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the short-circuit current threshold value I>>: from 1 to 12 In by steps of 0.1 In.

I>> FUNCTION ? YES

I >> = 1.0 In

t I >> = 10 ms

Setting of the time delay tI>> associated with the threshold I>>: from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 7.3 The [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu PROTECTION G1

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 17/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

To move about in the [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "earth fault" function (threshold Io>): press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the first earth fault current threshold value Io>: from 0,002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0,001 Ion Setting of the time delay tIo> associated with the threshold Io>: from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 To switch on the "earth fault" function (Io>> threshold): press the # key. Select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the second earth fault current threshold value Io>> : from 0.002 to 1 Ion in steps of 0.001 Ion Setting of the time delay associated with the threshold Io>> : from 0 ms to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s

Io> FUNCTION ? YES

Io> = 0.002 Ion

t Io> = 0 ms

Io>> FUNCTION ? YES

Io>> = 0.002 Ion

t Io>> = 10 ms

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 18/48 7.4 The [46] UNBALANCE submenu PROTECTION G1

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[46] UNBALANCE

To move about in the [46] UNBALANCE submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "unbalance" function (threshold Ii>): press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the first unbalance current threshold value Ii> : from 0.05 to 0.8 In in steps of 0.025 In Setting of the time delay tIi> associated with the threshold Ii> : from 40 to 100 s in steps of 0.01 s To switch on the unbalance function (Ii>> threshold) : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the second unbalance current threshold value Ii>>: from 0,2 to 0,8 In in steps of 0,05 In

Ii> FUNCTION ? YES

Ii > = 0.05 In

t Ii > = 40 ms

Ii>> FUNCTION ? YES

Ii >> = 0.2 In

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 7.5 The[48] EXCES LONG START submenu PROTECTION G1

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 19/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[48] EXCES LONG START

To move about in the [48] EXCES LONG START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "excessively long start" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the Istart detection threshold : from 1 to 5 I pain steps of 0,5 I

EXCES LONG START FUNCT ? YES

Istart DETECTION = 1.0 I

t Istart = 14 s

Setting of the time delay tIstart associated with the threshold Istart: from 1 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 20/48 7.6 The [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu PROTECTION G1

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[51LR-50S] BLOCK ROTOR BLOQUE BLOCKED ROTOR FUNCT ?

To move about in the [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "blocked rotor" function: press the # key: select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the blocked rotor time delay tIstall associated with the Istall current threshold: from 0.1 to 60 s in steps of 0.1 s To switch on the "stalled rotor with motor running" function : press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the stalled rotor detection current threshold Istall: from 1 to 5 I in steps of 0.5 I To switch on the "locked rotor at start" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key

YES

t Istall = 0,1 s

STALLED ROTOR? YES

Istall DETECTION = 1.0 I

LOCKED ROTOR AT START ? YES

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 7.7 The [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu PROTECTION G1

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 21/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[37] LOSS OF LOAD

To move about in the [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys To switch on the "undercurrent" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the undercurrent threshold value I < : from 0.1 to 1 In in steps of 0.01 In

I< FUNCTION ? YES

I<= 0.1 In

tI<= 0.2 s

Setting of the tI < time delay associated with the threshold I < : from 0.2 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s Setting of the inhibition time of the "undercurrent / loss of load" function on starting, Tinhib : from 50 ms to 300 s in steps of 0.1 s

T inhib = 50 ms

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 22/48 7.8 The [49/38] RTD submenu PROTECTION G1

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[49/38] RTD SENSORS

To move about in the [49/38] RTD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the temperature protection function using probe RTD1: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the alarm temperature threshold value for RTD1 ALARM: from 0 to 200 C in steps of 1 C Setting of the time delay tRTD1 ALARM associated with the RTD1 ALARM threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0.1 s Setting of the tripping temperature threshold value for RTD1 TRIP: from 0 to 200C in steps of 1C Setting of the time delay tRTD1 TRIP associated with the RTD1 TRIP threshold : from 0 to 100 s in steps of 0,1 s ...and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6

RTD 1 FUNCTION ? YES

RTD 1 ALARM = 0C

t RTD 1 ALARM = 0.0 s

RTD 1 TRIP = 0C

t RTD 1 TRIP = 0.0 s

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 7.9 The [49] THERMISTOR submenu PROTECTION G1

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 23/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the PROTECTION G1 menu.

[49] THERMISTOR

To move about in the [49] THERMISTOR submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 1: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor1: from 100 to 30000 in steps of 100 To switch on the temperature protection function using thermistor 2: press the # key: select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the resistance threshold value for Thermistor2: from 100 to 30000 in steps of 100

Thermistor 1 ? YES

Thermist 1 = 0.1 k

Thermistor 2 ? YES

Thermist 2 = 0.1 k

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 24/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

8.
8.1

THE AUTOMATIC CTRL MENU


The [66] Start number submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

[66] START NUMBER

To move about in the [66] START NUMBER submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "number of starts limitation" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the reference time Treference during which the starts are counted: from 10 to 120 min in steps of 5 min Setting of the threshold of the number of hot starts: from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1

START NB LIMITAT FUNCT ? YES

Treference = 10 mn

HOT START NB = 0

COLD START NB =

Setting of the threshold of the number of cold starts : from 0 to 5 in steps of de 1

T interdiction = 1 mn

Setting of the time delay during which starting is forbidden Tinterdiction: from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min

8.2

The MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

MIN TIME BETW 2 START

To move about in the MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "minimum time between two starts" function: press the # key, select YES by using the ! and " keys To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the minimum time between two starts Tbetw 2 starts : from 1 to 120 min in steps of 1 min

TIME BETW START FUNCT ?

YES

T betw 2 start = 1 mn

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 8.3 The REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 25/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

REACCEL AUTHORIZ

To move about in the REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the "re-acceleration authorisation" function: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key. Setting of the re-acceleration time delay Treacc : from 0.2 s to 10 s in steps of 0.05 s

REACCEL AUTHORIZ FUNCT ? YES

VOLT DIP DURAT Treacc = 0.2 s

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 26/48 8.4 The INPUTS submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

INPUTS

To move about in the INPUTS submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. . To programme the inputs numbered 3, 4 and 5, press the # key, then press the ! and " keys to scroll through the possible allocations : - none (no allocation) : NONE -emergency start : EMERG ST -change of configuration : SET GROUP -voltage dip : VOLT. DIP -triggering of the disturbance recording : DIST TRIG - external acknowledgement : EXT RESET - external auxiliary1 : EXT 1 - external auxiliary 2 : EXT 2 - external auxiliary 3 : EXT 3 - external auxiliary 4 : EXT 4 To confirm your selection, press the # key. Setting of the time delay tEXT1 associated with the input EXT 1 : from 0 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s Setting of the time delay tEXT2 associated with the input EXT 2 : from 0 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s Setting of the time delay tEXT3 associated with the input EXT 3 : from 0 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s Setting of the time delay tEXT4 associated with the input EXT 4 : from 0 to 200 s in steps of 0.01 s

INPUT 3 = NONE

INPUT 4 = NONE

INPUT 5 = NONE

t EXT 1 = 0s

t EXT 2 =

0s

t EXT 3 = 0s

t EXT 4 = 0s

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 8.5 The AND LOGIC EQUAT submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 27/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

AND LOGIC EQUATION

To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the "thermal tripping information" (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the equations A, B, C and D : press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease, then confirm the selection using the #. Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold ALARM

THERM OV

DCBA 0000

ALARM

DCBA 0000

FORBID START

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting starting forbid

I >>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (shortcircuit)

t I >>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (shortcircuit)

Io>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth fault)

t Io>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth fault)

Io>>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth fault)

t Io>>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth fault)

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 28/48 t Ii > DCBA 0000

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi> (unbalance)

t Ii >>

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>> (unbalance)

EXCES LG START

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long starts)

t Istall

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling of the rotor when the motor is running)

LOCKED ROTOR

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"

tI<

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I < (undercurrent/loss of load)

START NB LIMIT

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of starts"

T betw 2 Start

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (function of the minimum time between 2 starts)

t RTD 1 ALARM

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 1 TRIP

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD 5 and RTD6 (optional) Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional) Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time delay)

Thermist1

DCBA 0000

EXT1

DCBA 0000

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 EXT2 DCBA 0000

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 29/48 Allocation of the input EXT2 (instantaneous or with time delay)

EXT3

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the input EXT3 (instantaneous or with time delay)

EXT4

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the input EXT4 (instantaneous or with time delay)

SUCCESS START 8.6

DCBA 0000

Allocation of the information "successful start"

The AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY

To move about in the AND LOGIC EQUATION T DELAY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. Setting of the time delay Toperat allocated to the logic equation A: from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s Setting of the time delay Treset allocated to the logic equation A: from 0 to 60 min in steps of 0.1 s ... and so on for the logic equations B, C and D

EQU. A T operat = 0 mn

EQU. A T reset = 0 mn

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 30/48 8.7 The AUX OUPUT RLY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

AUX OUTPUT RLY

To move about in the AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the "thermal tripping" information (protection against thermal overloads) to one (or more) of the outputs Nos. 2 to 5 : press the # key, allocate the value 1 under the letter by pressing the ! and " keys to increase or decrease, then confirm the selection using the # key. Allocation of the thermal alarm threshold ALARM

THERM OV.

5432 0000

ALARM

5432 0000

FORBID. START

5432 0000

Allocation of the thermal threshold for prohibiting starting forbid

I >>

5432 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold I >> (shortcircuit)

t I >>

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (shortcircuit)

Io>

5432 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io> (earth fault)

t Io>

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo> (earth fault)

Io>>

5432 0000

Allocation of the instantaneous threshold Io >> (earth fault)

t Io>>

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo>> (earth fault)

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 t Ii > 5432 0000

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 31/48 Allocation of the time delayed threshold tIi> (unbalance)

t Ii >>

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi>> (unbalance)

EXCES LG START

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long starts)

t Istall

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (stalling of the rotor when the motor is running

LOCKED ROTOR

5432 0000

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start

tI<

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold I < (undercurrent / loss of load)

START NB LIMIT

5432 0000

Allocation of the function "limitation of the number of starts"

T betw 2 start

5432 0000

Allocation of the function Tbetw 2 start (functions of the minimum time between 2 starts)

t RTD 1 ALARM

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 ALARM (temperature protection: optional)

t RTD 1 TRIP

5432 0000

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional) Allocation of the threshold Thermistor 1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional) Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time delay)

Thermist1

5432 0000

EXT1

5432 0000

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 32/48 EXT2 5432 0000

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 Allocation of the input EXT2 (instantaneous or with time delay)

EXT3

5432 0000

Allocation of the input EXT3 (instantaneous or with time delay)

EXT4

5432 0000

Allocation of the input EXT4 (instantaneous or with time delay)

CLOSE ORDER

5432 0000

Allocation of the closing command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

TRIP ORDER

5432 0000

Allocation of the tripping command (order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

ORDER 1

5432 0000

Allocation of the command ORDER 1 (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

ORDER 2

5432 0000

Allocation of the command ORDER 2 (any order given by a supervisor via the RS485)

SUCCESS START

5432 0000

Allocation of the "successful start" information

t EQU. A

5432 0000

Allocation of the logic equation A

t EQU. B

5432 0000

Allocation of the logic equation B

t EQU. C

5432 0000

Allocation of the logic equation C

t EQU. D

5432 0000

Allocation of the logic equation D

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 SW OPER TIME 5432 0000

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 33/48 Allocation of the circuit breaker operating time threshold

SW OPER NB

5432 0000

Allocation of the threshold of the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker

SAn

5432 0000

Allocation of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power of n interrupted by the circuit breaker

ACTIVE GR

5432 0000

Allocation of the active group

8.8

The LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu OUTPUT 2 NO Latching configuration of ouput relay n2.

OUTPUT 3 NO

Latching configuration of ouput relay n3.

OUTPUT 4 NO

Latching configuration of ouput relay n4.

OUTPUT 5 NO

Latching configuration of ouput relay n5.

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 34/48 8.9 The TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu.

TRIP OUTPUT RLY

To move about in the TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To allocate the thermal tripping information (protection against thermal overloads) to the trip output relay (output relay n 1), press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key. Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI >> (shortcircuit)

THERM OVERLOAD ? YES

t I >> ? YES

t Io> ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo > (earth fault)

t Io>> ?

YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth fault)

t Ii > ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi > (unbalance)

t Ii >> ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIi >> (unbalance)

EXCES LONG START ?

YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstart (excessively long start)

t Istall ? YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tIstall (rotor stalled while motor is running)

LOCKED ROTOR ? YES

Allocation of the function "rotor locked at start"

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 tI<?

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 35/48 Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tI < (undercurrent / loss of load)

YES

t RTD1 ? TRIP

YES

Allocation of the time-delayed threshold tRTD1 TRIP (temperature protection: optional) and so on for the probes RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 (optional) Allocation of the threshold Thermistor1: (temperature protection: optional) ditto for thermistor 2 (optional) Allocation of the input EXT1 (instantaneous or with time delay)

Thermist 1 ? YES

EXT 1 ?

YES

EXT 2 ? NO

Allocation of the input EXT2 (instantaneous or with time delay)

EQUATION A ? YES

Allocation of the logic equation A

EQUATION B ?

Allocation of the logic equation B NO

EQUATION C ? NO

Allocation of the logic equation C

EQUATION D ? NO

Allocation of the logic equation D

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 36/48 8.10 The LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

LATCH TRIP ORDER

To move about in the LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu, press the ! and " key. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys Latching of the output relay n1 (trip output relay) on exceeding the time delayed short-circuit threshold tI> : press the # key, select YES using the ! and " keys, then confirm the selection using the # key. Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIo >> (earth fault)

LATCH t I>> ? YES

LATCH t Io>> ? YES

LATCH t Ii >> ? YES

Latching on exceeding the time-delayed threshold tIi >> (unbalance)

LATCH EQUA A ? YES

Latching on validation of equation A

LATCH EQUA B ? NO

Latching on validation of equation B

LATCH EQUA C ? NO

Latching on validation of equation C

LATCH EQUA D ? NO

Latching on validation of equation D

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 8.11 The SW SUPERVISION submenu AUTOMAT. CTRL

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 37/48

Press the ! and " keys to enter the AUTOMAT. CTRL menu

SW SUPERVISION

To move about in the SW SUPERVISION submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To switch on the circuit breaker operating time threshold function: press the # key, and select YES by using the ! and " keys. To confirm the selection, press the # key again Setting of the operating time threshold SW OPERATING TIME : from 50ms to 1s in steps of 50ms Switching on the threshold of the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker: select YES

SW OPERATING TIME ?

YES

SW OPERATING TIME= 150 ms

SW OPERATION NB ? YES

SW OPERATION NB = 150

Setting of the threshold of the number of operations : from 0 to 50000 in steps of 1

SAn? YES

Switching on the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker: select YES Setting of the threshold of the sum of amperes to the power n interrupted : from 106 to 4 000x106 in steps of 106 E6 means 106. Setting of the exponent n :1 or 2

SAn= 0 E6

n= 1

TRIP T = 0.1 s

Setting of TRIP T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s

CLOSE T = 0.1 s

Setting of CLOSE T: from 0.2 to 5 s in steps of 0.1 s

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 38/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

9.
9.1

RECORD MENU
The FAULT RECORD submenu RECORD Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.

FAULT RECORD

To move about in the FAULT RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the % and $ keys. 5 Displays the fault number. To display the information on one of the last 5 faults, press the # key, and select the number (1 to 5) by using the ! and " keys, then press the # key again to confirm the selection Displays the time of the fault

FAULT NUMBER

OCCUR FAULT HOUR 16 : 39 : 23 : 82

OCCUR FAULT DATE 01/09/98

Displays the date of the fault

ACTIVE SET GROUP

Displays the active configuration group (1 or 2) at the time of the fault

PHASE IN FAULT PHASE A

Displays the faulty phase or phases: phase A, phase B or phase C

FAULT DETECTED BY I>>

Displays the origin of the fault: here it is exceeding the instantaneous threshold I >>

MAGNITUDE

Displays the amplitude of the fault 1.917 kA

IA MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA

Displays the value of the current of phase A (IA) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

IB MAGNITUDE 1.997 kA

Displays the value of the current of phase B (IB) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220 IC MAGNITUDE 1.931 kA

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 39/48 Displays the value of the current of phase C (IC) at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

IN MAGNITUDE 0.03 A 9.2

Displays the value of the earth current IN at the time of the fault (true RMS value)

The DISTURB RECORD submenu RECORD Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.

DISTURB RECORD

To move about in the DISTURB RECORD submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter FAULT RECORD submenu, press the % and $ keys. 0.1 s Setting of the "pre-time" time : from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s

PRE-TIME =

POST-TIME = 0.1 s

Setting of the "post-time" time delay : from 0,1 to 3 s in steps of 0,1 s

DISTUR REC TRIG = ON INST.

Selection of the criterion for starting the disturbance recording : - on exceeding certain instantaneous thresholds (I>, Io> et Io>>) : ON INST. - on tripping of the n1 relay (trip output relay) : ON TRIP

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 40/48 9.3 The SW MONITORING submenu RECORD

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

Press the ! and " keys to enter the RECORD menu.

SW MONITORING

To move about in the SW MONITORING submenu, press the ! and " keys. To enter the other submenus, press the % and $ keys. To reset to zero the sum of the amperes to the power of n interrupted: press the & key

SA CLR ? = CL

S A IA = 0 E00

Displays the sum of the square amperes interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IA.

S A IB = 0 E00

Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IB. Displays the sum of the amperes to the power n interrupted by the circuit breaker for the current of phase IC. Displays the number of operations performed by the circuit breaker. To reset to zero: press the & key

S A IC = 0 E00

SW OPERATION NB = CLR ?=CL 0

SW OPERAT TIME = 100 ms

Displays the opening time of the circuit breaker.

NOTE:

If the user has set the exponent n to the value 1 in the SW MONITORING submenu, the term SA shall replace the term SA2 to indicate the sum of the amperes interrupted in place of the sum of the square amperes interrupted.

10.

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

OP PARAMETERS

CONFIGURATION

PASSWORD = **** CT RATIO Inputs: **** Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N EXT 1 ? EXT 2 ? MOTOR STOPPED ? MOTOR RUNNING ? SUCCESSFUL START ? Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N Y/N t RTD 4, 5, 6 ALARM ? t RTD 4, 5, 6 TRIP ? Y/N Y/N ALARM ? SEC PH = * t I0 > ? t I0 >> ? **** t Ii >> ? SEC E = * EXCES LONG START ? t Istall? LOCKED ROTOR ? EMERG RESTART ? FORBIDDEN START ? t RTD 1, 2, 3 ALARM ? t RTD 1, 2, 3 TRIP ? t I< ? t Ii > ? t I >> ? THERM OVERLOAD ? Thermist 1, 2 ? LED 5 / 6 / 7 / 8 CONFIGURATION INPUT PRIM PH = 54321 11111

CONFIG. SELECT

DATE FORMAT

MENUS CONTENT

TYPE =

P220-4

Change GROUP Input = EDGE

Date format = Private

REFERENCE = XXXX PRIM E =

SETTING GROUP 1

SOFTWARE VERSION 4.C =

DEFAULT DISPLAY IA RMS

FREQUENCY = 50 Hz

START DETECTION. 52 A + I

Active Group =

ANALOG. OUTPUT 0 - 20 mA

INPUT ST =

54321 00000

DATA TYPE ANALOG IA RMS

OUTPUT ST = PT100

54321 00000

RTD Type =

DATE

14/09/00

Thermist 1 Type = PTC

TIME

16 : 35 : 30

Thermist 2 Type = NTC

P220/EN HI/B43

Page 41/48

MiCOM P220 - Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Page 42/48

MEASUREMENTS TRIP STATISTICS COMMUNICATION

PROCESS

P220/EN HI/B43

IA RMS = 0.00 A 0% TOTAL TRIP NB 0 0 0 OPERATOR TRIP NB 0 0 THERM TRIP NB = 0 t I >> TRIP NB = 0 t I0>, t I0 >> TRIP NB = 0 t Ii>, t Ii >> TRIP NB = 0 t Istart TRIP NB = 0 t Istall TRIP NB = 0 Thermist 1 TRIP NB = 0 Thermist 2 TRIP NB = 0 EQUATION A TRIP NB = 0 EQUATION B TRIP NB = 0 EQUATION C TRIP NB = 0 EQUATION D TRIP NB = 0 STATISTICS CLR ? = CL THERMAL STATE = CLR ? = CL 0 % T before TH TRIP = 0s

% I FLC

COM. OK = YES DATA RATE = 19200 Bd

IB RMS = 0.00 A

IC RMS = 0.00 A

IN RMS = 0.00 A Temperature RTD 1 = C RTD 2 = C ...... RTD 6 = C

RTD 1 TRIP NB = RTD 2 TRIP NB = .......... RTD 6 TRIP NB =

PARITY = WITHOUT

I1 POSITIVE = 0.00 A

DATA BITS =

I2 NEGATIVE = 0.00 A PERMIT START NB 0 T before START 0s

STOP BITS =

1 RELAY ADDRESS = 1

Io ZERO = 0.00 A Last Start I = 0.0 A Last Start Time 0s MOTOR START NB CLR ? = CL 0 EMERG RESTART NB CLR ? = CL MOT OPERAT HOURS CLR ? = CL 0h

FREQUENCY = 0.0 Hz

MAX PH CURRENT = PROCESS 0.00 A

LOCKED ROTOR TP NB = 0 I < TRIP NB =

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

MiCOM P220 - Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

PROTECTION G1/G2 [46] UNBALANCE Ii> FUNCTION ? YES EXCES LONG START FUNCT ? YES t Istall = BLOCKED ROTOR FUNCT ? YES li> = 0.05 In t Istart = 14 s Istart DETECTION = 1.0 I

[49] THERMAL OVERLOAD [48] EXCES LONG START [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR I0> FUNCTION ? YES I0> = 0.002 Ion t li> = 0 ms 0 ms

[50/51] SHORTCIRCUIT

[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT

[37] LOSS OF LOAD I< FUNCTION ? YES I< =

THERMAL OVERLOAD YES FUNCTION ?

I>> FUNCTION ? YES

INHIBIT ? 1.0 In t I0 > = 10 ms

YES

I>> =

0.1 s

0.1 In t I< =

I > =

t I>> =

0.2 In

STALLED ROTOR ? YES

0.2 s T inhib =

Ke = I0>> FUNCTION ? YES I0>> = 0.002 Ion 0.2 In t I0 >> = 10 ms li>> =

li>> FUNCTION ? YES

Istall DETECTION = 1.0 I

50 ms

Te1 =

1 mn

LOCKED ROTOR AT START ? YES

Te2 =

1 mn

Tr =

1 mn

RTD INFLUENCE ? YES

ALARM ?

YES

ALARM =

20 %

FORBID START ? YES

P220/EN HI/B43

Page 43/48

FORBID START = 20 %

MiCOM 220 - Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY AUTOMAT. CTRL

Page 44/48

PROTECTION G1/G2 REACCEL AUTORIZ REACCEL AUTHORIZ FUNCT ? YES VOLT DIP DURAT Treacc = 0.2 s INPUT 3 = NONE INPUT 4 = NONE INPUT 5 = NONE EXT 1 = INPUTS

P220/EN HI/B43

[49/38] RTD SENSORS [66] START NUMBER START NB LIMITAT FUNCT ? YES Treference = 10 mn HOT START NB = 0 T betw 2 start = 1 mn TIME BETW START FUNCT ? YES

[49] THERMISTOR

MIN TIME BETW 2 START

RTD 1 FUNCTION ? YES YES

Thermistor 1 ?

RTD 1 ALARM = 0C

Thermist 1 = 0.1 k

t RTD 1 ALARM = 0.0 s YES

Thermistor 2 ?

RTD 1 TRIP = 0C

Thermist 2 = 0.1 k

COLD START NB = 0

0s EXT 2 =

T interdiction = 1 mn

0s EXT 3 =

t RTD 1 TRIP = 0.0 s t RTD 2 TRIP = 0.0 s ........

0s EXT 4 =

t RTD 6 TRIP= 0.0 s

0s

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

MiCOM 220 - Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY

AUTOMAT. CTRL

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

AND LOGIC EQUATION AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY AUX OUTPUT RLY EQU. A T operat = 0 mn THERM OV. 5 4 3 2 0000 ALARM 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000 I0 > 5432 0000 t I0 > 5432 0000 I0 >> 5432 0000 EQU. D T reset = 0 mn t I0 >> 5432 0000 t Ii> t Istall

THERM OV. D C B A 0000 t li>> Thermist 1 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 EQU. C T reset = 0 mn EQU. D T operat = 0 mn EQU. C T operat = 0 mn t I >> EQU. B T reset = 0 mn I >> EQU. B T operat = 0 mn FORBID. START EQU. A T reset = 0 mn DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 EXT 1 DCBA 0000 EXT 2 DCBA 0000 EXT 3 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 SUCCESS START EXT 4 Thermist 2

5432 0000 LOCKED ROTOR tI< 5432 0000 5432 0000 START NB LIMIT T betw 2 start t RTD 1 ALARM 5432 0000 5432 0000 5432 0000

ALARM EXCES LG START t Istall

DCBA 0000

FORBID START

DCBA 0000

I >> LOCKED ROTOR tI<

DCBA 0000

t I >>

DCBA 0000

I0 > START NB LIMIT T betw 2 Start t RTD 1 ALARM

DCBA 0000

t0>

DCBA 0000

I0 >>

DCBA 0000

5 0 5 0

4 0 4 0

32 00 32 00 5432 0000

t I0 >>

DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000 DCBA 0000

t RTD 1 TRIP t RTD 2 TRIP ....... t RTD 6 TRIP

t Ii>

DCBA 0000

5432 0000 t li>> 5432 0000 EXCES LG START 5432 0000

Thermist 1 Thermist 2

t RTD 1 TRIP t RTD 2 TRIP ...... t RTD 6 TRIP DCBA 0000

5432 0000 5432 0000 EXT 1 5432 0000

P220/EN HI/B43

Page 45/48

MiCOM P220 -Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Page 46/48

AUTOMAT. CTRL

P220/EN HI/B43

AUX OUTPUT RLY

LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS

TRIP OUTPUT RLY

LATCH TRIP ORDER

EXT 2 NO YES YES YES t I >> ? NO t I0 >? YES Thermist 1 ? YES Thermist 2 ? YES EXT 1 ? YES EXT 2 ? YES YES

5432 0000 SW OPER TIME SW OPER NB NO t I0 >> ? SAn NO t Ii > ? 5432 0000 Output 5 5432 0000 Output 4 5432 0000 Output 3 t RTD 1 TRIP t RTD 2 TRIP ....... t RTD 6 TRIP

t EQU. D

5432 0000

Output 2

THERM OVERLOAD ? YES

LATCH t I >> ? YES LATCH t I0 >> ? YES LATCH t Ii >> ? YES LATCH EQUA A ? YES

EXT 3

5432 0000

EXT 4

5432 0000

CLOSE ORDER Active Group 5 4 3 2 0000 t Ii >> ?

5432 0000

TRIP ORDER

5432 0000

YES

LATCH EQUA B ? YES YES LATCH EQUA C ? YES

ORDER 1

5432 0000 EXCES LONG ? START YES t Istall ?

ORDER 2

5432 0000

YES EQUATION A ? YES YES

LATCH EQUA D ? YES

SUCCESS START

5432 0000

t EQU. A

5432 0000

LOCKED ROTOR ? YES tI<?

EQUATION B ? YES EQUATION C ? YES YES EQUATION D ? YES

t EQU. B

5432 0000

t EQU. C

5432 0000

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

MiCOM P220 - Menu content

DEFAULT DISPLAY

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

AUTOMAT. CTRL

RECORD

SW SUPERVISION

FAULT RECORD
DISTURB RECORD PRE-TIME = 0.1 s

SW MONITORING

FAULT NUMBER 5
OCCUR FAULT HOUR 16:39:23:82 POST-TIME = 0.1 s OCCUR FAULT DATE 01/09/98 DISTUR REC TRIG = ON INST. ACTIVE SET GROUP 1

SW OPERATING TIME ? YES

SA CLR ? = CL S A IA = E06 S A IB = E06 S A IC = E06


SW OPERATION NB =

SW OPERATING TIME = 150 ms

SW OPERATION NB ? YES

SW OPERATION NB = 150

PHASE IN FAULT Phase A FAULT DETECTED BY I>> MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA IA MAGNITUDE 1.917 kA

CLR ? = CL

0
SW OPERAT TIME = 100 ms

SAn? YES

SAn= 14 E6

n= 1

IB MAGNITUDE 1.997 kA IC MAGNITUDE 1.931 kA IN MAGNITUDE 0.03 A

MiCOM P220 Menu content


Page 47/48

TRIP T = 200 ms

P220/EN HI/B43

CLOSE T = 200 ms

P220/EN HI/B43 Page 48/48

Technical Guide Menu of the HMI MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43

MODBUS COMMUNICATION

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 1/94

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.1.1 1.1.2 1.1.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.2 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.3.3 1.4 1.4.1 1.4.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.6 1.6.1 1.6.2 1.7 1.7.1 1.7.2 1.8 1.8.1 1.8.2 1.8.3 1.8.4 1.8.5 1.8.6 1.8.7

MODBUS PROTOCOL
MODBUS communication characteristics MODBUS network characteristics Parameters of the MODBUS connection Synchronisation of exchanges messages Message validity check Address of the MiCOM relays MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays Presentation of the MODBUS protocol Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay Messages validity check Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. Service request Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel Request to retrieve an index frame Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Request to retrieve a dedicated event Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data MiCOM P220 database organisation Description of the MODBUS application mapping Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 Page 4 : Remote controls Pages 5 and 6 : reserved

5
5 5 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 9 9 9 10 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 17 23 26 29 29

Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record 12

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 2/94 1.8.8 1.8.9 Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word Page 8 : Synchronisation

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 29 29 30 31 31 31 32 33 33 34 34 34

1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) 1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records 1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data 1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record 1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data 1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event 1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data 1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records 1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record 1.9 Description of the mapping format

1.8.17 Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel 33

2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.4.1 2.4.2 2.4.3 2.4.4 2.4.5 2.4.6 2.4.7 2.4.8 2.4.9 2.5 2.5.1 2.5.2 2.5.3 2.5.4 2.6

K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE


K-BUS K-Bus transmission layer K-Bus connection Auxiliary equipment Relay courier database Setting changes Systems integration data Address of the relay Measured values Status word Control status word Logic input status word Output relay status word Control information Protection Indication Measurement control Event extraction Automatic event extraction Event types Event format Manual record extraction Disturbance record extraction

49
49 49 49 50 50 50 50 50 51 51 51 51 51 52 52 54 54 54 54 55 55 55 56

2.4.10 Change of remote measurements

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 3/94

3. 4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.7 6.8 6.9

LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY COURIER DATABASES IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
Physical connection and link layer Initialisation Time synchronisation Spontaneous events General interrogation Cyclic measurements Commands Disturbance records Blocking of monitor direction

57 60 61 89
89 89 90 90 90 90 90 90 90

7.

IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES

91

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 4/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 5/94

1.

MODBUS PROTOCOL
The MiCOM P220 relay offers MODBUSTM RTU mode communication via a rear RS485 port.

1.1 1.1.1

MODBUS communication characteristics MODBUS network characteristics The MODBUS protocol is based on the master-slave principle with the MiCOM P220 relay as slave. The MODBUS protocol allows the master to read and to write one or several bits, one or several words and to remote the event logging data. The access to the network can be : either according to a query/response principle

Master Response Query Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave
P0211ENa

or according to a broadcast message sent from the master to all the slaves.
Master

Broadcast message

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave

Equipment Slave
P0212ENa

in that case : compulsory, the broadcast message is a writing order, the slaves return no response, the protocol is RTU mode. Each byte of the data frame is coded according to a hexadecimal base. At the end of each frame, two bytes of CRC16 validity checksum are applied on the whole of the frame content.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 6/94 1.1.2 Parameters of the MODBUS connection The different parameters of the MODBUS connection are as follows : Isolated two-point RS485 connection (2kV 50Hz). MODBUS line protocol in RTU mode.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

The baud rate can be configured by operator dialogue in the front panel of the relay : Baud rate 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400

Transmission mode of the configurable parameters by operator dialogue : Transmission mode 1 start / 8 bits / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 8 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 8 bits / 2 stop : total 11 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 1 stop : total 9 bits 1 start / 7 bits / even parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / odd parity / 1 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits 1 start / 7 bits / 2 stop : total 10 bits

1.1.3

Synchronisation of exchanges messages Any character received after a silence on the line with more or equal to a transmission time of 3 bytes is considered as a frame start.

1.1.4

Message validity check The validation of a trame is performed with a 16-bit cyclical redundancy check (CRC). The generator polynomial is : 1 + x + x15 + x16 = 1010 0000 0000 0001 binary = A001h

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.1.5 Address of the MiCOM relays

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 7/94

The address of the MiCOM relay on a same MODBUS network is situated between 1 and 255. The address 0 is reserved for the broadcast messages. 1.2 MODBUS functions of the MiCOM relays The MODBUS functions implemented on the MiCOM relays are : Function 1 or 2 : Reading of n bits Function 3 or 4 : Reading of n words Function 5 : Writing of 1 bit Function 6 : Writing of 1 word Function 7 : Fast reading of 8 bits Function 8 : Reading of the diagnosis counters Function 11 : Reading of the Event counter Function 15: Writing of n bits Function 16 : Writing of n words 1.3 Presentation of the MODBUS protocol MODBUS is a master-slave protocol whereby every exchange involves a master query and a slave response. 1.3.1 Frame size received by the MiCOM P220 relay Frame transmitted by the master (query) : Slave number 1 byte 0 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : Requested MODBUS function (1 to 16). Information : Contains the parameters of the selected function. CRC16 : Value of the CRC16 calculated by the master. NOTA: the MiCOM relay does not respond to globally broadcast frames sent out by the master. Function code 1 byte 1 to 10h Information n bytes CRC16 2 bytes

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 8/94 1.3.2 Format of frames sent by the MiCOM P220 relay Frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) : Slave number 1 byte 1 to FFh Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : Processed MODBUS function (1 to 16). Data : Contains the response data to master query. CRC16 : Value of the CRC16 calculated by the MiCOM relay. 1.3.3 Messages validity check Function code 1 byte 1 to 10h Data n bytes

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

CRC16 2 bytes

When the MiCOM relay receives a master query, it validates the frame : If the CRC is false, the frame is invalid. The MiCOM relay does not reply to the query. The master must retransmit its query. Excepting a broadcast message, this is the only case of non-reply by the MiCOM relay to a master query. If the CRC is correct but the MiCOM relay can not process the query, it sents to the master a exception response.

Exception frame sent by the MiCOM relay (response) : Slave number 1 byte 1 to 20h Slave number : The slave number is situated between 1 and 255. Function code : The function code returned by the MiCOM relay in the exception frame is the code in which the most significant bit (bit7) is forced to 1. Function code 1 byte 81h or 83h or 8Ah or 8Bh Error code 1 byte CRC16 2 bytes LSB ... MSB

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Error code :

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 9/94

Among the 8 exception codes of the MODBUS protocol, the MiCOM relay manages two of them : code 01 : Function code unauthorised or unknown. code 03 : A value of the data field is unauthorised (incorrect code). CRC16: The CRC16 value is calculated by the slave. 1.4 Modbus request definition used to retrieve the disturbance records To retrieve a disturbance record, the following requests must be done in the exact given order : 1. 2. (optional) : Send a request to know the number of disturbance records available in the saved RAM. To retrieve the data of one channel: 2a (compulsory) : Send a service request specifying the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. 2b (compulsory) : Send requests to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel as many time as needed. 2c (compulsory) : send a request to retrieve the index frame. Process the same operation (as described in the item 2) for each channel. Control of pages being read. Control of pages being written. Control of address in pages. Length of request messages.

3. 1.4.1

Request to know the number of available disturbance records in the Saved RAM. Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 3Dh 00 00 24h CRC xx............xx

This request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_NOK (0F) : NOTA: 1.4.2 Service request This request shall be send before to retrieve the sample data of a disturbance record channel. It allows to specify the record number and the channel number which have to be retrieved. It allows also to know the number of samples in the channel. Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Bh CRC xx............xx No record available. If there is less than 5 records available, the answer will contain zero value in the non-used words.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 10/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible : CODE_DEF_RAM (02) : CODE_EVT_NOK (03) : 1.4.3 Saved RAM failure. No disturbance record available in the saved RAM.

Request to retrieve the data of a disturbance record channel Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 1 to 7Dh CRC xx............xx

This request may be answered an error message. Two error codes are possible : CODE_DEP_DATA (04) : The requested sample number is superior than the number of samples in the specified channel. The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request.

CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : NOTA: 1.4.4

This type of request can retrieve up to125 words. A sample is coded on 1 word (16 bits).

Request to retrieve an index frame Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 22h 00 00 07h CRC xx............xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : CODE_SERV_NOK (05) : 1.5 The record number and the channel number have not been specified by a service request.

Modbus request definition used to retrieve the event records Two ways can be followed to retrieve an event record : Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated event.

1.5.1

Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge event Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 36h 00 00 09h CRC xx............xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA: An event is being written into the saved RAM. On event retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the event record acknowledgement : - a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On event retrieval, this event record is acknowledged.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 11/94

b) Non automatic event record acknowledgement on event retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On event retrieval, this event record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this event, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 13 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 1.5.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated event Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h Refer to mapping 00 09h CRC xx............xx

This event request may be answered an error message with the error code : EVT_EN_COURS_ECRIT (5) : NOTA: 1.6 An event is being written into the saved RAM. This event retrieval does not acknowledge this event.

Modbus request definition used to retrieve the fault records Two ways can be followed to retrieve a fault record : Send a request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record. Send a request to retrieve a dedicated fault record.

1.6.1

Request to retrieve the oldest non-acknowledge fault record Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx NOTA: 03h 3Eh 00 00 0Fh CRC xx............xx

On fault retrieval, two possibilities exist regarding the fault record acknowledgement: - a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval. - b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on event retrieval.

a) Automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 0. On fault retrieval, this fault record is acknowledged. b) Non automatic fault record acknowledgement on fault retrieval : The bit12 of the remote order frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. On fault retrieval, this fault record is not acknowledged. To acknowledge this fault, an other remote order shall be sent to the relay. The bit 14 of this frame (format F9 mapping address 0400h) shall be set to 1. 1.6.2 Request to retrieve a dedicated fault record Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx NOTA: 03h Refer to mapping 00 0Fh CRC xx............xx

This fault value retrieval does not acknowledge this fault record.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 12/94 1.7

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Modbus request definition used to retrieve the start-up current form record To retrieve the start-up current form record, process as described below : 1. 2. Send a request to know the number of current values stored into the saved RAM. Send a request to retrieve the start-up current from record data.

1.7.1

Request to know the number of current values stored into the saved memory Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx 03h 34H 00 00 03h CRC xx............xx

1.7.2

Request to retrieve the start-up current form record data Slave number Function code Word address Word number xx NOTA: 03h Refer to mapping 04 to 7Ch CRC xx............xx

The number of requested words shall be a 2 multiple number as the value of a start-up current from record sample is coded on 4 bytes. One page of the mapping can stored up to 248 words.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.8 1.8.1 MiCOM P220 database organisation Description of the MODBUS application mapping The MODBUS mapping contains 60 pages. Pages 0 to 8 : Contain the MiCOM P220 parameters.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 13/94

Pages 9 to 3Dh : Contain the data of the event records, data of the fault value records, data of the disturbance records and data of the start-up current form record. These pages are explained in the following way :
Page No Page 0 Page 1 Page 2 Page 3 Page 4 Page 5 Page 6 Page 7 Page 8 Pages 9h to 21h Page 22h Page content Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Remote settings for general parameters Remote settings for protection group number 1 Remote settings for protection group number 2 Remote controls Reserved page Reserved page MiCOM P220 relay status word Synchronisation Disturbance record data Index frame for the disturbance records Access Reading Reading & writing Reading & writing Reading & writing Writing Not accessible Not accessible Quick reading Writing Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading Reading

Pages 23h to Start-up current form record data 33h Page 34h Page 35h Page 36h Page 37h Index frame for the start-up current form record Event record data Data of the oldest event Fault value record data

Pages 38h to Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its 3Ch channel Page 3Dh Page 3Eh Number of available disturbance records Data of the oldest fault value record

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 14/94 1.8.2

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Page 0 : Information of product, remote signalling, remote measurements Access only for reading

Address 0000 0001 0002 0003 0004 0005 0006 to 000C 000D 000E 000F 0010 0011 0012 0013 0014 0015 0016 0017 0018 0019 001A 001B

Group Product informations

Description Description of the relay characters 1 and 2 Description of the relay characters 3 and 4 Description of the relay characters 5 and 6 Factory reference characters 1 and 2 Factory reference characters 3 and 4 Software version Reserved Active group Reserved Status of the MiCOM relay self-test

Values range 32 -127 32-127 32-127 32-127 32-127 10 - xx 1 to 2

Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

Unit

Format F10 F10 F10 F10 F10 F21 F1 F46

Default value

P2 20 AL ST

Remotesignaling

Logic inputs Logic datas Internal logics Output relays Output information: threshold I>> Output information: threshold I0> Output information: threshold I0>> Output information: I2 > Output information: I2 >> Output information : I< Thermal image Information :

0 to 31 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to 63 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

F12 F20 F22 F13 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F33 F36

Informations : EXT1, EXT2 0 to FFFF timers and AND logical gates Informations : Excessive long start/stalled rotor Informations : RTDs Number of available disturbance records Reserved Circuit breaker monitoring flag 0 to FFFF 0 to FFFF 0 to 5

001C 001D 001E 001F and 0020 0021

1 1 1

F34 F4 F55

F43

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 0022 0023 0024 0025 0026 0027 to 002F 0030 0032 0034 0036 0038 003A 003C Remotemeasurement Group Description Display alarm message : tI>> PHASE Display alarm message: tI< PHASE (Mini I) Display alarm messages Display alarm messages Display alarm messages Reserved Phase A current IA RMS Phase B current IB RMS Phase Current IC RMS Neutral current IN RMS Negative sequence I2 current (fundamental) Positive sequence I1 current (fundamental) Zero sequence current (fundamental) I0 (1/3 IN) 003E 003F and 0040 0041 to 004F 0050 0051 0052 0053 0054 0055 0056 0057 0058 0059 005A 005B 005C 005D 005E Process Frequency Phase current maximeter Reserved Load current as % I> Thermal status value Reserved Time before thermal trip RTD1 temperature value RTD2 temperature value RTD3 temperature value RTD4 temperature value RTD5 temperature value RTD6 temperature value Thermistor 1 value Thermistor 2 value Number of authorised start-ups Time before an authorised start-up Last start current value -400 to 2000 -400 to 2000 -400 to 2000 -400 to 2000 -400 to 2000 -400 to 2000 0 to 30000 0 to 30000 1 1 Seconds 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C 1/10 C Ohm Ohm seconds A/100 % % 4500 to 6500 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 A/100 Values range Step Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 15/94


Format F17 F17 F41 F41 F41 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 F3 Default value

1/100 Hz

F1 F1

F1 F1 F1 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F2 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 16/94


Address 005F 0060 0061 0062 0063 0064 0065 to 006F 0070 0071 0072 Trip Cause Statistics Group Description Reserved Last start time value Total motor start number Total emergency start number Total motor running hours RTDs status Reserved Reserved Total trip number (based on output relay No1) Operator trip number (logic inputs, pushbuttons or remote communication) Thermal trip number Earth fault trip number Short-circuit trip number seconds hours Values range Step Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format Default value

F1 F1 F1 F1 F45

F1 F1

0073 0074 0075

F1 F1 F1

0076 0077 0078 0079 007A 007B 007C 007D 007E 007F 0080 0081 0082 0083 0084 0085 0086 0087 to 008F

Excessive long start trip number Stalled rotor trip number (whilst running) Locked rotor trip number (at start) Loss of load trip number Unbalance trip number EQUATION A trip number EQUATION B trip number EQUATION C trip number EQUATION D trip number RTD1 trip number RTD2 trip number RTD3 trip number RTD4 trip number RTD5 trip number RTD6 trip number Thermistor 1 trip number Thermistor 2 trip number Reserved

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 0090 0091 0092 0093 0094 0095 0096 0097 0098 0099 009A to 009F Fourier Magnitude Fourier Angle Group Fourier Magnitude Description IA magnitude IB magnitude IC magnitude 3.I0 magnitude IA angle IB angle IC angle 3.I0 angle I1 magnitude I2 magnitude Reserved Values range Step Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 17/94


Format F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 Default value

1.8.3

Page 1 : Remote settings for general parameters Access for reading and writing

Address 0100 0101 0102 0103 0104 0105 0106 0107 0108 0109 010A 010B 10C 010D 010E 010F 0110 to 0113 0110 to 0113 0114

Group Remote-settings

Description Address Reserved Password : characters 1 and 2 Password : characters 3 and 4 Frequency Default displayed value Motor start-up detection criterion Analogue output type Data transmitted on the analogue output Active setting group User reference : characters 1 and 2 User reference : characters 3 and 4 Displayed fault record number Thermistor 1 type Thermistor 2 type RTDs type Reserved Reserved EDGE validation configuration for logic input

Values range 1 to 255 0x410x5a 0x410x5a 50-60 1-6 0-1 0 to 1 0 to 15 1-2 0x300x5a 0x300x5a 15 0-1 0-1 0-3

Step 1 1 1 10 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

Unit

Format F1 F10 F10 F1 F26 F5 F18 F7 F1 F10 F10 F39 F32 F32 F42

Default value 1 AA AA 50 1 0 0 0 1 MO T1 5 0 0 0

Hz -

0-31

F12

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 18/94


Address 0115 0116 to 0117 0118 0119 to 011F 0120 0121 0122 0123 0124 to 012F 0130 CT Ratio Group Description Latching Output Relays Reserved Configuration of Change 0-1 of active group Reserved Phases CT primary Phase CT secondary Earth CT primary Earth CT secondary Reserved Rear RS485 Data rate Communication Parity Data bits Stop bit 0 to 7 1 1 to 3000 1 to 5 1 to 3000 1 to 5 1 4 1 4 1 Values range 0-31 Step 1 Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F12 F47 Default value 0 1

F1 F1 F1 F1 F28

1 1 1 1 6= 19200 bauds 0= without 1=8 bits 0 =1 bit 1= Communication available

0131 0132 0133 0134

0 to 2 0 to 1 0 to 1

1 1 1 1

F29 F30 F31 F24

Communication available 0 to 1

0135 to 013C 013D 013E 013F 0141 0143 0145 0146 to 014F 0150 0152 0154 0156 0158 to 015F 0160 0161 0162 0163 to 16E 016F 0170 0171 Logic inputs allocation LED allocation CB supervision

Reserved CB operation number CB operating time S An IA (phase A) S An IB (phase B) S A IC (phase C) Date Format Reserved Led 5 Led 6 Led 7 Led 8 Reserved Logic input L3 Logic input L4 Logic input L5 Reserved Active Group: If Group 2 0-15 then Output =1 Auxiliary output Thermal overload : relays allocation THERM OV. Thermal alarm : ALARM 0 to 15 0 to 15 1 1 1 F14 F14 F14 0 0 0 0 to 2n 0 to 2n 0 to 2
n n

1 1 1 1 1 0 to 1 1 2n 2 2
n n

sec/100 An An A n

F1 F1 F3 F3 F3 F48 F19 F19 F19 F19 0=Private 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2n -

F15 F15 F15

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 0172 0173 0174 0175 0176 0177 0178 0179 017A Group Description Thermal start inhibition FORBID. START I0> (instantaneous) tI0> (time delayed) I0>> (instantaneous) tI0>> (time delayed) I>> (instantaneous) tI>> (time delayed) tI2> (time delayed) tI2>> (time delayed) Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 19/94


Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

017B 017C

Excessive long start : EXCES LG START Stalled rotor (whilst running): t Istall Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR Loss of load : t I< Start number limitation START NB LIMIT Time between 2 start: T betw 2 start t RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 TRIP t RTD2 ALARM t RTD2 TRIP t RTD3 ALARM t RTD3 TRIP t RTD4 ALARM t RTD4 TRIP t RTD5 ALARM t RTD5 TRIP t RTD6 ALARM t RTD6 TRIP Thermist 1 Thermist 2 EXT 1 EXT 2 CLOSE ORDER TRIP ORDER ORDER 1 ORDER 2 SUCCESS START

0 to 15 0 to 15

1 1

F14 F14

0 0

017D 017E 017F 0180 0181 0182 0183 0184 0185 0186 0187 0188 0189 018A 018B 018C 018D 018E 018F 0190 0191 0192 0193 0194 0195

0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 20/94


Address 0196 0197 0198 0199 019A 019B Group Description AND logical gate A: t EQU. A AND logical gate B: t EQU. B AND logical gate C t EQU. C AND logical gate D t EQU. D CB opening time : SW OPER TIME CB operation number : SW OPER NB Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0

019C 019D 019E 019F 01A0 01A1 01A2 01A3 01A4 01A5 01A6 01A7 01A8 01A9 01AA 01AB 01AC 01AD 01AE 01AF 01B0 01B1 01B2 01B3 01B4 AND logical gates allocation

Ampsn cut by CB : S An EXT 3 EXT 4 Reserved Thermal overload : THERM OV. Thermal alarm : ALARM Thermal start inhibition FORBID. START I0> tI0> (instantaneous) (time delayed)

0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 -

F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

I0>> ( instantaneous) tI0>> (time delayed) I>> (instantaneous) tI>> (time delayed) tI2> (time delayed) tI2>> (time delayed) Excessive long start : EXCES LG START Stalled rotor (running): t Istall Locked rotor (at start): LOCKED ROTOR Loss of load : t I< Start number limitation START NB LIMIT Time between 2 starts : T betw 2 start t RTD1 ALARM t RTD1 TRIP t RTD2 ALARM t RTD2 TRIP

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 01B5 01B6 01B7 01B8 01B9 01BA 01BB 01BC 01BD 01BE 01BF 01C0 01C1 01C2 01C3 01C4 to 01CF 01D0 01D1 01D2 01D3 01D4 01D5 01D6 01D7 01D8 01D9 01DA Group Description t RTD3 ALARM t RTD3 TRIP t RTD4 ALARM t RTD4 TRIP t RTD5 ALARM t RTD5 TRIP t RTD6 ALARM t RTD6 TRIP Thermist 1 Thermist 2 EXT 1 EXT 2 SUCESS START EXT 3 EXT 4 Reserved Automation Trip output relay Control functions assignment (relay 1) Trip output relay assignment (relay 1) 0 to 32767 0 to 127 2
n

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 21/94


Values range 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 0 to 15 Step 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Unit Format F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F14 F6 F6 minute minute minute F8 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 Default value 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 10 0 0 1 0 1 0

2n 2n 1 5 1 1 1 1 1 1

Latching of the trip output 0 to 127 relay (relay 1) Function : Start number limitation Reference time : Treference Hot start number Cold start number Start interdiction time : Tinterdiction Function : Time between 2 starts T betw 2 start Function : Reacceleration authorization Voltage dip duration : Treacc Function : CB Opening time SW OPERATING TIME threshold Function : CB Operation number SW OPERATION NB threshold 01 10 120 0 5 0-5 1-120 0 to 1 1 to 120 0-1

01DB 01DC 01DD 01DE 01DF

2-100 0-1 5 to 100 0-1 0-50000

1 1 1 1 1

1/10 sec 1/100 sec -

F1 F24 F1 F24 F1

2 0 5 0 0

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 22/94


Address 01E0 01E1 01E2 01E3 01E4 01E5 01E6 01E7 01E8 01E9 Disturbance record Logic inputs Group Description Ampsn cut by CB : S An SAn threshold n exponent value TRIP T duration value (remote order) CLOSE T duration value (remote order) EXT1 time delay EXT2 time delay Pre-time Post-time Disturbance record trigging criterion : DISTUR REC TRIG EXT3 time delay EXT4 time delay Reserved AND logical gate A operation time delay : EQU. A Toperat AND logical gate A reset time delay : EQU. A Treset AND logical gate B operation time delay : EQU. B Toperat AND logical gate B reset time delay : EQU. B Treset AND logical gate C operation time delay : EQU. C Toperat AND logical gate C reset time delay : EQU. C Treset AND logical gate D operation time delay : EQU. D Toperat AND logical gate D reset time delay : EQU. D Treset Reserved 0 to 36000 1 1/10 sec Values range 0-1 0 to 4000 1 to 2 20 to 500 20 to 500 0 to 20000 0 to 20000 1 to 30 1 to 30 01 1 5 5 1 1 1 1 1 Step 1 10e6 A^n 1 1/100 sec 1/100 sec 1/100 sec 1/100 sec 1/10 sec 1/10 sec Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F24 F3 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F40 Default value 0 0 1 20 20 0 0 1 1 0

01EA 01EB 01EC to 01EF 01F0

0 to 20000 0 to 20000

1 1

1/100 sec 1/100 sec

F1 F1 F1

0 0 0

01F1

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

01F2

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F3

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F4

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F5

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F6

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F7

0 to 36000

1/10 sec

F1

01F8 to 01FF

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.8.4 Page 2 : Remote settings for protection functions group No1 Access for reading and writing
Address 0200 0201 0202 0203 0204 0205 0206 0207 0208 0209 020A 020B 020C to 020F 0210 0211 0212 0213 to 021F 0220 0221 0222 0223 0224 0225 0226 to 022F 0230 0231 0232 0233 0234 0235 to 023F 0240 0241 0242 0243 Group Description Values range 0-1 0-1 20 to 150 0 to 10 1 to 180 1 to 360 1 to 999 0-1 0-1 20 to 100 0-1 20 to 100 Step 1 1 1/100 In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minute Minute Minute % % Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 23/94

Format F24 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F24 F1 F24 F1

Default value 0 0 20 3 1 1 1 0 0 20 0 20 -

Protection group Thermal overload 1 function Thermal inhibition at start : INHIBIT Thermal current threshold : I> Ke factor Thermal constant time Te1 Thermal constant time Te2 Cooling constant time Tr RTD1 influence : RTD1 INFLUENCE Thermal alarm function ALARM threshold Thermal start inhibition function FORBID START Reserved I>> function I>> threshold tI>> time delay Reserved I0> function I0> threshold tI0> time delay I0>> function I0>> threshold tI0>> time delay Reserved I2> function I2> threshold tI2> time delay I2>> function I2>> threshold Reserved Excessive long start function Istart detection threshold t Istart time delay Reserved

0-1 10 to 120

1 1

In/10 1/100 s 1/100 s 1/100 s 1/1000 In 1/100 s 1/1000 In 1/10 I Second

F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 -

0 10 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 50 4 0 200 0 0 10 1 -

0 to 10000 1 0-1 2 to 1000 0-1 2 to 1000 1 1 1 1

1/1000 I0n F1

0 to 10000 1

1/1000 I0n F1

0 to 10000 1 0-1 50 to 800 0-1 1 25 1

4 to 20000 1 200 to 800 50 0-1 10 to 50 1 to 200 1 5 1

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 24/94


Address 0244 0245 0246 0247 0248 0249 to 024F 0250 0251 0252 0253 0254 to 025F 0260 0261 0262 0263 0264 0265 0266 0267 0268 0269 026A 026B 026C 026D 026E 026F 0270 0271 0272 0273 0274 0275 0276 0277 0278 0279 027A 027B 027C 027D Group Description Blocked rotor function t Istall time delay Stalled rotor function Istall detection threshold Locked rotor at start function Reserved I< function I< threshold t I< time delay Tinhib inhibition time Reserved RTD1 function RTD1 ALARM threshold RTD1 TRIP threshold t RTD1 TRIP time delay RTD2 function RTD2 ALARM threshold RTD2 TRIP threshold t RTD2 TRIP time delay RTD3 function RTD3 ALARM threshold RTD3 TRIP threshold t RTD3 TRIP time delay RTD4 function RTD4 ALARM threshold RTD4 TRIP threshold t RTD4 TRIP time delay RTD5 function RTD5 ALARM threshold RTD5 TRIP threshold t RTD5 TRIP time delay RTD6 function RTD6 ALARM threshold RTD6 TRIP threshold t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0 1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec 0-1 10 to 100 2 to 1000 1 1 1 1/100 In 1/10 sec 1/100 sec Values range 0 1 1 600 0 1 10 to 50 0-1 Step 1 1 1 5 1 1/10 sec 1/10 I Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 Default value 0 1 0 10 0 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 10 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

5 to 30000 5

t RTD1 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD2 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD4 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD5 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 1000

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 027E 027F 0280 0281 0282 to 28F Group Description Thermistor 1 function Thermistor 1 threshold Thermistor 2 function Thermistor 2 threshold Reserved Values range 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 Step 1 1 1 1 1/10 k 1/10 k Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 25/94


Format F24 F1 F24 F1 Default value 0 1 0 1 -

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 26/94 1.8.5 Page 3 : Remote settings for protection functions group No2 Access for reading and writing
Address 0300 0301 0302 0303 0304 0305 0306 0307 0308 0309 030A 030B 030C to 030F 0310 0311 0312 0313 to 031F 0320 0321 0322 0323 0324 0325 0326 to 032F 0330 0331 0332 0333 0334 0335 to 033F 0340 0341 0342 0343 Group Description Values range 0-1 0-1 20 to 150 0 to 10 1 to 180 1 to 360 1 to 999 0-1 0-1 20 to 100 0-1 20 to 100 Step 1 1 Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Format F24 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F24 F1 F24 F1

Default value 0 0 20 3 1 1 1 0 0 20 0 20 -

Protection group Thermal overload 2 function Thermal inhibition at start : INHIBIT Thermal current threshold : I> Ke factor Thermal constant time Te1 Thermal constant time Te2 Cooling constant time Tr RTD1 influence : RTD1 INFLUENCE Thermal alarm function ALARM threshold Thermal start inhibition function FORBID START Reserved I>> function I>> threshold tI>> time delay Reserved I0> function I0> threshold tI0> time delay I0>> function I0>> threshold tI0>> time delay Reserved I2> function I2> threshold tI2> time delay I2>> function I2>> threshold Reserved Excessive long start function Istart detection threshold t Istart time delay Reserved

1/10 0 In 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Minute Minute Minute % %

0-1 10 to 120 0 to 10000 0-1 2 to 1000 0 to 10000 0-1 2 to 1000 0 to 10000 0-1 50 to 800 4 to 20000 0-1 200 to 800 0-1 10 to 50 1 to 200

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 25 1 1 50 1 5 1

In/10 1/100 s 1/100 s 1/100 s 1/1000 In 1/100 s 1/1000 In 1/10 I Second

F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 -

0 10 0 0 2 0 0 2 0 0 50 4 0 200 0 0 10 1 -

1/1000 I0n F1

1/1000 I0n F1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Address 0344 0345 0346 0347 0348 0349 to 034F 0350 0351 0352 0353 0354 to 035F 0360 0361 0362 0363 0364 0365 0366 0367 0368 0369 036A 036B 036C 036D 036E 036F 0370 0371 0372 0373 0374 0375 0376 0377 0378 0379 037A 037B 037C 037D Group Description Blocked rotor function t Istall time delay Stalled rotor function Istall detection threshold Locked rotor at start function Reserved I< function I< threshold t I< time delay Tinhib inhibition time Reserved RTD1 function RTD1 ALARM threshold RTD1 TRIP threshold t RTD1 TRIP time delay RTD2 function RTD2 ALARM threshold RTD2 TRIP threshold t RTD2 TRIP time delay RTD3 function RTD3 ALARM threshold RTD3 TRIP threshold t RTD3 TRIP time delay RTD4 function RTD4 ALARM threshold RTD4 TRIP threshold t RTD4 TRIP time delay RTD5 function RTD5 ALARM threshold RTD5 TRIP threshold t RTD5 TRIP time delay RTD6 function RTD6 ALARM threshold RTD6 TRIP threshold t RTD6 TRIP time delay 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0 1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 0-1 0-200 0-200 0 to 1000 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec C 1/10 sec 0-1 10 to 100 2 to 1000 5 to 30000 1 1 1 5 1/100 In 1/10 sec Values range 0 1 1 600 0 1 10 to 50 0-1 Step 1 1 1 5 1 1/10 sec 1/10 I Unit

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 27/94


Format F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 Default value 0 1 0 10 0 F24 F1 F24 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 F24 F1 F1 F1 F1 0 10 2 5 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

1/100 sec

t RTD1 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD2 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD3 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD4 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD5 ALARM time delay 0 to 1000

t RTD6 ALARM time delay 0 1000

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 28/94


Address 037E 037F 0380 0381 0382 to 038F Group Description Thermistor 1 function Thermistor 1 threshold Thermistor 2 function Thermistor 2 threshold Reserved Values range 0-1 1-300 0-1 1-300 Step 1 1 1 1 1/10 k 1/10 k Unit

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F24 F1 F24 F1 Default value 0 1 0 1 -

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.8.6 Page 4 : Remote controls Access in writing Address 0400 1.8.7 1.8.8 Group Remote control Description

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 29/94

Values Step Unit Format range F9

Default value 0

Remote control word 1 0 to 31 1

Pages 5 and 6 : reserved Page 7 : MiCOM P220 relay status word Access for quick reading

Address 0700 1.8.9

Group Quick reading byte

Description Quick reading byte

Values Step Unit Format range 1 F23

Default value 0

Page 8 : Synchronisation Access in writing. The format of the clock synchronisation is coded on 8 bytes (4 words). Clock @page 8 8 8 8 8 8 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 - 12 1 - 31 0 - 23 0 - 59 0 - 59999 byte number Value range Year Month Day Hour Minute ms Unit

Year LSB + MSB Months Days Hours Minutes ms LSB + MSB

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 30/94 1.8.10 Page 9 to 21h : Disturbance record data (25 pages) Access in reading. Each page of the mapping contains 250 words.
Address 0900 to 09FAh 0A00 to 0AFAh 0B00 to 0BFAh 0C00 to 0CFAh 0D00 to 0DFAh 0E00 to 0EFAh 0F00 to 0FFAh 1000 to 10FAh 1100 to 11FAh 1200 to 12FAh 1300 to 13FAh 1400 to 14FAh 1500 to 15FAh 1600 to 16FAh 1700 to 17FAh 1800 to 18FAh 1900 to 19FAh 1A00 to 1AFAh 1B00 to 1BFAh 1C00 to 1CFAh 1D00 to 1DFAh 1E00 to 1EFAh 1F00 to 1FFAh 2000 to 20FAh 2100 to 21FAh Contents 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data 250 words of disturbance record data

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Format F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58 F58

NOTA:

The above disturbance record data pages of the mapping contains the data for only one record channel.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.8.11 Page 22h : Index frame for the disturbance records Access in reading.
Address 2200h Contents Index frame for the disturbance records

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 31/94

Format F50

1.8.12 Page 23 to 33h : Start-up current form record data Access in reading.
Address 2300 to 23F8h 2400 to 24F8h 2500 to 25F8h 2600 to 26F8h 2700 to 27F8h 2800 to 28F8h 2900 to 29F8h 2A00 to 2AF8h 2B00 to 2BF8h 2C00 to 2CF8h 2D00 to 2DF8h 2E00 to 2EF8h 2F00 to 2FF8h 3000 to 30F8h 3100 to 31F8h 3200 to 32F8h 3300 to 3320h 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 124 values 16 values Contents Format

1.8.13 Page 34h : Index frame for the start-up current form record Access in reading.
Address 3400h Contents Number of available values of the start-up current form record F51 Format

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 32/94 1.8.14 Page 35h : Event record data Access in reading.
Address 3500h 3501h 3502h 3503h 3504h 3505h 3506h 3507h 3508h 3509h 350Ah 350Bh 350Ch 350Dh 350Eh 350Fh 3510h 3511h 3512h 3513h 3514h 3515h 3516h 3517h 3518h Contents EVENT n1 EVENT n2 EVENT n3 EVENT n4 EVENT n5 EVENT n6 EVENT n7 EVENT n8 EVENT n9 EVENT n10 EVENT n11 EVENT n12 EVENT n13 EVENT n14 EVENT n15 EVENT n16 EVENT n17 EVENT n18 EVENT n19 EVENT n20 EVENT n21 EVENT n22 EVENT n23 EVENT n24 EVENT n25 Format F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 Address 3519h 351Ah 351Bh 351Ch 351Dh 351Eh 351Fh 3520h 3521h 3522h 3523h 3524h 3525h 3526h 3527h 3528h 3529h 352Ah 352Bh 352Ch 352Dh 352Eh 352Fh 3530h 3531h Contents EVENT n26 EVENT n27 EVENT n28 EVENT n29 EVENT n30 EVENT n31 EVENT n32 EVENT n33 EVENT n34 EVENT n35 EVENT n36 EVENT n37 EVENT n38 EVENT n39 EVENT n40 EVENT n41 EVENT n42 EVENT n43 EVENT n44 EVENT n45 EVENT n46 EVENT n47 EVENT n48 EVENT n49 EVENT n50 Format F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 Address 3532h 3533h 3534h 3535h 3536h 3537h 3538h 3539h 353Ah 353Bh 353Ch 353Dh 353Eh 353Fh 3540h 3541h 3542h 3543h 3544h 3545h 3546h 3547h 3548h 3549h 354Ah

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Contents EVENT n51 EVENT n52 EVENT n53 EVENT n54 EVENT n55 EVENT n56 EVENT n57 EVENT n58 EVENT n59 EVENT n60 EVENT n61 EVENT n62 EVENT n63 EVENT n64 EVENT n65 EVENT n66 EVENT n67 EVENT n68 EVENT n69 EVENT n70 EVENT n71 EVENT n72 EVENT n73 EVENT n74 EVENT n75

Format F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52 F52

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 1.8.15 Page 36h : Data of the oldest event Access in reading.
Address 3600h Contents Data of the oldest event

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 33/94

Format F52

1.8.16 Page 37h : Fault value record data Access in reading.


Address 3700h 3701h 3702h 3703h 3704h Contents Data of the fault value record n1 Data of the fault value record n2 Data of the fault value record n3 Data of the fault value record n4 Data of the fault value record n5 F53 F53 F53 F53 F53 Format

1.8.17 Pages 38h 3Ch : Selection of the disturbance record and selection of its channel Access in reading.
Address 3800h 3801h 3802h 3803h 3804h 3805h 3900h 3901h 3902h 3903h 3904h 3905h 3A00h 3A01h 3A02h 3A03h 3A04h 3A05h 3B00h 3B01h 3B02h 3B03h 3B04h 3B05h Disturbance record number 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 4 Channel I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 Format

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 34/94


Address 3C00h 3C01h 3C02h 3C03h 3C04h 3C05h Disturbance record number 5 5 5 5 5 5 Channel I A (phase A current) I B (phase B current) I C (phase C current) I N (neutral current) Frequency Logic inputs and logic outputs

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Format F54 F54 F54 F54 F54 F54

1.8.18 Page 3Dh : Number of available disturbance records Access in reading.


Address 3D00h Contents Number of available disturbance records F55 Format

1.8.19 Page 3Eh : Data of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Access in reading.
Address 3E00h Contents Data of the oldest fault value record F53 Format

1.9

Description of the mapping format


CODE DESCRIPTION unsigned integer numerical data 1 65535 signed integer numerical data 32768 to +32767 unsigned Long integer numerical data 0 to 4294967925 Unsigned integer RTD/thermistor monitoring function status Bit 0 : t RTD1 ALARM signal or Thermist1 signal Bit 1 : t RTD1 TRIP signal or Thermist2 signal Bit 2 : t RTD2 ALARM signal Bit 3 : t RTD2 TRIP signal Bit 4 : t RTD3 ALARM signal Bit 5 : t RTD3 TRIP signal Bit 6 : t RTD4 ALARM signal Bit 7 : t RTD4 TRIP signal Bit 8 : t RTD5 ALARM signal Bit 9 : t RTD5 TRIP signal Bit 10 : t RTD6 ALARM signal Bit 11 : t RTD6 TRIP signal Bits 13 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Motor start-up detection criterion Bit 0 : Closing of the CB (52A) Bit 1 : Closing of the CB and overshoot of the Istart current threshold (52A + Istart)

F1 F2 F3 F4

F5

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


CODE F6 DESCRIPTION Unsigned long : Trip output relay assignment (relay n1) bit 0 : tI>> bit 1 : tI0> Bit 2 : tI0>> Bit 3 : tI2> Bit 4 : tI< (loss of load) Bit 5 : THERM OVERLOAD (Thermal overload) Bit 6 : EXCES LONG START (Excessive long start) Bit 7 : t Istall (Stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 8 : LOCKED ROTOR (locked rotor at start) Bit 9 : t RTD1 TRIP or Thermist1 Bit 10 : t RTD2 TRIP or Thermist2 Bit 11 : t RTD3 TRIP Bit 12 : t RTD4 TRIP Bit 13 : t RTD5 TRIP Bit 14 : t RTD6 TRIP Bit 0 : t I2>> Bit 1 : EXT 1> Bit 2 : EXT 2> Bit 3 : Equation Bit 4 : Equation Bit 5 : Equation Bit 6 : Equation

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 35/94

F6

A B C D

( AND logical gate A) ( AND logical gate B) ( AND logical gate C) ( AND logical gate D)

F7

Unsigned integer : Data transmitted on the analogue output 0 : IA RMS 1 : IB RMS 2 : IC RMS 3 : IN RMS 4 : THERM ST (thermal state) 5 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current) 6 : Tbef Start (time before a permitted start) 7 : Tbef Trip (time before a thermal trip) 8 : TC RTD1 9 : TC RTD2 10 : TC RTD3 11 : TC RTD4 12 : TC RTD5 13 : TC RTD6 Unsigned integer : Latching of the trip output relay (relay n1) Bit 0 : tI>> Bit 1 : tI0>> Bit 2 : tI2>> Bit 3 : Equation A Bit 4 : Equation B Bit 5 : Equation C Bit 6 : Equation D Bits 7 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Remote order Bit 0 : Remote delocking of the trip output relay (relay n1) Bit 1 : Remote alarm acknowledgement Bit 2 : Remote TRIP ORDER Bit 3 : Remote CLOSE ORDER Bit 4 : Remote EMERGENCY START Bit 5 : Remote order to change of active setting group Bit 6 : Remote ORDER 1 Bit 7 : Remote ORDER 2 Bit 8 : Remote trigging of disturbance record Bit 9 : Remote maintenance mode enabling order Bit 10 : Remote maintenance mode disabling order Bit 11 : Reserved Bit 12 : Non automatic event/fault record acknowledgement on record retrieval Bit 13 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged event record Bit 14 : Remote acknowledgement of the oldest non-acknowledged fault record Bit 15 : Remote acknowledgement of the RAM memory error alarm

F8

F9

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 36/94


CODE F10 ASCII characters 32 127 = ASCII character1 32 127 = ASCII character 2 Unsigned integer : reserved Unsigned integer : Logic inputs status Bit 0 : Logic input 1 (CB/contactor status : 52a) Bit 1 : Logic input 2 (speed switch input) Bit 2 : Logic input 3 Bit 3 : Logic input 4 Bit 4 : Logic input 5 Unsigned integer : Output relays status Bit 0 : Output relay 1 (trip output relay) Bit 1 : Output relay 2 Bit 2 : Output relay 3 Bit 3 : Output relay 4 Bit 4 : Output relay 5 Bit 5 : Watchdog relay Unsigned integer : Auxiliary output relays allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to relay 2 Bit 1 : Allocation to relay 3 Bit 2 : Allocation to relay 4 Bit 3 : Allocation to relay 5 Bits 4 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : AND logical gates allocation Bit 0 : Allocation to equation A Bit 1 : Allocation to equation B Bit 2 : Allocation to equation C Bit 3 : Allocation to equation D Bits 4 to 15 : reserved DESCRIPTION

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

F11 F12

F13

F14

F14

F15

Unsigned integer :Logic inputs allocation. Bit 0 : EMERG ST (emergency start) Bit 1 : SET GROUP (change from one protection setting group to another) Bit 2 : VOLT. DIP (voltage dip re acceleration authorisation) Bit 3 : DIST TRIG (trigging of a disturbance recording) Bit 4 : EXT RESET (external reset) Bit 5 : EXT 1 (auxiliary 1 timer) Bit 6 : EXT 2 (auxiliary 2 timer) Bit 7 : EXT 3 (auxiliary 3 timer) Bit 8 : EXT 4 (auxiliary 4 timer) Bits 9 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Earth fault and unbalance protection information Bits 0 to 4: reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal (I0> or I0>>) bit 6 : Time delayed signal (tI0> or tI0>> or tI2> or tI2>>) Bits 7 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Short-circuit and loss of load protection information Bit 0 : reserved Bit 1 : Phase A signal , overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 2 : Phase B signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 3 : Phase C signal, overshoot of the I>> threshold Bit 4 : reserved Bit 5 : Instantaneous signal I>> Bit 6 : Time delayed signal tI>> or tI< Bits 7 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Analogue output type 0 : 4-20 mA 1 : 0-20 mA

F16

F17

F18

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


CODE F19 DESCRIPTION Unsigned long : LED allocation Bit 0 : ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 2 : tI0> Bit 3 : tI0>> Bit 4 : t I >> Bit 5 : tI2> Bit 6 : tI2>> Bit 7 : tI< Bit 8 : EXCES LONG START Bit 9 : t Istall (stalled rotor whilst running) Bit 10 : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 11 : EMERG RESTART (emergency restart) Bit 12 : FORBIDDEN START Bit 13 : t RTD1,2,3 ALARM Bit 14 : t RTD1,2,3 TRIP Bit 15 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 ALARM Bit 16 : t RTD4 ,5 ,6 TRIP Bit 17 : Thermist1, 2 Bit 18 : EXT 1 Bit 19 : EXT 2 Bit 20 : MOTOR STOPPED Bit 21 : MOTOR RUNNING Bit 22 : SUCCESSFUL START Bit 23 to 31 : reserved

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 37/94

F20

Unsigned integer : Status of the information assigned to the logic inputs Bit 0 : Emergency start Bit 1 : Change from one protection setting group to another Bit 2 : Voltage dip Bit 3 : CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) : open = 0 close = 1 Bit 4 : Trigging of a disturbance recording Bit 5 : Speed switch signal Bit 6 : External reset Bit 7 : Auxiliary timer EXT 1 Bit 8 : Auxiliary timer EXT 2 Bit 9 : Auxiliary timer EXT 3 Bit 10 : Auxiliary timer EXT 4 Bits 11 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Software version most significant digit : software version number lost significant digit : software version letter 10 : 1.A version 11 : 1.B version 20 : 2.A version 32 : 3.C version 41 : 4.B version Unsigned integer : Internal logics Bit 0 : Trip output relay latched (relay n1) Bit 1 : reserved Unsigned integer : Quick reading byte Bit 0 : General MiCOM relay status Bit 1 : Minor relay failure Bit 2 : Presence of a non-acknowledged event record Bit 3 : Clock synchronisation status Bit 4 : Presence of a non-acknowledged disturbance record Bit 5 : Presence of a non-acknowledged fault record Bit 6 to 15 : reserved 0 : Function in service 1 : Function out of service 2 : ASCII characters

F21

F22

F23

F24 F25

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 38/94


CODE F26 DESCRIPTION

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

F27 F28

F29

F30 F31 F32 F33

F34

Default displayed value 1 : IA RMS 2 : IB RMS 3 : IC RMS 4 : I0 RMS 5 : THERM ST (Thermal state) 6 : % I LOAD (load in % of full load current) Reserved Unsigned integer : Baudrate 0 : 300 1 : 600 2 : 1200 3 : 2400 4 : 4800 5 : 9600 6 : 19200 7 : 38400 Unsigned integer : parity 0 : Without 1 : Even 2 : Odd Unsigned integer : Data bits 0 : 7 data bits 1 : 8 data bits Unsigned integer : Stop bit 0 : 1 stop bit 1 : 2 stop bits Unsigned integer : Thermistor type 0 : PTC 1 : NTC Unsigned integer : Thermal image information Bit 0 : ALARM signal (thermal alarm) Bit 1 : THERM OV. signal (thermal overload) Bit 2: FORBID START signal (prohibited start due to thermal criteria) Bits 3 to 15 : reserved Unsigned integer : Start sequence and stalled/locked rotor information Bit 0 : Start sequence in progress signal Bit 1 : Successful start signal Bit 2 : Excessive long start signal Bit 3 : Stalled rotor whilst running signal Bit 4 : Locked rotor at start signal Bit 5 : Overshoot of the permitted cold starts number signal Bit 6 : Overshoot of the permitted hot starts number signal Bit 7 : Limitation of the starts number signal Bit 8 : Minimum time between two starts signal Bit 9 : Prohibiting start signal Bit 10 : Reserved Bit 11 : Re-acceleration phase in progress signal Bit 12 : Reserved Bit 13 : Overshoot of the Istall threshold signal Bit 14 : Motor running signal Bit 15 : Reserved Reserved Unsigned integer : EXT1EXT4 timers and AND logical gates information Bit 0 : EXT1 timer signal Bit 1 : EXT2 timer signal Bit 2 : Equation A signal Bit 3 : Equation B signal Bit 4 : Equation C signal Bit 5 : Equation D signal Bit 6 : reserved Bit 7 : EXT3 timer signal Bit 8 : EXT4 timer signal Bits 9 to 15 : reserved

F35 F36

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


CODE F37 F38 F39 Reserved Reserved Unsigned integer : Displayed fault record number 0 : reserved 1 : Fault record n1 2 : Fault record n2 3 : Fault record n3 4 : Fault record n4 5 : Fault record n5 DESCRIPTION

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 39/94

F40

Disturbance record trigging criterion 0 : ON INST : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, I0> or I0>>) 1 : ON TRIP : Relay n1 operation (trip output relay operation) Display alarm message Bit 0 a : TH OVERLOAD (thermal overload) Bit 1 a : tIo> Bit 2 a : tIo>> Bit 3 a : tIi> Bit 4 a : tIi>> Bit 5 a : LONG START tIstart Bit 6 a : MECHAN JAM tIstall (whilst running) Bit 7 a : LOCKED ROTOR (at start) Bit 8 a : t RTD 1 TRIP Bit 9 a : t RTD 2 TRIP Bit 10 a : t RTD 3 TRIP Bit 11 a : t RTD 4 TRIP Bit 12 a : t RTD 5 TRIP Bit 13 a : t RTD 6 TRIP Bit 14 a : Thermist 1 Bit 15 a : Thermist 2 Bit 0 b : EXT 1 Bit 1 b : EXT 2 Bit 2 b : EQUATION A Bit 3 b : EQUATION B Bit 4 b : EQUATION C Bit 5 b : EQUATION D Bit 6 b : ALARM (thermal alarm) Bit 7 b : t RTD 1 ALARM or START Bit 8 b : t RTD 2 ALARM or START Bit 9 b : t RTD 3 ALARM or START Bit 10 b : t RTD 4 ALARM or START Bit 11 b : t RTD 5 ALARM or START Bit 12 b : t RTD 6 ALARM or START Bit 13 b : FORBIDDEN START Bit 14 b : START NB LIMIT Bit 15 b : T between 2 start Bit 0 c : RE-ACCELER AUTHOR Bit 1 c : OPERATING TIME SW (CB operating time) Bit 2 c : OPERTION NB SW (CB operating time) Bit 3 c : SA2n ( Ampsn cut by CB) RTD type 0 : Pt100 type 1 : Ni 120 type 2 : Ni 100 type 3 : Cu 10 type Circuit breaker monitoring flag Bit 0 : CB operating time signal Bit 1 : CB operation number signal Bit 2 : Ampsn cut by CB signal Reserved

F41

F41

F41

F42

F43

F44

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 40/94


CODE F45 DESCRIPTION RDT status Bit 0 : RTD1 failure or thermistance 1 failure Bit 1 : RTD2 failure or thermistance 2 failure Bit 2 : RTD3 failure Bit 3 : RTD4 failure Bit 4 : RTD5 failure Bit 5 : RTD6 failure Bit 6 : RTD board error Unsigned integer : Status of the MiCOM relay selftest Bit 0 : Analogue output error Bit 1 : Communication error Bit 2 : EEPROM memory error Bit 3 : Analogue signals acquisition error Bit 4 : Internal clock error Bit 5 : EEPROM calibration error Bit 6 : RAM memory error Bit 7 : RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit) Bit 8 to 15 : reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

F46

F47 F48 F49 F50

1st word : Disturbance record number 2nd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Disturbance recording end time (sec)..msb (most significant bit) 4th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Disturbance recording end time (ms)..msb (most significant bit) 6th word :Cause of the disturbance record trigging 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 7th word : Frequency 1st word : Number of available current values of the start-up current form record 2nd word : Address of the last page containing significant record data 3rd word : Word number contained in the last page (containing significant record data) 1st word : event type : Refer to format F56 2nd word : associated value type : Refer to format F56 3rd word : mapping address of the associated value 4th word : reserved 5th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994lsb 6th word : event occurrence date (second) : number of seconds since the 01/01/1994..msb 7th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 8th word : event occurrence date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 9th word: acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged event ; 1 = acknowledged event) 1st word : Fault record number 2nd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.lsb (low significant bit) 3rd word : Fault date (sec) : second number since 01/01/1994.msb (most significant bit) 4th word : Fault date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 5th word : Fault date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 6th word : Fault date (season) : (0 = winter,1 = summer, 2 = non defined) 7th word : Active setting group while the fault occurrence : (1 or 2) 8th word :Faulty phase : ( 0 =none, 1 = phase A, 2 = phase B, 3 = phase C, 4 = phases A-B, 5 = phases AC, 6 = phases B-C, 7 = phases A-B-C, 8 = earth) 9th word : Cause of the fault record : refer to format F57 10th word : Fault value magnitude (fundamental value) : refer to format F59 11th word : Phase A current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 12th word : Phase B current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 13th word : Phase C current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 14th word : Earth current magnitude (True RMS value) : refer to format F59 15th word : Acknowledgement : (0 = non acknowledged fault record; 1 = acknowledged fault record)

F51

F52

F53

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


CODE F54 DESCRIPTION

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 41/94

1st word : Samples number containing in the mapping 2nd word : Pre-time sample number 3rd word : Post-time sample number 4th word : Primary phase CT value 5th word : Secondary phase CT value 6th word : Primary earth CT value 7th word : Secondary earth CT value 8th word : Ratio of the internal phase CT 9th word : Ratio of the internal earth CT 10th word : Address of the last page containing samples 11th word : Word number contained in the last page (containing samples) 1st word : Number of disturbance record available 2nd word : Oldest disturbance record number 3rd word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit) 4th word : Oldest disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit) 5th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 6th word : Oldest disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 7th word : Cause of the oldest disturbance record : 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 8th word : Acknowledgement 9th word : Previous disturbance record number 10th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..lsb (low significant bit) 11th word : Previous disturbance record date (sec) ..msb (most significant bit) 12th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..lsb (low significant bit) 13th word : Previous disturbance record date (ms) ..msb (most significant bit) 14th word : Cause of the previous disturbance record : 1 : Relay n1 operation 2 : Overshoot of a current threshold (I>>, Io> or Io>>) 3 : Remote trig 4 : Trig order received through a logic input 15th word : Acknowledgement and so on regarding the other disturbance records.

F55

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 42/94


Code F56 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 "No EVENT" "REMOTE CLOSING" "REMOTE TRIPPING" DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING SETTING CHANGE "I >>" "I0 >" (instantaneous signal) (instantaneous signal) Event type

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Associated value type F9 F9 F9 MODBUS address of the modified value F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F33 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F33 F33 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F34 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36

"I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) "I2 >" (instantaneous signal)

"I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) "I <" (instantaneous signal)

"THERMAL ALARM" "t RTD1 ALARM" "t RTD2 ALARM" "t RTD3 ALARM" "t RTD4 ALARM" "t RTD5 ALARM" "t RTD6 ALARM" "THERMAL OVERLOAD" "FORBIDDEN START" "t I >>" "t I0 >" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)

"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I2 >" (time delayed signal)

"t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I <" (time delayed signal)

"REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS" "EMERGENCY START" "START-UP DETECTION" "MOTOR HALTED" "EXCESSIVE START TIME" "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "START NUMBER LIMITATION" "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS" "EXT 1" "EXT 2" "EQUATION A" "EQUATION B" "EQUATION C" "EQUATION D"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Code F56 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 "t RTD1 TRIP" "t RTD2 TRIP" "t RTD3 TRIP" "t RTD4 TRIP" "t RTD5 TRIP" "t RTD6 TRIP" "THERMISTOR 1" "THERMISTOR 2" "CB OPERATING TIME ALARM" "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" "CB SAn ALARM" "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" "TRIPPING : t I >>" "TRIPPING : t I0 >" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) Event type

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 43/94


Associated value type F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F43 F43 F43 F33 F17 F16 F16 F16 F16 F17 F34 F34 F34 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36 F36 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F4 F12 F46 F46

"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "TRIPPING : t I2 >" "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" " TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "TRIPPING : EXT 1" "TRIPPING : EXT 2" "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD2 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD3 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD4 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD5 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD6 TRIP" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE "MINOR RELAY FAILURE"

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 44/94


Code F56 83 84 85 Event type "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" "EXT 3" "EXT 4"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Associated value type F13 F36 F36

NOTE:

- The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. - On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . - On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 .
Fault origin

Code F57 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 " NO FAULT " REMOTE TRIPPING" " TRIPPING : t I >>" " TRIPPING :t I0 >" " TRIPPING :t I2 >" " TRIPPING :t I2 >>" " TRIPPING :t I <"

(time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING :t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

" TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE LONG START " " TRIPPING :STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING " " TRIPPING :LOCKED ROTOR AT START " " TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD " " TRIPPING : EXT 1" " TRIPPING : EXT 2" " TRIPPING : EQUATION A" " TRIPPING : EQUATION B" " TRIPPING : EQUATION C" " TRIPPING : EQUATION D" " TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD2 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD3 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD4 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD5 TRIP " " TRIPPING : t RTD6 TRIP " " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" " TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220


Conversion rules for the current values of the disturbance record F58

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 45/94

* In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value x 2 / 800

* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value x 2 / 32700

Conversion rules for the current values of the fault data record F59 * In order to obtain the phase current value at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary phase current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800

* In order to obtain the negative sequence component value of the current at phase CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary negative current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary phase CT value / 800

* In order to obtain the earth current value at the earth CT primary, apply the following formula : Primary earth current value (in Amps) = Remote value x Primary earth CT value / 32700

Origin of Triggering of the perturbographic recorder F60 Value1 : Trigger on Trip output relay RL1 information Value 2 : Trigger on instantaneous thresholds Value 3 : Trigger o n (TC) via communication Value 4 : Trigger via a Logic Input Value 5 : No active perturbo.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 46/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 47/94

COURIER DATABASE V4.D

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 48/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 49/94

2.

K-BUS PROTOCOL AND COURIER LANGUAGE


The serial communications are transmitted on K-Bus, a multi-drop network proposing an instantaneous interface with IEC 870 - 5 - FT1.2 standards. The language and the communication protocol used are Courier. This concept permits especially to the generic programmes of the principal units to access to a high number of different relay types without need to change permanently the principal unit program for each relay type. The relays forms a distributed database in which the principal workstation proceeds to a selective call of the slave relays in order to know all necessary information. Courier has a concept for the functions with a selective call system which allows not a slave periphery to communicate directly with the central unit when one shall informs another about a particular event. The slave workstation has to wait that the principal workstation asks for the information. With Courier each information is given into a box with a code of the length and the database type. In knowing the database format the reception periphery can read them.

2.1

K-BUS K-Bus is a communication system developed for connecting the slave peripheries in remoting on the central unit, permitting them to execute all remote monitoring and remote control functions using the appropriated communication language. K-Bus is not able to permit a direct communication between the slave peripheries. Only a communication between the central unit and the slave peripheries can be established. The principal characteristics of the K-Bus are his profitability, his high security level, his installation facility and his user friendliness.

2.1.1

K-Bus transmission layer The communication port is supported on the reception levels and the voltage transmission RS485 with galvanic isolation assured by a transformer. A selective call protocol is used. No relay unit is allowed to transmit before having received a validation message without any error detection. The transmission is synchronous on a pair of isolated waves. The data are coded FM0 with a clock signal for eliminate all CC-component, allows the signal to cross the transformers. With the exception of the central units, each network node is passive. No defective unit from the system can interfere with the communications established with the other units. The message format is HDLC. The data transmission speed is 64 kbits/s.

2.1.2

K-Bus connection The connection on the K-Bus port is realised by screwed terminals of 4 mm of MIDOS standards or by FASTON-connectors. A cabled pair is sufficient to realise the connection, knowing that the polarity is not important. It is recommended to use an external screen earth linked at the end of the principal workstation only. The screen has to be fixed with a M4 screw following the wiring scheme. The functioning of the K-BUS network is guaranteed for 32 units connected on 1000 meters of cables. Thanks to the data code method, the polarity of the Bus cable connection is not important. N.B. : The K-Bus network has to finish with a 150 ohms resistance on each end of the Bus. The principal workstation can be placed anywhere on the network. This command point has to be unique.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 50/94 2.1.3 Auxiliary equipment

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

For communication with the relay it is necessary to have at least one converter case K-Bus/IEC870-5 of the type KITZ and a computer suitable software, an interconnection cable RS232 for connecting the KITZ to the computer and a software conform to the specification of the Courier protocol. 2.2 Relay courier database The Courier database is two dimensional structure with each cell in the database being referenced by a row and column address. Both the column and the row can take a range from 0 to 255. Addresses in the database are specified as hexadecimal values, eg 0A02 is column 0A (10 decimal) row 02. Associated settings/data will be part of the same column, row zero of the column contains a text string to identify the contents of the column. This data base is given in the APPENDIX 1. 2.3 Setting changes This uses a combination of three commands to perform a settings change: Enter Setting Mode - checks that the cell is settable and returns the limits Pre load Setting - Places a new value to the cell, this value is echoed to ensure that setting corruption has not taken place, the validity of the setting is not checked by this action. Execute Setting - Confirms the setting change, if the change is valid then a positive response will be returned, if the setting change fails then an error response will be returned. Abort Setting - This command can be used to abandon the setting change. This is the most secure method and is ideally suited to on-line editors as the setting limits are taken from the relay before the setting change is made. However this method can be slow if many settings are being changed as three commands are required for each change. 2.4 2.4.1 Systems integration data Address of the relay The relays can have any address between 1 and 254 included. The address 255 corresponds to the global address to which all relays and all the other slave peripheries are responding. The Courier protocol specifies that no response can be resent from a slave periphery to a global message. This permits to avoid that all peripheries respond at the same time creating by this way user conflict on the Bus. Each relay possess an address settled on 255 in order to guarantee that in case of his connection to the operating network, his address cannot create any conflict with the address of another periphery already in exploitation. In order to permit to a new periphery to get entirely operational, his address has to be settled. The address can be modified manually in capturing the password, than in following the method of the setting change through the user interface on the front plate of the relay. The same, if the network functioning on a computer takes in charge the autoaddressing, the relay address can be settled on 0 to active the characteristic of autoaddressing of the computer software. The relay receives then the next valid address on the Bus.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 51/94

If the address is 255 or not known, she can be modified in sending a new address, with a global message, to a periphery possessing a particular serial number. This method is used for those peripheries which are not having any user interface for reading or changing the address in process. 2.4.2 Measured values Each measured value can be periodically extracted by a selective call of the MiCOM relay. 2.4.3 Status word Each response of a slave periphery contains an octet of status. This octet is resent by the relay at the beginning of each message for signalling important data. The principal workstation can be design for responding automatically to these important data. The contained indications are the following : Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 2.4.4 1 = recording of disturbance available for retrieval 1 = reserved 1 = reserved 1 = relay busy, no response possible in time 1 = reserved 1 = recording of events available for retrieval 1 = reserved 1 = reserved

Control status word The Control status word is located in the cell of the menu 000D. It is used for transmitting the control information of the slave periphery to the central unit. Nevertheless, the relays described in this manual are protection relays, which are not using this control characteristic.

2.4.5

Logic input status word The logic control input status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0020. The 2 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 2 logic inputs. This cell is accessible only in reading. Bit 0 : logic input 1: CB/Contactor status (52a interlock) Bit 1 : logic input 2 : speed switch Bit 2 : logic input 3 Bit 3 : logic input 4 Bit 4 : logic input 5

2.4.6

Output relay status word The output relay status can be observed in proceeding to a selective call from the cell of menu 0021. The 8 bits inferior of the returned value indicating the status of each of the 5 output relays. This cell is accessible only in reading. Bit 0 : relay RL1 (TRIP) Bit 1 : programmable relay RL2 Bit 2 : programmable relay RL3 Bit 3 : programmable relay RL4 Bit 4 : watchdog relay Bit 5 : programmable relay RL5

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 52/94 2.4.7 Control information

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

The status of internal controls triggered by the auto-control program of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0022. The bits 0 to 6 indicate the material controls of the product. Bit 0 analogue output error Bit 1 communication error Bit 2 EEPROM memory error Bit 3 analogue signals acquisition error Bit 4 internal clock error Bit 5 EEPROM calibration error Bit 6 RAM memory error Bit 7 RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit) 2.4.8 Protection Indication The protection indications gives the status of different protection elements in the relay. The fault indications are generated with these indications. They are transmitted in the events recordings, in case of a fault recording. This is the only way to access to these indications. The status of internal protection indication of the relays can be observed in proceeding to a selective call of the cell of menu 0023, 0024 and 0025. The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0023: Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function protection I>> (instantaneous signal) Io> (instantaneous signal) Io>> (instantaneous signal) Ii> (instantaneous signal) Ii>> (instantaneous signal) I< (instantaneous signal) tI>> (time delayed signal) tIo> (time delayed signal) tIo>> (time delayed signal) tIi> (time delayed signal) tIi>> (time delayed signal) tI< (time delayed signal) Thermal alarm Thermal overload Thermal base start-up inhibition ( forbidden start) Reserved

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 53/94

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0024: Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Start-up detection Motor halted Excessive long start Stalled rotor whilst running Locked rotor at start Limitation of the start number (START NB LIMITATION) Minimum time between two starts EXT 1 timer EXT 2 timer Equation A Equation B Equation C Equation D EXT 3 timer EXT 4 timer Function protection Re-acceleration phase in progress

The following table presents the list of the protection indications of the cell 0025 : Bit position 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Function protection CB operating time alarm CB operation number alarm CB SA2n alarm t RTD1 Alarm or thermist 1 t RTD2 Alarm or thermist 2 t RTD3 Alarm t RTD4 Alarm t RTD5 Alarm t RTD6 Alarm t RTD1 Trip t RTD2 Trip t RTD3 Trip t RTD4 Trip t RTD5 Trip t RTD6 Trip Reserved

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 54/94 2.4.9 Measurement control

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

The control functions through a MiCOM P220 relay can be executed on a serial link. These functions are supported in particular on the changes of the individual relay settings, on the changes of the setting groups, on the remote control of the circuit breaker, as well as on the functions and the locking of the selected output relays. The remote control is limited in the control functions selected in the table of the relays menu. The CRC and the controls of the message length are used on each received message. No response is given for messages received with an error detection. The principal unit can be re-initialised in order to resent an order as often as wanted if he is not receiving any response or if he receives a response with an error detection. N.B. : The control commands are generally materialised by the change of the cell value. They dispose the same inherent security. No response is allowed for the global orders to avoid any user conflict of the Bus. For this type of order, a double start is used for the verification of the message by the relay. The relay transmits then a confirmation indicating that the control order or the change of setting has been accepted. If this is not the case, the relay is sending an error message.

2.4.10 Change of remote measurements The relay is only responding to the orders of a setting change through the serial port if the SD0 link = 1 is selected. The selection of the SD0 link = 1 is blocking all the changes of remote setting with the exception of the SC logical links and the password capture. When the SD0 link = 0 is selected, the remote setting are protected by the password. For changing the remote links, the password has to be first remote captured . and the SD and SD0 function links have to be settled on 1. 2.5 Event extraction Events can be extracted either automatically or manually . For automatic extraction all events are extracted in sequential order using the standard Courier mechanism, this includes fault. The manual approach allows the user to select events, faults at random from the stored records. 2.5.1 Automatic event extraction This method is intended for continuous extraction of event and fault information as it is produced via the rear port. When new event information is created the Event bit is set within the Status byte, this indicates to the Master device that event information is available. The oldest, unextracted event can be extracted from the relay using the Send Event command. The relay will respond with the event data, which will be either a Courier Type 0 or Type 3 event. The Type 3 event is used for fault records. Once an event has been extracted from the relay the Accept Event can be used to confirm that the event has been successfully extracted. If all events have been extracted then the event bit will reset, if there are more events still to be extracted the next event can be accessed using the Send Event command as below.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 2.5.2 Event types

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 55/94

Events will be created by the relay under the following circumstances: 2.5.3 Change of state of output contact Change of state of opto input Protection element operation Alarm condition Setting Change Fault Record (Type 3 Courier Event)

Event format The Send Event command results in the following fields being returned by the relay: Cell Reference Timestamp Cell Text Cell Value

APPENDIX 1 contains a table of the events created by the relay and indicates how the contents of the above fields are interpreted. Fault records will return a Courier Type 3 event which contains the above fields together with two additional fields: Event extraction column Event number

These events contain additional information which is extracted from the relay using the referenced extraction column. Row 01 of the extraction column contains a setting which allows the fault record to be selected. This setting should be set to the event number value returned within the record, the extended data can be extracted from the relay by uploading the text and data from the column. 2.5.4 Manual record extraction Column 02 of the database can be used for manual viewing fault records. The contents of this column will depend of the nature of the record selected. It is possible to select directly a fault record. Fault Record Selection (Row 01) - This cell can be used to directly select a fault record using a value between 0 and 4 to select one of up to five stored fault records (0 will be the most recent fault and 4 will be the oldest). The column will then contain the details of the fault record selected (row 02 to 0A) It should be noted that if this column is used to extract event information from the relay the number associated with a particular record will change when a new fault occurs.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 56/94 2.6 Disturbance record extraction

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

The stored disturbance records within the relay are accessible via the Courier interface. Select Record Number (Row 01) - This cell can be used to select the record to be extracted. Record 0 will be the oldest un-extracted record, older records will be assigned positive values, and negative values will be used for more recent records. To facilitate automatic extraction via the rear port the Disturbance bit of the Status byte is set by the relay whenever there are unextracted disturbance records. Once a record has been selected, using the above cell, the time and date of the record can be read from cell 02. The disturbance record itself can be extracted using the block transfer mechanism from cell B00B. As has been stated the rear Courier port can be used to automatically extract disturbance records as they occur. This operates using the standard Courier mechanism defined in Chapter 8 of the Courier User Guide.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 57/94

3.

LIST OF EVENTS CREATED BY THE RELAY


Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 "No EVENT" "REMOTE CLOSING" "REMOTE TRIPPING" DISTURBANCE RECORD TRIGGING SETTING CHANGE "I >>" "I0 >" "I2 >" "I <" (instantaneous signal) (instantaneous signal) (instantaneous signal) (instantaneous signal) Event type Cell Reference 0 0 0 0 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0023 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024

"I0 >>" (instantaneous signal) "I2 >>" (instantaneous signal) "THERMAL ALARM" "t RTD1 ALARM" "t RTD2 ALARM" "t RTD3 ALARM" "t RTD4 ALARM" "t RTD5 ALARM" "t RTD6 ALARM" " THERMAL OVERLOAD" "FORBIDDEN START" "t I >>" "t I0 >" "t I2 >" "t I <" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal)

"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) "REACCELERATION IN PROGRESS" "EMERGENCY START" "START-UP DETECTION" " MOTOR HALTED" "EXCESSIVE START TIME" "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "START NUMBER LIMITATION"

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 58/94 Code 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 "EXT 1" "EXT 2" "EQUATION A" "EQUATION B" "EQUATION C" "EQUATION D" "t RTD1 TRIP" "t RTD2 TRIP" "t RTD3 TRIP" "t RTD4 TRIP" "t RTD5 TRIP" "t RTD6 TRIP" "THERMISTOR 1" "THERMISTOR 2" "CB OPERATING TIME ALARM" "CB OPERATION NUMBER ALARM" "CB SAn ALARM" "TRIPPING : THERMAL OVERLOAD" "TRIPPING : t I >>" "TRIPPING : t I0 >" "TRIPPING : t I2 >" "TRIPPING : t I2 >>" "TRIPPING : t I <" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) Event type "MINIMUM TIME BETWEEN 2 STARTS"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Cell Reference 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0024 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0025 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

"TRIPPING : t I0 >>" (time delayed signal)

"TRIPPING : EXCESSIVE START TIME" "TRIPPING : STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "TRIPPING : LOCKED ROTOR AT START" "TRIPPING : EXT 1" "TRIPPING : EXT 2" "TRIPPING : EQUATION A" "TRIPPING : EQUATION B" "TRIPPING : EQUATION C" "TRIPPING : EQUATION D" "TRIPPING : t RTD1 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD2 TRIP"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Code 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 Event type "TRIPPING : t RTD3 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD4 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD5 TRIP" "TRIPPING : t RTD6 TRIP" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 1" "TRIPPING : THERMISTOR 2" "ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS USING KEYPAD" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM" "REMOTE ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ALL ALARMS" "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC INPUTS STATUS" "MAJOR RELAY FAILURE" "MINOR RELAY FAILURE" "CHANGE OF THE LOGIC OUTPUTS STATUS" "EXT 3" "EXT 4" "OUTPUT RELAY LATCH" "CHANGE OF CONFIGURATION GROUP" N.B. :

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 59/94 Cell Reference 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0020 0022 0022 0021 0024 0024 0021 0

"ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF ONE ALARM USING KEYPAD" 0

- When the cell reference is different of zero this means that the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance. - When the cell reference is equal to zero, only the event on edging edge is generated. - Sixteen bits are available in the string of characters to describe the contain of the Courier cell: - On event occurrence, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 1 . - On event disappearance, the corresponding bit of the associated format is set to 0 .

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 60/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

4.

LIST OF FAULTS CREATED BY THE RELAY


Code 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 "No FAULT" "REMOTE TRIPPING" "t I >>" "t I0 >" "t I2 >" "t I <" (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) (time delayed signal) Event type

"t I0 >>" (time delayed signal) "t I2 >>" (time delayed signal) "EXCESSIVE START TIME" "STALLED ROTOR WHILST RUNNING" "LOCKED ROTOR AT START" THERMAL OVERLOAD" "EXT 1" "EXT 2" "EQUATION A" "EQUATION B" "EQUATION C" "EQUATION D" "t RTD1 TRIP" "t RTD2 TRIP" "t RTD3 TRIP" "t RTD4 TRIP" "t RTD5 TRIP" "t RTD6 TRIP" "THERMISTOR 1" "THERMISTOR 2"

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 61/94

P220/EN GC/B43

5.
Data Type NON IMPLEMENTE ASCII Password(4 bytes) AAAA Smmp ALST P220 Setting Setting Data 32/127/1 65/90/1 Setting 65/90/1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

COURIER DATABASES

Col

Row

Menu Text

00

Passw Level 0 0 1 1

ASCII Text (16 bytes) ASCII Text (4 bytes) ASCII Text (6 bytes) NON IMPLEMENTE ASCII Text (7 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 000000 XXXX Hz 1 255 * Data Setting Data Setting

50/60/10 0/255/1

1 1

Unsigned Integer ASCII Text (16 characters) Binary flag (5 bits) V X.A

1*

Data Data Data

1 1 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 11 12-1F 20

SYSTEM DATA Language SYS Password Fnlinks: NON IMPLEMENTE SYS Description SYS Plant Ref. SYS Model No. SYS Firmware No. SYS Serial No. SYS Frequency SYS Comms Level SYS Rly Address Plant Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE Control Status Word: NON IMPLEMENTE SYS Setting Grp Load shed Stage: NON IMPLEMENTE SYS Software Ref Unused, reserved SYS Logic Stat

21

SYS Relay Stat

Binary flag (5 bits)

0: log input 1 = O/O 1: log input 2 = speed 2: log input 3 3: log input 4 4: log input 5 relay 1 (trip) 1: relay 2 2: relay 3 3: relay 4 4: relay watch-dog

Data

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 62/94
Data Type Binary flag (8 bits) Ind Min/Max/Step Passw Level 1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

22

SYS Alarms

23

SYS Pseudo-TS group 1 Stat

Binary flag (15 bits)

Values Depend Cell Type (* : default) Data 0: Ana output err 1: Comm err 2: Eeprom err data 3: Ct error 4: Clock error 5: Eeprom err calib 6: Ram error 7: RTD/therm err Data I>> 1: Ie> 2: Ie>> 3: Ii> 4: Ii>> 5 : I< 6: tI>> 7: tIe> 8: tIe>> 9: tIi> 10: tIi>> 11 : tI< 12 : Thermal Alarm 13 : Thermal Overload 14 : Thermal forbid Start 1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 63/94


Data Type Binary flag (16 bits) Ind Min/Max/Step Passw Level 1

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

24

SYS Pseudo-TS group 2 Stat

Values Depend Cell Type (* : default) Data 0: Reacceleration 1: Start Detect 2: Motor Stopped 3: Start too long 4: Stalled Rotor 5: Locked Rotor 6: Start nb limit 7: Time between 2 Starts 8: Ext. 1 9: Ext. 2 10: Equation 1 11: Equation 2 12: Equation 3 13: Equation 4 14: Ext. 3 15: Ext. 4

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 64/94
Data Type Binary flag (3 or 15 bits) Ind Min/Max/Step

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

25

SYS Pseudo-TS group 3 Stat

Values Depend Cell Type (* : default) 0: SW operating Time Data 1: SW operating nb 2: SA 2n 3: RTD1 Alarm (if option RTD) 3: Thermistor 1 (if option Thermistors ) 4: RTD2 Alarm (if option RTD) 4: Thermistor 2 (if option Thermistors ) 5: RTD3 Alarm (option RTD or Thermistors) 6: RTD4 Alarm (option RTD or Thermistors) 7: RTD5 Alarm (option RTD or Thermistors) 8: RTD6 Alarm (option RTD or Thermistors) 9: RTD1 Trip (option RTD) 10: RTD2 Trip (option RTD) 11: RTD3 Trip (option RTD or Thermistors) 12: RTD4 Trip (option RTD or Thermistors) 13: RTD5 Trip (option RTD or Thermistors) 14: RTD6 Trip (option RTD or Thermistors)

Passw Level 1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 65/94


Data Type Binary flag (11 bits) 0: Unlck Trip Cont. 1: Ack all alarms 2: Trip 3: Close 4: Emergency start 5: Config change 6: Order 1 7: Order 2 8: Dist. trig 9: Start maintenance 10: End maintenance Setting 0/2047/1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

01

00 01

USER CONTROL USR Remote Control

02 5* 1 PHASE A I >> 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

FAULT RECORDS Record number Occur fault date Active set group Phase in fault Phase detected by Magnitude

Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

1/5/1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

07

Ia Magnitude

08

Ib Magnitude

09

Ic Magnitude

0A

In Magnitude

Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) IEC DATE Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text (14 bytes) ASCII Text (14 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 66/94
Data Type 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 Hz 12.34 A Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

03

00 01

MEASUREMENTS Ia RMS

02

Ib RMS

03

Ic RMS

04

IN RMS

05

I1 positive

06

I2 negative

07

I0 zero

08

Frequency

09

Max Ph current

Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 67/94


Data Type Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx xxxx Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

04

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

STATISTICS Total trip number Operator trip number Therm trip tI>> trip tI0>; tI0>> trip tIi>; tIi>> trip tIstart trip tIstall trip Locked rotor trip I< trip RTD1 trip (if option RTD) RTD2 trip (if option RTD) RTD3 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD4 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD5 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD6 trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) Thermistor 1 trip (if option Thermistor) Thermistor 2 trip (if option Thermistor) Equation A trip Equation B trip Equation C trip Equation D trip

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 68/94
Data Type xxx % xxx % xxx s xxx C xxx C xxx C xxx C xxx C xxx C xx k Ohm xx k Ohm xxx xxx s xxx A xxx s xxx xxx xxx h Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Data 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

05

00 01

PROCESS I FLC Per Cent

02

03 04

05

06

07

08

09

0A

0B

0C 0D 0E

0F 10 11 12

Courier floating point number Thermal state Courier floating point number Time before TH trip Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Temperature RTD1 (if option RTD) Courier floating point number Temperature RTD2 (if option RTD) Courier floating point number Temperature RTD3 (if option RTD or Courier floating point Thermistor) number Temperature RTD4 (if option RTD or Courier floating point Thermistor)) number Temperature RTD5 (if option RTD or Courier floating point Thermistor) number Temperature RTD6 (if option RTD or Courier floating point Thermistor) number Temperature R1 (if option Thermistor) Courier floating point number Temperature R2 (if option Thermistor) Courier floating point number Permit start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Time before start Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Last start I Courier floating point number Last start time Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Motor start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Emergency start number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Motor operat hours Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 69/94


Data Type Data Data Data 1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

06

00 01

SW MONITORING SA2 IA

02

SA2 IB

03

SA2 IC

04 05 0.0 s

SW operation nb SW operation time

Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Data Data 1 1

08 IEC870 Time & Date Indexed string

Data Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/3/1

1 1 1 1 1

0D

00 01 00 01

TIME: Date/Time CONFIG. SELECT Start detection

02

Thermistor 1 type

(if option Thermistor) Indexed string

03 Indexed string

Thermistor 2 type

(if option Thermistor) Indexed string

04

RTD type Thermistor) Indexed string

(if option RTD or

05

Analog output type (if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog output)

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 2 3 0 1

O/O * O/O + I PTC * NTC PTC * NTC PT100 Ni 120 Ni 100 Cu 10 4 - 20 mA 0 - 20 mA

Setting

0/1

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 70/94
Data Type Indexed string 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0/6 Ind Min/Max/Step Passw Level 1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

06

Transmitted signal on Analog output (if option RTD, or Thermistor, or Analog output)

Values Depend Cell Type (* : default) Setting Ia Ib Ic I0 Th State % load Time before Authorized Start Time before Thermal Trip

0E Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) 1000 * 1* 1000 * 1*

00 01 02 03 04

CT RATIO CFG Prim Ph CT Ratio CFG Sec Ph CT Ratio CFG Prim E CT Ratio CFG Sec E CT Ratio

Setting Setting Setting Setting

1/3000/1 1/5/4 1/3000/1 1/5/4

1 1 1 1

0F Unsigned Integer Indexed string Indexed string 0 1 0 1

00 01 02 1* YES NO YES NO

SETTING GROUPS Select setting group Group 1 visible

Setting Setting Setting

1/2/1 0/1/1 0/1/1

1 1 1

03

Group 2 visible

20

00 01 02 03 Binary (1 bit) 0 Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number

0F01=1 Disabled * / Enabled Disabled * / Enabled 0.2 In 3* 1* min 0.5* Te1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0.2/1.5/0.01 0/10/1 1/64/1 0.5/2.0/0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Protection group n 1: visible if 0F02=1 [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD Thermal overload function? Thermal Inhibition? I >

04 05 06

Ke Te1 Te2

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 71/94


Data Type Setting Setting Setting 2009=1 Setting Setting 200B=1 Setting 0/1/1 20/100/1 0/1/1 20/100/1 0/1/1 1 1 1 1 1 1.0/20.0/0.5 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

07 0 0 Disabled * / Enabled 20* % Disabled * / Enabled 20* % No / Yes

Tr

Values (* : default) 1.0 *Te1

Passw Level 1

08

(if option RTD) (if option Thermistor)

Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit)

09 0A Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.10 In * 0.00* s Setting Setting Setting

RTD1 Influence? RTD3 Influence? Alarm? Alarm

0B 0C

Forbid start? Forbid start

21

00 01 02 Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.002 Ien* 0.00* s 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.002 Ien* 0.00* s

[50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT I>> function? I>>

0/1/1 1.0/12/0.01 0.0/100/0.01

1 1 1

03

t I>>

22

00 01 02

[50N/51N] EARTH FAULT Ie> function? Ie>

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

0/1/1 1 0.002/1.0/0.001 1 0.0/100/0.01 1 0/1/1 1 0.002/1.0/0.001 1 0.0/100/0.01 1

03

t Ie>

04 05

Ie>> function? Ie>>

06

t Ie>>

Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 72/94
Data Type 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 In* 0.04* s 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.25 In* Setting Setting Setting 0.04/200.0/0.01 1 0/1/1 0.2/0.8/0.05 1 1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.05/0.8/0.025 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

23

00 01 02

[46] UNBALANCE Ii> function? Ii>

03

t Ii>

04 05

Ii>> function? Ii>>

Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0F01=1 Disabled * / Enabled 1.0 I 1 s* 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 s* Disabled * / Enabled 1.0 I Disabled * / Enabled 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.10 In * 0.2* s 0.05* s Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/1.0/0.01 0.2/100.0/0.1 1 1 1 0.05/300.0/0.05 1 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.1/60.0/0.1 0/1/1 1.0/5.0/0.5 0/1/1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 1.0/5.0/0.5 1/200/1 1 1 1

24

00 01 02 Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)

[48] EXCES LONG START Exces long start function? Istart detection

03

t Istart

25

00 01 02 0

[51LR-50S] BLOCKED ROTOR Blocked rotor function? t Istall

03 04 0

Stalled rotor? Istall detection

05

Locked rotor at start?

Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit)

26

00 01 02

[37] LOSS OF LOAD I< function? I<

03

t I<

04

t Inhib

Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 73/94


Data Type 0F01=1 Disabled * / Enabled 0* C 0.0* s 0* C 0.0* s Disabled * / Enabled 0* C 0.0* s 0* C 0.0* s Disabled * / Enabled 0* C 0.0* s 0* C 0.0* s Disabled * / Enabled 0* C 0.0* s 0* C 0.0* s Disabled * / Enabled 0* C Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/1/1 0/200/1 Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

27

00

01 02 03

[49/38] RTD SENSORS (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD1 function? (if option RTD) RTD1 Alarm t RTD1 Alarm

04 05

RTD1 Trip t RTD1 Trip

06 07 08

RTD2 function? (if option RTD) RTD2 Alarm t RTD2 Alarm

09 0A

RTD2 Trip t RTD2 Trip

0B

Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0

0C 0D

RTD3 function? (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD3 Alarm t RTD3 Alarm

0E 0F

RTD3 Trip t RTD3 Trip

10

Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0

11 12

RTD4 function? (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD4 Alarm t RTD4 Alarm

13 14

RTD4 Trip t RTD4 Trip

15

Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)

16

RTD5 function? (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD5 Alarm

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 74/94
Data Type Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 0/200/1 0.0/100.0/0.1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.0/100.0/0.1 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

17 0* C 0.0* s Disabled * / Enabled 0* C 0.0* s 0* C 0.0* s

t RTD5 Alarm

Values (* : default) 0.0* s

Passw Level 1

18 19

RTD5 Trip t RTD5 Trip

1A

Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0

1B 1C

RTD6 function? (if option RTD or Thermistor) RTD6 Alarm t RTD6 Alarm Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number 0F01=1 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 kOhm Disabled * / Enabled 0.1 kOhm Setting Setting Setting Setting

1D 1E

RTD6 Trip t RTD6 Trip

28

00

01 02 0

[49] THERMISTOR (if option thermistor) Thermistor 1? Thermistor 1 Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number

0/1/1 0.1/30.0/0.1 0/1/1 0.1/30.0/0.1

1 1 1 1

03 04

Thermistor 2? Thermistor 2

40

00

Protection group n 2 Same characteristics than Group n1: visible if 0F03=1

60

00 01 02 03 04 05

[66] START NUMBER Start number limitation function? Treference Cold start number Hot start number T interdiction

Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Unsigned Integer (2 bytes)

Disabled * / Enabled 10 min* 0* 0* 1min*

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

0/1/1 10/120/5 0/5/1 0/5/1 1/120/1

1 1 1 1 1

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 75/94


Data Type Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Disabled * / Enabled 1min * Setting Setting 0/1/1 1/120/1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

61

00 01 02

MIN TIME BETW 2 START Time betw start function? T betw 2 start

62 Binary (1 bit) Courier floating point number 0 Disabled * / Enabled 0.2 s * Setting Setting

00 01 02

REACCEL AUTHORIZ Reaccel authoriz function? Volt dip durat Treacc

0/1/1 0.2/10.0/0.1

1 1

63 Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting

00 01

INPUTS INPUT 3

0/7/1

02 03 04 0.0s 0.0s 0.0s 0 0: Up / 1: Down

INPUT 4 INPUT 5 EXT 1

0: NONE * 1: EMERG ST. 2: SET GROUP 3: VOLT. DIP 4: DIST TRIG 5: EXT RESET 6: EXT 1 7: EXT 2 = INPUT 3 = INPUT 3 0.0s

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

0/7/1 0/7/1 0.0/200.0/0.01 0.0/200.0/0.01 0.0/200.0/0.01 0.0/200.0/0.01 0/1/1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1

05

EXT 2

06

EXT 3

07

EXT 4

08

Input edge type

Indexed String Indexed String Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit)

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 76/94
Data Type Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) 0 0 0000 * 0000 * Setting Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

64

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17

18

AND LOGIC EQUATIONS1 Therm Overload Alarm Forbid Start I >> tI >> Io > tIo > Io >> tIo >> tIi > tIi >> Excess long start t Istall Locked rotor tI < Start Number limit T betw 2 start t RTD1 Alarm (if option RTD) t RTD1 Trip (if option RTD) t RTD2 Alarm (if option RTD) t RTD2 Trip (if option RTD) t RTD3 Alarm (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD3 Trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD4 Alarm (if option RTD or Thermistor)

AND LOGIC EQUATIONS - 4 bits: bit 0: equation A bit 1: equation B bit 2: equation C bit 3: equation D

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 77/94


Data Type Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0000 * Setting 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Setting 0/15/1 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

19

(if option RTD or

Values (* : default) 0000 *

Passw Level 1

1A

(if option RTD or

1B

(if option RTD or

1C

(if option RTD or

1D

(if option RTD or

1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24

t RTD4 Trip Thermistor) t RTD5 Alarm Thermistor) t RTD5 Trip Thermistor) t RTD6 Alarm Thermistor) t RTD6 Trip Thermistor) Therm. 1 Therm. 2 EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 Success start

(if option thermistor) (if option thermistor)

65 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s* 0.0 s*

00 01

AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY EQU. A Toperat

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1 0.0/3600.0/0.1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

02

EQU. A Treset

03

EQU. B Toperat

04

EQU. B Treset

05

EQU. C Toperat

06

EQU. C Treset

07

EQU. D Toperat

08

EQU. D Treset

Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 78/94
Data Type Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) 0 0 0000 * 0000 * Setting Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

66

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 0A 0B 0C 0D 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

17

18

AUX OUTPUT RLY2 Therm Overload Alarm Forbid Start I >> tI >> Io > tIo > Io >> tIo >> tIi > tIi >> Excess long start t Istall Locked rotor tI < Start Number limit T betw 2 start t RTD1 Alarm (if option RTD) t RTD1 Trip (if option RTD) t RTD2 Alarm (if option RTD) t RTD2 Trip (if option RTD) t RTD3 Alarm (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD3 Trip (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD4 Alarm (if option RTD or Thermistor)

AUX OUTPUT RLY - 4 bits: bit 0: Output 2 bit 1: Output 3 bit 2: Output 4 bit 3: Output 5

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 79/94


Data Type Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) Binary (4 bits) 0 Setting 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0 0000 * Setting 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0/15/1 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 0 0000 * Setting 0/15/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Setting 0/15/1 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

19

(if option RTD or

Values (* : default) 0000 *

Passw Level 1

1A

(if option RTD or

1B

(if option RTD or

1C

(if option RTD or

1D

(if option RTD or

1E 1F 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 2A 2B 2C 2D 2E 2F 30

t RTD4 Trip Thermistor) t RTD5 Alarm Thermistor) t RTD5 Trip Thermistor) t RTD6 Alarm Thermistor) t RTD6 Trip Thermistor) Therm. 1 Therm. 2 EXT1 EXT2 EXT3 EXT4 Close order Trip order Order 1 Order 2 Succes start t EQUA t EQUB t EQUC t EQUD SW oper time SW oper nb SA2 Active group 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * 0000 * (0: group 1/ 1: group 2) 0000 *

(if option thermistor) (if option thermistor)

31

Latched relays

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 80/94
Data Type Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0/1/1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

67

00 01

TRIP OUPUT RLY Therm overload ?

02

tI >> ?

03

tIo > ?

04

tIo >> ?

05

tIi > ?

06

tIi >> ?

07

Exces long start ?

08

tIbloq ?

09

Locked rotor ?

0A

tI < ?

0B

t RTD1 trip ?

(if option RTD)

0C

t RTD2 trip ?

(if option RTD)

0D

(if option RTD or

0E

(if option RTD or

0F

(if option RTD or

10

(if option RTD or

11

t RTD3 trip ? Thermistor) t RTD4 trip ? Thermistor) t RTD5 trip ? Thermistor) t RTD6 trip ? Thermistor) Thermistor 1 ?

(if option thermistor)

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 81/94


Data Type Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0/1/1 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

12

Thermistor 2 ? (if option thermistor)

Passw Level 1

13

EXT1 ?

14

EXT2 ?

15

Equation A ?

16

Equation B ?

17

Equation C ?

18

Equation D ?

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Values (* : default) 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES

68 Binary (7 bits) 0: Latch tI>> 1: Latch tIo>> 2: Latch tIi>> 3: Latch EQUA A 4: Latch EQUA B 5: Latch EQUA C 6: Latch EQUA D

00 01

LATCH TRIP ORDER Latching Order

Setting

0/63/1

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 82/94
Data Type Disabled * / Enabled 0.05 s* Disabled * / Enabled 0* Disabled * / Enabled 0 exp+06 A * 1* 0.2 s* 0.2 s* Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 1 1 1 1 1 1 0.2/5.0/0.05 1 Setting Setting 0/1/1 0.05/1.0/0.01 1 1 Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

69

00 01 02

SW SUPERVISION SW Operating time? SW Operating time

03 04 05 06

SW Operating number? SW Operating number SA2n? Sa2n

07 08

n TRIP t

0/1/1 0/50000/1 0/1/1 0/4000/1 (*exp+06) 1/2/1 0.2/5.0/0.05

09

CLOSE t

Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Binary (1 bit) 0 Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Binary (1 bit) 0 Courier floating point number Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

6A Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string

00 01

LED 5 Therm overload ?

Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting

0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

02

Therm alarm ?

03

tI >> ?

04

tIo > ?

05

tIo >> ?

06

tIi > ?

07

tIi >> ?

08

tI < ?

09

Exces long start ?

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 83/94


Data Type Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Indexed string Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting Setting 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 Setting 0/1/1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Setting 0/1/1 Ind Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

0A

tIstall ?

Passw Level 1

0B

Locked rotor ?

0C

Emerg. restart ?

0D

Forbidden start ?

0E

0F

10

11

12

t RTD1,2,3 alarm ? (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD1,2,3 trip ? (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD4,5,6 alarm ? (if option RTD or Thermistor) t RTD4,5,6 trip ? (if option RTD or Thermistor) Thermistor 1,2 ? (if option thermistor)

13

EXT 1 ?

14

EXT 2 ?

15

Motor stopped ?

16

Motor running ?

17

Successful start ?

0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1

Values (* : default) 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES 0: NO * 1: YES

6B

00

LED 6 (= LED 5)

6C

00

LED 7 (= LED 5)

6D

00

LED 8 (= LED 5)

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 84/94
Data Type (VERSION A2 and >) Indexed String Indexed String Courier Number Courier Number Indexed String 0 1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0.1/3.0/0.1 0/1/1 0 1 2 0 Setting Data Setting Setting Setting 1/2/1 1 1 1 1 Stopped Triggered Running * Samples * 0.1 second 0.1 second ON INST ON TRIG Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Col

Row

Menu Text

70

00 01

RECORDER CONTROL Start/Trigger recorder

02 20 21 22

Recorder Source Pre time Post time Dist. Recorder Trig

80 Unsigned integer (1 byte) IEC870 Time & Date Binary Flag Indexed String 0 1 2 3 4 0* Setting Data Data

00 01

DISTURBANCE REC Record Number

0/5/1 (according 1 to context)

02 03

Trigger Time Available Channel Bit Mask

04

Channel Types

dd/mm/yy hh:mm 11111 Ia Ib Ic I0 Inputs/Outputs 01111 Upload Offsets Upload Scal. Factors

Data Data Data

05

Channel Offsets

06

Scaling Factors

Binary Flag 0: digital, 1: analogue Repeated group of Courier numbers Repeated group of Courier numbers Integer (2 bytes) Integer (2 bytes) Courier Number Repeated group of Integers

07-0F 10 11 12 13 14

NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved Record Length Trigger position Time Base NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved Upload Timer

Data Data Data Data

15-1F

NON IMPLEMENTED - reserved

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 Page 85/94


Data Type Data Data Data Data Data Ind Values (* : default) Depend Cell Type Min/Max/Step Passw Level

P220/EN GC/B43

Col

Row

Menu Text

20

Upload Channel 0

21

Upload Channel 1

22

Upload Channel 2

23

Upload Channel 3

24

Upload Channel Inputs/Outputs

Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags Repeated group of Integer/Bin. flags

90 5* 1 PHASE A I >> 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A 12.34 A

00 01 02 03 04 05 06

AUTOMAT. FLT Record number Occur fault date Active set group Phase in fault Phase detected by Magnitude

Setting Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data Data

1/5/1

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

07

Ia Magnitude

08

Ib Magnitude

09

Ic Magnitude

0A

In Magnitude

Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) IEC DATE Unsigned Integer (2 bytes) ASCII Text (14 bytes) ASCII Text (14 bytes) Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number Courier floating point number

BF Menu Cell (2) Menu Cell (2) ? NON IMPLEMENTE NON IMPLEMENTE

00 01 02 03 04 05

COMM SYSTEM DATA Dist Record Cntrl Ref Dist Record Extract Ref Setting Transfert Reset Demand Timers Reset Event Report

0x7000 0x8000

Data Data

P220/EN GC/B43

Page 86/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 87/94

IEC 60870-5-103 PROTOCOL

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 88/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 89/94

6.

IEC60870-5-103 INTERFACE
The IEC60870-5-103 interface is a master/slave interface with the relay as the slave device. This protocol is based on the VDEW communication protocol. The relay conforms to compatibility level 2, compatibility level 3 is not supported. The following IEC60870-5-103 facilities are supported by this interface: Initialisation (Reset) Time Synchronisation Event Record Extraction General Interrogation Cyclic Measurements General Commands

6.1

Physical connection and link layer Connection is available for IEC60870-5-103 through the rear RS485 port. It is possible to select both the relay address and baud rate using the front panel interface. Following a change, a reset command is required to re-establish communications. The parameters of the communication are the following : Even Parity 8 Data bits 1 stop bit Data rate 9600 or 19200 bauds

6.2

Initialisation Whenever the relay has been powered up, or if the communication parameters have been changed a reset command is required to initialise the communications. The relay will respond to either of the two reset commands (Reset CU or Reset FCB), the difference being that the Reset CU will clear any unsent messages in the relays transmit buffer. The relay will respond to the reset command with an identification message ASDU 5, the Cause Of Transmission COT of this response will be either Reset CU or Reset FCB depending on the nature of the reset command. The following information will be contained in the data section of this ASDU: Manufacturer Name : AREVA The Software Identification Section will contain the first four characters of the relay model number to identify the type of relay, eg P220. In addition to the above identification message, if the relay has been powered up it will also produce a power up event.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 90/94 6.3 Time synchronisation

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

The relay time and date can be set using the time synchronisation feature of the IEC60870-5-103 protocol. The relay will correct for the transmission delay as specified in IEC60870-5-103. If the time synchronisation message is sent as a send/confirm message then the relay will respond with a confirm. Whether the time synchronisation message is sent as a send confirm or a broadcast (send/no reply) message, a time synchronisation message will be returned as Class 1 data. 6.4 Spontaneous events The events created by the relay will be passed using the standard function type/information numbers to the IEC60870-5-103 master station. Private codes are not used, thus any events that cannot be passed using the standardised messages will not be sent. Events are categorised using the following information: Common Address Function Type Information number

Paragraph 2 contains a complete listing of all events produced by the relay. The common address is used to differentiate in circumstances where the relay produces more events of a certain type than can be passed using the standardised messages. For example the relay provides 5 binary inputs however only 4 binary inputs can be passed using the standardised messages. Using a different common address for the 5th binary allows each binary input to be indicated. The table in Paragraph 2 shows the common address as an offset value. The common address offset will be added to the station address in order to pass these events. 6.5 General interrogation The GI request can be used to read the status of the relay, the function numbers, information numbers and common address offsets that will be returned during the GI cycle are indicated in Paragraph 2. 6.6 Cyclic measurements The relay will produce measured values using ASDU 9 on a cyclical basis, this can be read from the relay using a Class 2 poll (note ADSU 3 is not used). It should be noted that the measurands transmitted by the relay are sent as a proportion of 2.4 times the rated value of the analogue value. 6.7 Commands A list of the supported commands is contained in Paragraph 2. The relay will respond to other commands with an ASDU 1, with a cause of transmission (COT) of negative acknowledgement of a command. 6.8 Disturbance records The disturbance records stored by the relay cannot be extracted using the mechanism defined in the IEC60870-5-103 standard. The relay maintains compatibility with the VDEW control system by transmitting an ASDU 23 with no disturbance records at the start of every GI cycle. 6.9 Blocking of monitor direction The relay does not support a facility to block messages in the Monitor direction.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 91/94

7.

IEC 60870-5-103 DATABASES


List of events produced by the relay Two kinds of ASDU can be generated for the events : ASDU 1 (time-tagged message) or ASDU2 (Time-tagged message with relative time) The list of events is the following with the associated values : INFORMATION NUMBER, TYPE OF ASDU ,CAUSE OF TRANSMISSION and COMMON ADDRESS OF ASDU Status indication in monitor direction : LED reset : INF <19>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Local Mode: INF <22>;TYP <1>; COT<1>, < ADDRESS> Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 2 : INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 3 : INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 4 : INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 2 : INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 3 : INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 4 : INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 5 : INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 2: INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 3: INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 4: INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 5: INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 6: INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT <1>, < ADDRESS>

Fault indications in monitor direction : Instantaneous I>> : INF <65>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Instantaneous Ie > : INF <96>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Instantaneous Ie >> : INF <97>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>> : INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> (general earth) Instantaneous I< : INF <100>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Instantaneous Iinv > : INF <104>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS>

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 92/94

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

Instantaneous Iinv >> : INF <106>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> General TRIP : INF <68>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> TRIP L1 : INF <69>; TYP <2>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> TRIP L2 : INF <70>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP L3 : INF <71>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> (OR of the instantaneous signals) TRIP I>> : INF <91>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Ie> : INF <92>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Ie>>: INF <93>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP I< : INF <101>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Iinv > : INF <105>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Iinv >> : INF <107>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Thermal ALARM : INF <110>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Thermal Overload : INF <111>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Blocked Rotor : INF <109>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Blocked Rotor at Starting : INF <113>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Excess Long Start : INF <120>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> RTD ALARM : INF <122>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> RTD TRIP : INF <123>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> Thermistor TRIP : INF <125>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Logic equation 1 : INF <86>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Logic equation 2 : INF <87>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Logic equation 3 : INF <88>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS> TRIP Logic equation 4 : INF <89>; TYP <2>; COT<1>, <ADDRESS>

Auto reclosure indications : Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> TRIPPING contact : INF <142>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> Closing contact : INF <143>; TYP <1>; COT<1>,<ADDRESS> N.B. : The double arrow means the event is generated on event occurrence and another is generated on event disappearance.

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220 List of data contained in General Interrogation Status indication in monitor direction :

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 93/94

Local Mode : INF <22>; TYP <1>; COT<9>, <ADDRESS> Setting group 1 : INF <23>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Setting group 2 : INF <24>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 1 : INF <27>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 2 : INF <28>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 3 : INF <29>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Aux input 4 : INF <30>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> Logic input 1 : INF <161>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 2 : INF <162>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 3 : INF <163>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 4 : INF <164>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Logic input 5 : INF <165>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 1: INF <176>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 2: INF <177>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 3: INF <178>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 4: INF <179>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 5: INF <180>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS> Output relay 6: INF <181>; TYP <1>; COT <9>, < ADDRESS>

Fault indications in monitor direction : Instantaneous Ie> or Ie>>: INF <67>; TYP <2>; COT <9>,<ADDRESS> (General earth) General start : INF <84>; TYP <2>; COT <9>, <ADDRESS> (OR of the instantaneous signals)

Auto reclosure indications : Closed Position : INF <140>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS> Open Position : INF <141>; TYP <1>; COT<9>,<ADDRESS>

Cyclic measurements First measurement : ASDU 9 (INF <148>): Only the RMS phase currents and the measured frequency are transmitted in standard format. The scaling factor is 2.4 for all the measurement ( e.g. 2.4* nominal values = 4096) The other measurements in ASDU 9 are indicated as NON Significant.

P220/EN GC/B43 Page 94/94 Second measurement ASDU 77 (INF<149>):

Technical Guide Communication MiCOM P220

5 measurements: In, I inverse, I direct, Thermal state (%), and the Full load current (%). These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not standardised. Third measurement ASDU 77 (INF <150>): RTD1 to RTD6 measurements if RTD option is present. Thermistor1 and 2 measurements plus RTD3, RTD4, RTD5, RTD6 if option is present. These values are conforms to the floating Format of the IEEE 32 bits. They are not standardised. List of the supported commands LED reset . This command corresponds to the acknowledgement of all alarms by the front plate on MiCOM P220 products : INF<19>, TYP<20>, COT <20> Setting group 1 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20> Setting group 2 : INF<23>; TYP<20>; COT <20> TRIPPING Contact : INF <142>; TYP<20>; COT <20> Closing Contact : INF <143>; TYP<20>; COT <20>

These commands make object of an acknowledgement by ASDU 1, positive if COT= <20> or negative if COT = <21>.

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN SV/B43

Default Setting Value

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 1/14

CONTENTS
1.
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3 1.1.4 1.1.5 1.3 1.3.1 1.3.2 1.4 1.4.1 1.1.2 1.4.3 1.4.4 1.4.5 1.4.6 1.4.7 1.4.8 1.4.9 1.5 1.5.1 1.5.2 1.5.3 1.5.4 1.5.5 1.5.6 1.5.7 1.5.8 1.5.9

DEFAULT SETTING VALUES


OP PARAMETERS menu CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu CT RATIO submenu LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Configuration Inputs submenu Date Format submenu COMMUNICATION Menu Courier MODBUSTM menu PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu. [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu [46] UNBALANCE submenu [48] EXCES LONG START submenu [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu [66] START NUMBER submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu INPUTS submenu AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

3
3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 11 12 12 13 13 13

1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 1.6 1.6.1 CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 2/14

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 3/14

1.
1.1

DEFAULT SETTING VALUES


The MiCOM P220 relay leaves the factory with the following default setting values : OP PARAMETERS menu Password Reference Frequency Date Time AAAA ALST 50 Hz 29/01/94 00:00:00

1.2 1.2.1

CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu Change Group Input Setting Group Default display Start detection criterion Analogue output type (optional) EDGE 1 IA RMS (phase A current) 52A (closing of the CB) 4 - 20 mA

Value transmitted by the analogue output IA RMS (phase A current) (optional) RTD type (optional) Thermistor 1 type (optional) Thermistor 2 type (optional) 1.2.2 CT RATIO submenu Primary rating of the phase CT Secondary rating of the phase CT Primary rating of the earth CT Secondary rating of the earth CT 1 1 1 1 PT100 PTC PTC

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 4/14 1.2.3 LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus LED 5 Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : tI>> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : tI< Allocation : Excessive long start Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : Emergency restart Allocation : Forbidden start Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD1, tDECL RTD2, tDECL RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD4, tDECL RTD5, tDECL RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : Motor Stopped Allocation : Motor running Allocation : Successful start 1.2.4 Configuration Inputs submenu Inputs : 54321 1.2.5 Date Format submenu Date Format PRIVATE 11111 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No LED 6 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

LED 7 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

LED 8 No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

Only if Courier Protocol, otherwise, this submenu will be implemented in COMMUNICATION Menu.

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 1.3 1.3.1 COMMUNICATION Menu Courier Communication enabled ? Relay address 1.3.2 MODBUSTM menu Communication enabled ? Data rate Parity Numbe of data bits Number of stop bits Relay address Format date 1.4 1.4.1 PROTECTION G1 and G2 Menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu. PROTECTION G1 Thermal overload function enabled ? No Thermal inhibition on starting function No enabled ? Threshold I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr Influence RTD (optional) Thermal alarm enabled ? Thermal alrm ALARM threshold Thermal inhibition of start enabled ? FORDID START threshold 1.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu PROTECTION G1 Short-circuit function enabled ? Threshold I>> tI>> No 1 In 0 second 0,2 In 3 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute No No 20 % No 20 % Yes 19 200 Bauds Without 8 1 1 Private Yes 255

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 5/14

PROTECTION G2 No No 0,2 In 3 1 minute 1 minute 1 minute No No 20 % No 20 %

PROTECTION G2 No 1 In 0 second

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 6/14 1.4.3 [50N/51N] EARTH FAULT submenu PROTECTION G1 Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io> tIo> Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io>> tIo>> 1.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu PROTECTION G1 Ii> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Threshold Ii> tIi> Ii>> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Threshold Ii>> 1.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu PROTECTION G1 Excessive long start function enabled ? Threshold Istart TIstart 1.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu PROTECTION G1 Block rotor function enabled ? tIstall Stalled rotor function enabled ? Threshold Istall Locked rotor at start function enabled ? 1.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu PROTECTION G1 Loss of load function enabled ? Threshold I< tI< Tinhib No 0,1 In 0,2 second 0,05 second No 0,1 second No 1 I No No 1 I 1 second No 0,05 In 0,04 second No 0,2 In No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,002 In 0 second

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

PROTECTION G2 No 0,002 In 0 second No 0,002 In 0 second

PROTECTION G2 No 0,05 In 0,04 second No 0,2 In

PROTECTION G2 No 1 I 1 second

PROTECTION G2 No 0,1 second No 1 I No

PROTECTION G2 No 0,1 In 0,2 second 0,05 second

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 1.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) PROTECTION G1 RTD1 enabled ? ALARM RTD1 tALARM RTD1 DECL RTD1 tDECL RTD1 RTD2 enabled ? ALARM RTD2 tALARM RTD2 DECL RTD2 tDECL RTD2 RTD3 enabled ? ALARM RTD3 tALARM RTD3 DECL RTD3 tDECL RTD3 RTD4 enabled ? ALARM RTD4 tALARM RTD4 DECL RTD4 tDECL RTD4 RTD5 enabled ? ALARM RTD5 tALARM RTD5 DECL RTD5 tDECL RTD5 RTD6 enabled ? ALARM RTD6 tALARM RTD6 DECL RTD6 tDECL RTD6 No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 7/14

PROTECTION G2 No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second No 0 C 0 second 0 C 0 second

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 8/14 1.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional) PROTECTION G1 Thermistor 1 enabled Thermist 1 Thermistor 2 enabled Thermist 2 1.5 1.5.1 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu [66] START NUMBER submenu Start Number Limitation function eneabled ? Treference Cold start number Hot start number Tinterdiction 1.5.2 MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu Time Between Start function enabled ? Tentre 2 dem 1.5.3 REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu Reacceleration authorization function enabled ? Treacc 1.5.4 INPUTS submenu Allocation : input n3 Allocation : input n4 Allocation : input n5 Time delay EXT 1 Time delay EXT 2 Time delay EXT 3 Time delay EXT 4 NONE NONE NONE 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second No 0,2 second No 1 minute No 10 minutes 0 0 1 minute No 0,1 k No 0,1 k

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

PROTECTION G2 No 0,1 k No 0,1 k

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 1.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu D Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : FORBID START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : Excessive long start Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : tI< Allocation : Start Nb Limitation Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 9/14

C 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

B 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(optional)

Allocation : tDECL RTD1 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Successful start

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 10/14 1.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset 1.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 5 Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : FORBID START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : Excessive long start Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : tI< Allocation : Start Nb Limitation Allocation : Tbetw 2 Start Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second 0 second

4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

(optional)

Allocation : tDECL RTD1 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD4 (optional)

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 5 Allocation : tALARM RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tDECL RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Close order (com RS485) Allocation : Trip order (com RS485) Allocation : order 1 (com RS485) Allocation : order 2 (com RS485) Allocation : Successful start Allocation : t EQU. A Allocation : t EQU. B Allocation : t EQU. C Allocation : t EQU. D Allocation : SW Operating Time Allocation : SW Operation Nb Allocation : S A n Active Group 1.5.8 LATCH OUTPUT RELAYS submenu OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 No No No No 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 11/14 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 12/14 1.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload Allocation output relay n1 : tI>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIi> Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>> Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start Allocation output relay n1 : tIbloq (stalled rotor while running) Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation output relay n1 : tI< Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD1 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD3 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD4 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD5 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tDECL RTD6 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 1 Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 2 Allocation output relay n1 : Equation A Allocation output relay n1 : Equation B Allocation output relay n1 : Equation C Allocation output relay n1 : Equation D 1.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tI>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIo>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIi>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa A Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa B Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa C Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa D

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No No

No No No No No No No

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220 1.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu SW Operating Time function enabled ? SW Operating Time SW Operation Number function enabled ? SW Operation Number S A n function enabled ? SAn Exponent n value Trip T Close T 1.6 1.6.1 CONSIGNATION Menu DISTURB RECORD submenu Pre-Time Post-Time Disturbance Rocord Trig 0,1 second 0,1 second ON INST No 0 ,05 second No 0 No 0 1 0,2 second 0,2 second

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 13/14

P220/EN SV/B43 Page 14/14

Technical Guide Default Setting Values MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN IN/B43

Installation Guide

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 1/8

CONTENT
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.
6.1 6.2 6.3

RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT STORAGE UNPACKING INSTALLING THE RELAYS DIMENSIONS
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals Communication port RS485 Earthing

3 3 4 4 4 5
5 6 6

7.

CASE DIMENSIONS

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 2/8

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 3/8

1.

RECEPTION OF THE RELAYS


Protection relays are generally robust. However it is appropriate to treat them with care before installing them on site. As soon as they arrive, the relays should be examined immediately, looking for any deterioration which could have occurred during transport. If there is any deterioration, make a claim against the forwarding company and inform AREVA T&D as soon as possible. Relays not intended for immediate installation must be stored in their protective polyethylene packaging.

2.

HANDLING ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT


The usual movements of a person easily generate electrostatic energy which may reach several thousand volts. The discharging of this voltage into devices comprising semiconductors, when handling electronic circuits, can cause severe deterioration. Such damage is not necessarily visible immediately. Nevertheless, it reduces the reliability of the circuit. Electronic circuits are completely protected against any electrostatic discharge when inside their housing. Do not expose them to any risk by needlessly taking the modules out of their housings. Each module has the best possible protection for its devices consisting of semiconductors. However, should it be necessary to withdraw the module from its housing, please take the following precautions to preserve the great reliability and long service life for which the equipment was designed and manufactured. 1. 2. Before taking the module out of its housing, touch the housing to balance your electrostatic potential. When handling the module, hold it by its front plate, or by its frame or by the edges of the printed circuit board. Do not touch the electronic components, the printed circuit conductors and the connectors. Before passing the module to another person, shake hands with him or her for example to balance your electrostatic potential. Place the module on an antistatic surface or an electrically conductive surface with the same potential as yourself. To store or transport the module, place it in conductive packaging.

3. 4. 5.

If you carry out any measurements on the internal electronic circuits of a device in service, earth yourself to exposed conductive parts by linking yourself to the housing by a conductive strap attached to your wrist. The resistance to earth of the conductive strap which you attach to your wrist and to the housing must be between 500 k and 10 M. If you do not have a device of this type, you must remain permanently in contact with the housing to prevent any static energy accumulating. The instruments used to take the measurements must be earthed to the housing insofar as this is possible. For further information on the procedures for safe working with all the electronic equipment, please consult standards BS5783 and IEC 147-OF. In a special handling area we strongly advise you to undertake a detailed analysis of the electronic circuits and working conditions according to the BS and IEC standards mentioned above.

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 4/8

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

3.

STORAGE
If the relays do not have to be installed immediately on reception, they must be stored protected against dust and humidity in their original carton. If dehumidifying crystals are placed in the relay packaging, it is advisable not to remove them. The effect of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced if the packaging is exposed to ambient conditions. To restore their original effectiveness, you need only to heat the crystals slightly for around an hour, before replacing them in their delivery carton. As soon as the packaging is opened, the dust which has accumulated on the carton risks settling on the relays. In the presence of moisture, the carton and the packaging can become humidified to the point where the effectiveness of the dehumidifying crystals is reduced. The temperature for storage should remain between - 25 C and + 70 C.

4.

UNPACKING
When unpacking and installing relays, take great care to avoid damaging the parts and changing the settings. Relays must be handled only by people who are experts in this field. As far as possible, the installation must remain clean, dry, free from dust and free from excessive vibration. The site must be well lit to facilitate inspection. Relays removed from their housings must not be exposed to dust or humidity. To this end, it is necessary to take great care when installing relays whilst construction work is taking place on the same site.

5.

INSTALLING THE RELAYS


The relays are supplied either individually or mounted in a cubicle. If separate relays have to be installed according to a particular drawing, please follow the mounting details indicated in publication R7012. If a MMLG test unit has to be incorporated, position it to the right of the set of relays (looking at them from the front). The modules must still be protected in their metal housings during installation on a cubicle. The design of the relays makes it possible to reach the mounting holes easily without taking off the cover. For individually mounted relays, a positioning diagram is normally supplied to indicate the centre of the holes and the layout of the cubicle. The corresponding dimensions are also indicated in publication N 1509.

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 5/8

6.
6.1

DIMENSIONS
Connection of power terminals, and Signals terminals The individual equipment are delivered with sufficient M4 screws to connect the relay via annular terminals, with a maximum recommended of two annular terminals per contact. If necessary, AREVA can provide annular terminals to crimp. 5 references exist according to the section of the wire (see below). Each reference corresponds to a sachet of 100 terminals.
Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8 (wire size 0.75 - 1.5mm) AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 015

Push-on connector 4.8 x 0.8mm (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) AREVA T&D reference: ZB9128 016

P0166ENb

M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 0.25 - 1.65mm) AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 901

M4 90 Ring Tongue terminal (wire size 1.5 - 2.5mm) AREVA T&D reference, Stafford part number ZB9124 900

P0167ENb

M4 90 Ring Tongue Terminal (wire size 2.53-6.64 mm)/12-10AWG. Reference AREVA T&D, Stafford part number ZB9124 904 Not isolated.

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 6/8

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

To insure the insulation of the terminals and to respect the security and safety instructions, an isolated sleeve can be used. We recommend the following cable cross-sections: Auxiliary sources Communication Port Other circuits Vaux : 1.5 mm see paragraph 6.2 1.0 mm

Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the maximum wire cross-section which can be used for the connector blocks (for current inputs and signals) is of 6mm by using non -insulated annular terminals. When only pre- insulated terminals can be used, the maximum wire cross-section is reduced to 2, 63 mm per annular terminal. If a more significant wire cross-section is necessary, two wires can be put in parallel, each one finished by a separate annular terminal. All the terminal blocks used for connections, except of the port RS485, must be able to withstand a nominal voltage of minimum 300V peak value. We recommend to protect the auxiliary source connection by using a fuse of type NIT or TIA with a breaking capacity of 16A. For security reasons, do never install fuses in current transformers circuits. The other circuits must be protected by fuses. 6.2 Communication port RS485 Connections to RS485 is made using annular terminals. It is recommended that a two core screened cable, is used with a maximum total length of 1000 m or a200nF total cable capacitance. Typical specification: Each core : Nominal conductor area : Screen : 16/0.2 mm copper conductor, PVC insulated. 0.5 mm per core Overall braid, PVC sheathed

Linear capacitance between conductor and earth : 100pF/m

Refer to chapter 2 paragraph 2.7.5 of this technical guide to get the RS232/RS485 converter references. 6.3 Earthing Each equipment must be connected to a local earth terminal by the intermediary of a M4 earth terminals. We recommend a wire of minimal section of 2,5 mm, with annular terminals on the side of the equipment. Because of the limitations of the annular terminals, the possible maximum section is of 6mm by wire. If a larger section is necessary, one can use cables connected in parallel, each one ending with an annular terminal separated on the side of the equipment. One can also use a metal bar. NOTE: To prevent any electrolytic risk between copper conductor or brass conductor and the back plate of the equipment, it is necessary to take precautions to isolate them one from the other. This can be done in several ways, for example by inserting between the conductor and the case a plated nickel or insulated ring washer or by using a tin terminals.

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 7/8

7.

CASE DIMENSIONS
MiCOM P220 relays are available in a 4U metal case for panel or flush mounting. Weight : about 2.5 Kg External size : Height Width Depth Case Front panel Case Front panel Case (flush part) Case + Front panel 152.2 mm 177 mm 148,1 mm 155 mm 140,8 mm 166 mm

NOTE :

For flush mounting, use the screws supplied by AREVA or others with head diameter smaller than the hole of the front face. In contrary, the active part will not be able to be plugged properly (do not add washers).

P220/EN IN/B43 Page 8/8

Technical Guide Installation Guide MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43

Commissioning and Maintenance of the MiCOM P220 Relay

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 1/32

CONTENT
1. 2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.2

REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING


Important notes Warning concerning the test methodology Injection test boxes Additional test equipments Communication Commissioning test records

3 3
3 3 3 3 3 4

3.
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.6

PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS


Allocation of terminals Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Visual inspection Earthing Current transformers (CTs) Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults. Cable shields and core balance CT Phase CTs orientation Auxiliary supply

4
4 4 4 4 5 5 5 6 6

4.
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.3.3 4.3.4 4.3.5 4.3.6 4.4 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.5

COMMISSIONING
Settings Measurements Thermal replica Test wiring diagram Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test. Cooling down constant time Tr test. FORBID START threshold test. Numerical example Phase overcurrent: I>> Test wiring diagram I>> threshold Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>>

7
7 7 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 13 13 14

Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test. 10

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 2/32 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.8 4.8.1 4.8.2 Test wiring diagram Io> threshold Io>> threshold Negative phase sequence threshold(46) Test wiring diagram I2> threshold I2>> threshold Automation functions Latching of relay outputs Wiring diagram Commissioning parameters data base PROTECTION Menu AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 20 20 21

5. 6. 7.
7.1 7.2 7.3

INTRODUCTION PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE CHECKS


Alarms Opto-isolators Output Relays

22 22 23
23 23 23

8. 9. 10.
10.1

METHOD OF REPAIR CHANGING THE BATTERY TYPES OF FAULTS


Equipment failure

24 25 26
26 26 26 27 27 27

10.1.1 Minor faults 10.1.2 Major faults 10.2 Problem solving 10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted 10.2.2 Communication

11. 12.

LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES

28 29

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 3/32

1.

REQUIREMENTS PRIOR TO COMMISSIONING


BEFORE COMMISSIONING THE RELAY, THE SAFETY SECTION OF THE MANUAL MUST BE READ.

When commissioning the MiCOM relay for the first time, 1/4 hour should be allowed to become familiar with the menu (MENU OF THE HMI section). With a laptop computer and AREVA setting software MiCOM S1, the user can configure the MiCOM P220 relay and save this setting on to a floppy disk. This file can subsequently be downloaded via the RS232 front port or via the RS 485 link on the rear of the MiCOM relays.

2.
2.1 2.1.1

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED FOR TESTING


Important notes Warning concerning the test methodology The test methodology described in this document tries as much as possible not to modify the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay once these have been set so as to help the tests and avoid errors. A reference commissioning configuration file (MiCOM P220) is provided in Chapter 8-3. All the tests of the MiCOM P220 relays are carried out by injecting currents to the secondary of the earth and/or phase CTs using appropriate injection test sets provided for this purpose.

2.1.2

Injection test boxes For reasons of convenience (weight, spatial requirement, transportation), a singlephase injection test set is more suitable for the tests and is able to perform all the tests relating to the MiCOM P220 relay. Thus, the following descriptions indicate how to conduct the tests with a single-phase injection test set. However, for certain tests, the three-phase wiring diagrams are easier to understand and, in this case, the description is also given in three-phase format. Single-phase injection test set 1 current (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms). Three-phase injection test set 3 currents (0 to 50 A), timer (precision 1 ms).

2.1.3

Additional test equipments 2 multimeters (precision 1%), 1 clip-on ammeter to measure the currents exceeding 10 A (precision 2%), Test plugs and wires to carry out injections to the CTs secondary (dimensions according to the currents injected).

2.1.4

Communication For all tests, the records can be made by using either the RS 485 rear port or the RS232 front port of the relay.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 4/32 2.2 Commissioning test records

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

Commissioning test records are available in the Chapter 8-3. The presentation of the Commissioning test records follows the sequence of the tests of this chapter. The contents of these Commissioning test records enable you to log: The name of the relay, station and circuit/plant The characteristics of the MiCOM P220 relay The various settings The results of the tests

3.
3.1

PRODUCT VERIFICATION TESTS


Allocation of terminals It is necessary to consult the appropriate wiring diagram of the MiCOM P220 whilst observing the various polarities and ground/earth connection.

3.2

Electrostatic discharge (ESD) Before any handling of the module (active part of the relay), please refer to the recommendations in the SAFETY section.

3.3

Visual inspection Carefully examine the relay to see if there has been any possible deterioration following installation. Check the serial number under the upper flap of the front panel. Also inspect the stated nominal values and the model number. Check if the external wiring corresponds to the appropriate relay diagram or the assembly diagram. When the relay is withdrawn from its case, use a continuity tester to check if the current short-circuits (phases and earth CTs) between the terminals indicated on the wiring diagram are closed.

3.4

Earthing Check if the earth connection of the case situated above the rear terminal block is used to connect the relay to a local earth bar. With several relays present, make sure that the copper earth bar is properly installed for solidly connecting the earthing terminals of each case.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 3.5 Current transformers (CTs)
DANGER :

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 5/32

NEVER OPEN CIRCUIT THE SECONDARY CIRCUIT OF A CURRENT TRANSFORMER SINCE THE HIGH VOLTAGE PRODUCED MAY BE LETHAL AND COULD DAMAGE INSULATION.

3.5.1

Use of a Core Balance CT for earth faults. If a core balance CT is used to detect earth faults, prior to any test, the user must check the following points: 1. 2. MV cable screens and core balance CT, No current flow through the MV cables.

3.5.2

Cable shields and core balance CT When mounting a core balance CT around electric cables, check the connection to the earth of the cable shields. It is vital that the earth cable of the shield moves in the opposite direction through the core balance CT. This cancels the currents carried by the cable shields through the core balance CT.

Electrical cables directed to the busbar

Screen shields

P1 P2

S1 S2

Other ends of electrical cables


P0041ENa
FIGURE 1 - SCREEN SHIELDS AND CORE BALANCE CT

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 6/32 3.5.3 Phase CTs orientation

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

It is necessary to check the orientation of the phase CTs by using the following method for instance: Have available a centre point analogue ammeter. Temporarily short-circuit the battery by checking the diagram polarities (+ on P1 and on P2). A positive current pulse traverses the milliammeter and the needle shall turn in a positive direction . Proceed this test for each phase CT.

+ _

P1

S1

+ mA

P2

S2

P0043ENa

FIGURE 2 - PHASE CT ORIENTATION TEST

NOTE :

De-magnetise the CT after the test. Inject a current starting from zero and slowly cross the CT nominal value and then decrease slowly to zero.

3.6

Auxiliary supply Check the value of the auxiliary supply voltage (terminals 33 and 34). The value measured shall be between 0.8 and 1.2 times the auxiliary supply nominal voltage indicated on the MiCOM P220 front panel (under the upper flap). Cortec code A F M Relay auxiliary voltage range * (Volts) 24 60 Vdc 48 150 Vdc 130-250 Vdc 100-250 Vca * The tolerance on the auxiliary voltage variations is 20/+20%. Auxiliary voltage range for the logic inputs * (Volts) 19 60 Vdc 32 150 Vdc 48 250 Vdc

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 7/32

4.

COMMISSIONING
The various operations described in this section are not exhaustive, but combine functions of MiCOM P220 relay which are able to confirm that the relay is operational. The use of appropriate AREVA T&D setting software connected to either the RS485 rear port or the RS232 front is not obligatory. The various indications associated with each commissioning module are described for the MiCOM P220 front panel display (LCD and LEDs). Commissioning covers the following points: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Input of settings, Validation of measurements, Validation of the thermal replica : I>, ALARM, FORBID START, Te1, Te2, Tr (49) Validation of phase protection thresholds and time delays : I>>, tI>> (50/51) Validation of earth protection thresholds and time delays : Io>, tIo>, Io>>, t Io>> (50N/51N) Validation of the Negative Sequence thresholds I2> and I2>> (46) Validation of the automation function: latching of the relay outputs.

4.1

Settings Input into the Commissioning Test Report file all of the settings of the MiCOM P220 relay.

4.2

Measurements The MiCOM P220 relay measures phase and earth currents as a True RMS value up to the 10th harmonic. The value(s) indicated take account of the phase and/or earth CT ratio.
WARNING: MiCOM P220 RELAY HAS 1 AND 5 AMP CURRENT INPUTS. CHECK THAT THE INJECTED CURRENT IS COMPATIBLE WITH THE SELECTED RANGE

4.3

Bring forward to the Setting report the values of phase and earth CTs. Energise the MiCOM P220 relay. Apply to each current input (as per wiring diagram) a current and check the values on the LCD display. Carry forward the results to the Commissioning test report (Applied values and relay values displayed)

Thermal replica Assign the thermal overload protective function to the trip output contact (relay RL1) and assign the ALARM protective function to an auxiliary output contact, RL2 for example. Set Ke equal to 3. In order to save time during testing, it is advisible to set all the thermal time constants to 5 minutes.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 8/32 The thermal operating time is given by the following:

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

t = T ln [((Ieq / I>)2 i) / [((Ieq / I>)2 thresh] = T ln [(K2 i) /(K2 thresh)] where : t = operating time in seconds T = thermal time constant value in seconds Ieq = equivalent thermal current value I> = thermal overload current threshold K = Ieq / I> ratio i = initial thermal state value ; in our case i equal to 0. thresh = alarm threshold (settable) or tripping threshold (fixed value equal to 1) This test is done by a single-phase injection, it results in that the relay sees equal current magnitudes for both positive and negative phase sequence quantities. Upon injection of a single phase current value equal to Iinject, the relay will see current magnitudes of Iinject/3 for both positive and negative phase sequences quantities. The equivalent thermal current value Ieq calculated by the relay will be given by the following: Ieq = (Ipositive2 + Ke . Inegative2 )0.5 = [(Iinject/3)2 + 3 . (Iinject/3)2]0,5 = 2/3 . Iinject Therefore, for an inject current value (Iinject ) equal to 3/2 . K . I> , the thermal equivalent current seen by the relay will be equal to K . I>. NOTE: When the Ke factor is not set to 3, in order for the relay to see a current equal to K. I>, the injected current value Iinject, ,will need to be equal to : [3/(1+Ke)0,5] . K . I>

4.3.1

Test wiring diagram The following diagram should be followed to tests the thermal replica. This diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220


INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY SUPPLY SWITCH
A
1A 50 51

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 9/32

+ Vaux - Vaux

33 34 22 24 49 L1 Binary input 1

CURRENT 1A

1A 52 53 1A 54 41 5A 42 43 5A 44 45

N A

MiCOM P220

CURRENT 5A
N

5A 46 37 35 36 6 4 2 12 10 8 18 16 14

WD Watchdog powered on RL1 Trip output 29 RL2 Programmable output Case earth

TIMERS

Stop Stop

30 31

+
RS 485 Communication port

RL3

Programmable output

32

P0213ENa

FIGURE 3 - THERMAL REPLICA TESTS WIRING

4.3.2

Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te1 test. 1. 2. 3. 4. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this test. Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value to 0. Inject a single-phase current equal to 2.7 times the I> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 1.8 Record the operating times of both alarm and trip threshold.

Checks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. ALARM alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. ALARM LED flashes (if programmed). Operation of the RL2 output contact (if ALARM is assigned to RL2). Check RL2 operates at a time equal to Te1. ln [1,82/(1,82 - ALARM)] . Then occurrence of TH OVERLOAD alarm message on the LCD display. Trip LED flashes. THERM OVERLOAD LED flashes (if programmed). Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1). Check RL1 operates at a time equal to 0.369 .Te1 .

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 10/32 4.3.3

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

Alarm threshold ALARM test, trip threshold test, and thermal constant time Te2 test. 1. 2. 3. 4. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept energise during this test. Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value to 0. Inject a single-phase current equal to 3.9 times the I> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, this corresponds to an overload ratio of K = 2.6. Record the operating times of both alarm threshold and trip threshold.

Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10. 4.3.4 ALARM alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. ALARM LED flashes (if programmed). Operation of the RL2 output contact (if ALARM is assigned to RL2). Check RL2 operates at a time equal to Te2 . ln [2.62/(2.62 - ALARM)] . Then occurrence of TH OVERLOAD alarm message on the LCD display. Trip LED flashes. THERM OVERLOAD LED flashes (if programmed). Operation of the trip output contact (relay RL1). Check RL1 operates at a time equal to 0.160 . Te2 .

Cooling down constant time Tr test. 1. 2. 3. 4. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) should be kept unenergise during this test. If required, inject a single phase current into the relay in order that the thermal status value reaches 90%. When the injected current is removed, record the value. Note this value i. Wait several minutes in order to give time for the thermal status to reduce to 30% (e.g. f<60%). Record the value. Note this value f. Note also the time from when the injected current was removed.

Checks : 1. Check the time from when the injected current was removed is approximately equal to Tr . ln (i / f ) .
A TIME DIFFERENCE MAY EXIST BETWEEN THE THEORETICAL TIME VALUE AND THE TEST TIME VALUE. CONSIDERING A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 5 MN, THE TIME DIFFERENCE IS TYPICALLY 17 SECONDS. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE CAN EASILY REACH100 SECONDS FOR A TR VALUE EQUAL TO 60 MN. SINCE COOLING OF THE THERMAL REPLICA FOLLOWS A LOGARITHMIC RULE AND THE VALUE IS DISPLAYED IN 2 DIGITS, A CHANGE IN 1% STEPS OF TAKES TIME. THIS TIME DIFFERENCE IS DUE TO THE RESOLUTION OF THE STEP DISPLAY, NOT THE A DRIFT IN THE RELAY ACCURACY.

CAUTION :

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 4.3.5 FORBID START threshold test. 1. 2. 3. 4.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 11/32

Set the FORBID START order to an auxiliary output contact (RL3 for instance), not the same than the one for which ALARM has been already assigned to. The binary input No 1 (terminals 22-24) shall be kept not energise during this test. Within the PROCESS menu, reset the thermal status value to 0. Inject a single-phase current equal to 3.9 times the I> threshold value into the phase A relay current input, which corresponds to a K = 2.6 overload ratio. Let the current injection during a time longer than Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 FORBID START)] , the value is greater than the FORBID START threshold.

Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. FORBIDDEN START alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. FORBIDDEN START LED flashes (if programmed). Operation of the RL3 output contact (if FORBIDDEN START is assigned to RL3) after a time equal to Tr. ln [2.62/(2.62 FORBID START)] .
THE THERMAL BASE START INHIBITION IS SELF-RESET WHEN THE VALUE FALLS UNDER THE FORBID START THRESHOLD, SO THE CHECKING OF THE ABOVE ITEMS SHALL BE DONE QUICKLY AFTER THE CURRENT INJECTION STOPPAGE.

CAUTION :

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 12/32 4.3.6 Numerical example

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

For each thermal replica test, the hereafter table mentions the operating time values relevant to the following relay setting values : I = 1 In Ke = 3 Te1 = Te2 = Tr = 5 mn ALARM = 90% FORBID START = 60%. Injected current value Theoretical single phase time value current (in seconds) (in Ampre) I> threshold value threshold test and constant time ALARM operating time Te1 value test Chapter 4.3.2 2.7 (In =1A) 98 s 111 s 43 s 48 s Measured time value (in seconds)

Trip thermal threshold 13.5 (In=5A) operating time 3.9 (In =1A)

I> threshold value threshold test and constant time ALARM operating time Te1 value test Chapter 4.3.3

Trip thermal threshold 19.5 (In=5A) operating time

Initial thermal value Constant time Tr value i= 90% No injection of test 122 s Final thermal value f current Chapter 4.3.4 = 60% FORBID START threshold value test Chapter 4.3.5 Minimum injection time 3.9 (In =1A) 19.5 (In=5A) 28 s

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 4.4 Phase overcurrent: I>>

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 13/32

One phase overcurrent threshold is available for the MiCOM P220 relay. Set the threshold on the trip output. 4.4.1 Test wiring diagram This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the threshold. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp phase current inputs (terminals 41-42, 43-44, 45-46). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp phase inputs, perform the same test on the 1 Amp inputs (terminals 49-50, 51-52, 53-54).
INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY SUPPLY
+ Vaux - Vaux
33 34

49 1A 50 51

CURRENT 1A

1A 52 53

1A 54

MiCOM P220

41 5A 42 43 5A 44 45

CURRENT 5A
N

5A 46 37 35 36 6 4 2 12 10 8

WD Watchdog powered on Trip output

Case earth 29

TIMER

Stop

RL1

30 31

+
RS 485 communication port

RL2

Programmable output

32

P0214ENa

FIGURE 4 - I>> TESTS WIRING

4.4.2

I>> threshold Values to be recorded 1. 2. l>> threshold for each phase tl>> time delay for each phase

I>> threshold check: 1. 2. 3. If tI>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of I>> threshold. If tI>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is close. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out of the I>> threshold.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 14/32 Checks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. I>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed). Trip output closes. I>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI>> time delay check : 1. Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by presetting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). 2. 4.5 Apply a current on one of the phases and measure the time delay tI>> by presetting the current above the I>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

Earth overcurrent : Io>, Io>> Two earth overcurrent thresholds are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. Set the various thresholds on the trip output.

4.5.1

Test wiring diagram This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the Io> and Io>> thresholds. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY SUPPLY
+ Vaux - Vaux
33 34

P1 CURRENT 1A
N A

S1
55 1A 56

P2

S2

MiCOM P220

CURRENT 5A
N

P1 P2

S1
47 5A 48

S2

37 35 36 6 4 2 12 10 8

WD Watchdog powered on

Case earth 29

TIMER

Stop

RL1

Trip output

30 31

+
RS 485 communication port

RL2

Programmable output

32

P0215ENa

FIGURE 5 - IO> AND IO>> TESTS WIRING

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 4.5.2 Io> threshold Values to be recorded : 1. 2. Io> threshold Time delay tIo>.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 15/32

Io> threshold check: 1. 2. 3. If the time delay tIo> is short, gradually increase the injection current up to the value of the Io> threshold. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out Io> threshold.

Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. Io> threshold LED flashes (if programmed). Trip output closes. Io> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tIo> time delay check : 1. 2. 4.5.3 Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by presetting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current on the earth input and measure the time delay tIo> by presetting the current above the Io> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

Io>> threshold Values to be recorded 1. 2. lo>> threshold tlo>> time delay.

Io>> threshold check : . 1. 2. 3. If tIo>> time delay is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of Io>> threshold. If tIo>> time delay is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check there is no trip. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip output is closed. Gradually decrease the injected current and note the value of the drop out Io>> threshold.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 16/32 Checks : 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. Io>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed). Trip output closes. Io>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tIo>> time delay check : . 1. 2. 4.6 Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by presetting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current on to the earth and measure the time delay tIo>> by presetting the current above the Io>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

Negative phase sequence threshold(46) Two overcurrent thresholds based on the negative sequence component are available in the MiCOM P220 relays. Each threshold is adjusted independently. The threshold I2> has a definite time characteristic while the second threshold I2>> is associated with an IDMT characteristic. Set the various thresholds on the trip output.

4.6.1

Test wiring diagram This test wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct tests relating to the I2> and I2>> thresholds. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 41-42). To carry out injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same test on the 1Amp input (terminals 49-50).
INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY SUPPLY
+ Vaux - Vaux
33 34

A N

49 1A 50 51 52 53 54

CURRENT 1A

MiCOM P220

A N

41 5A 42 43 44 45 46 37 35 36

CURRENT 5A

WD Watchdog powered on 29 RL1 Trip output

Case earth

TIMER

Stop

6 4 2 12 10 8

30 31

+
RS 485 communication port

RL2

Programmable output

32

P0216ENa

FIGURE 6 - I2> AND I2>> TESTS WIRING

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 17/32

Reminder: the MiCOM P220 relay calculates the negative phase sequence component using the formula: I2 = 1/3 (Ia + a2 Ib + a Ic) With a = cos (2/3) + j sin (2/3) With a single phase injection such as the proposed figure 5: Ib = 0 and Ic = 0 And thus I2 = 1/3 Ia In this case, the negative sequence current measured by the MiCOM P220 is equal to one third of the injected current. 4.6.2 I2> threshold Values to be recorded: 1. 2. I2> threshold Time delay tI2>.

I2> threshold check: 1. 2. 3. If the time delay tI2> is short, gradually increase the injected current up to the value of the I2> threshold. If the time delay tIo> is long, inject 0.95 x I threshold and check that there is no tripping. Then inject 1.1 x I threshold and check the trip. Gradually decrease the injected current and record the value of the drop out I2> threshold.

Checks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. I2> threshold LED flashes (if programmed). Trip output closes. I2> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI2> time delay check: 1. 2. 4.6.3 Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by presetting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current on to the earth input and measure the time delay tI2> by presetting the current above the I2> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

I2>> threshold Values to be recorded: 1. 2. I2>> threshold Time delay tI2>>.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 18/32 I2>> threshold check:

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

Inject a current equal to 2 x I threshold on one of the phase current inputs. Repeat the operation for various current values (n x I threshold with n ranging from 4 to 10, for example). Check that the values measured correspond to the following formula: Operating time t = 1.2/ (I2 / I threshold). Checks: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Alarm message on the LCD display. Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. I2>> threshold LED flashes (if programmed). Trip output closes. I2>> threshold output closes (if programmed).

tI2>> time delay check: 1. 2. 4.7 Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by presetting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 2 x I threshold). Apply a current onto the earth input and measure the time delay tI2>> by presetting the current above the I2>> threshold (I injected > 10 x I threshold).

Automation functions The MiCOM P220 relay has several automation functions (refer to the User Guide) The use of these functions is optional.

4.7.1

Latching of relay outputs All output relays of MiCOM P220 can be kept closed after the fault has disappeared (Relay Latching function in the AUTOMATION menu). The following test is suggested for the tIo>> threshold on the tripping output. The other thresholds and output relays can be tested identically. Set tIo>> threshold on the trip output with the relay latched. Leave the other threshold tIo> not latched.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 4.7.2 Wiring diagram

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 19/32

This wiring diagram makes it possible to conduct the test relating to the trip output latch on the tIo>> threshold. The diagram describes current injection on the 5 Amp earth current input (terminals 47-48). To carry out an injection on the 1 Amp earth input, perform the same tests on the earth 1 Amp input (terminals 55-56).
INJECTION TEST SET AUXILIARY SUPPLY SWITCH
A + Vaux - Vaux
33 34

13 15 L3 Binary input 3

P1 CURRENT 1A
N A

S1
55 1A 56

P2

S2

MiCOM P220

CURRENT 5A
N

P1 P2

S1
47 5A 48

S2

37 35 36 6 4 2

WD Watchdog powered on

Case earth 29

TIMER

Stop

RL1

Trip output

30 31 32

+
RS 485 communication port

P0217ENa

FIGURE 7 - LATCHING TEST SCHEME FOR tIO>>

Trip output latched check 1. 2. 3. Inject a current equal to 1.2 x I threshold Io>> on the earth input and check that the trip output relay is closed after tIo>>time delay. Gradually decrease the current down to zero and check that the trip output relay is still closed. Reinitialise the trip output relay either by clearing the alarm message (alarm menu) or by activation of the Logic Input 3 (Terminals 22-24).

Checks 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Display of an alarm message on the front panel LCD Alarm LED flashes. Trip LED flashes. Trip output relay closes. Trip output relay opens after alarm message cleared.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 20/32 4.8 Commissioning parameters data base

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

The various parameters shown below make possible to test functions of MiCOM P220 relays according to the commissioning tests (see section 4). Settings in accordance with the commissioning tests only are given. 4.8.1 PROTECTION Menu THERMAL OVERLOAD FUNCTION ? INHIBIT ? I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr RTD1 INFLUENCE ? ALARM ? ALARM FORBID START ? FORBID START I>> FUNCTION ? I>> tI>> Io> FUNCTION ? Io> tIo> Io>> FUNCTION ? Io>> tIo>> I2> FUNCTION ? I2> tI2> I2>> FUNCTION ? I2>> NO/YES* NO 1 In 3 5 mn 5 mn 5 mn NO YES 90% YES 60% NO/YES* 1 In 20 s NO/YES* 0.1 Ion 20 s NO/YES* 1 Ion 10 s NO/YES* 0.2 In 20 s NO/YES* 0.5 In

* During the commissioning tests, all the protective functions shall be preferably set off (NO) excepted the one which is being tested.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 4.8.2 AUTOMAT. CTRL Menu TRIP THERM OVERLOAD ? TRIP tI>> TRIP tIo> TRIP tIo>> TRIP tI2> TRIP tI2> ALARM FORBID START LATCH tI>> LATCH tIo>> LATCH tI2>> INPUT 3

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 21/32

YES (Trip order via output RL1) YES (Trip order via output RL1) YES (Trip order via output RL1) YES (Trip order via output RL1) YES (Trip order via output RL1) YES (Trip order via output RL1) 0001 (allocation to output RL2) 0010 (allocation to output RL3) NO YES NO EXT RESET

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 22/32

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

5.

INTRODUCTION
The MiCOM P220 Motor protection relays are fully numerical in design, implementing all protection and non-protection functions in software. The relays employ a high degree of self-checking and, in the unlikely event of a failure, will give an alarm. As a result of this, the maintenance does not need to be as extensive as with non-numerical electronic or electro-mechanical relays. As soon as an internal fault is detected , depending on its type (minor or major), an alarm message is displayed as a priority on the front panel LCD before the fault LED is illuminated (fixed or flashing) and the watchdog relay is closed (if the fault is a major one).
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE CONTENTS OF THE HANDLING AND SAFETY SECTION

6.

PERIODICAL MAINTENANCE
It is recommended that products supplied by AREVA T&D receive regular monitoring after installation. As with all products some deterioration with time is inevitable. In view of the critical nature of protective relays and their infrequent operation, it is desirable to confirm that they are operating correctly at regular intervals. AREVA protective relays are designed for a life in excess of 20 years. MiCOM P220 relays are self-supervising and so require less maintenance than earlier designs of relay. Most problems will result in an alarm so that remedial action can be taken. However, some periodical tests should be done to ensure that the relay is functioning correctly and the external wiring is intact. If a Preventative Maintenance Policy exists within the customers organisation then the recommended product checks should be included in the regular programme. Maintenance periods will depend on many factors, such as: the operating environment the accessibility of the site the amount of available manpower the importance of the installation in the power system the consequences of failure

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 23/32

7.

MAINTENANCE CHECKS
Although some functionality checks can be performed from a remote location by utilising the communications ability of the relays, these are predominantly restricted to checking that the relay is measuring the applied currents accurately and checking the circuit breaker maintenance counters. Therefore it is recommended that maintenance checks are performed locally (i.e. at the plant itself).

7.1

Alarms The alarm status LED should first be checked to identify if any alarm conditions exist. If so, press the read key ! repeatedly to step through the alarms. Clear the alarms to extinguish the LED.

7.2

Opto-isolators The opto-isolated inputs can be checked to ensure that the relay responds on energisation using the DC auxiliary supply specified on the product. This test checks that all the opto-isolated inputs are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has 5 opto-isolated inputs. The opto-isolated inputs should be energised one at a time. Ensuring correct polarity, connect the DC auxiliary supply to the appropriate terminals for the input being tested. The status of each opto-isolated input can be viewed using the OP.PARAMETERS menu. The opto-isolated input terminal allocations are given in the following Table: INPUT Opto input 1 Opto input 2 Opto input 3 Opto input 4 Opto input 5 DC auxiliary supply to terminals -Vaux 22 26 13 17 21 +Vaux 24 28 15 19 23 OP.PARAMETRS/INPUT value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

7.3

Output Relays This test checks that all the output relays are functioning correctly. The P220 relay has 6 output relays including the watchdog relay. Connect a continuity tester across the terminals corresponding to output relay 1 given in the following Table: Output RL1 RL2 RL3 RL4 RL5 Monitor terminals N/C 2-4 8-10 14-16 1-3 7-9 N/O 2-6 8-12 14-18 1-5 7-11 OP.PARAMETERS/OUTPUTS value 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 24/32

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

8.

METHOD OF REPAIR
If the relay should develop a fault whilst in service, depending on the type of the fault, the watchdog contacts will change state and an alarm condition will be flagged.
BEFORE CARRYING OUT ANY WORK ON THE EQUIPMENT, THE USER SHOULD BE FAMILIAR WITH THE HANDLING AND SAFETY SECTION. THIS SHOULD ENSURE THAT NO DAMAGE IS CAUSED BY INCORRECT HANDLING OF THE ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS.

The method is to replace the withdrawable part, but if it is necessary to replace the complete relay (with the case):
BEFORE WORKING AT THE REAR OF THE RELAY, ISOLATE ALL VOLTAGE AND CURRENT SUPPLIES TO THE RELAY. DISCONNECT THE RELAY EARTH CONNECTION FROM THE REAR OF THE RELAY

NOTE:

The case and rear terminal blocks have been designed to facilitate removal of the relay should replacement or repair become necessary without having to disconnect the scheme wiring. The MiCOM range of relays have integral current transformer shorting switches which will close when the withdrawable part is removed.
Upper flap

Lower flap

P0218ENb

NOTE:

The use of a magnetic bladed screwdriver is recommended to minimise the risk of the screws being left in the terminal block or lost.

REMOVE THE SCREWS USED TO FASTEN THE RELAY TO THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. THESE ARE THE SCREWS WITH THE LARGER DIAMETER HEADS THAT ARE ACCESSIBLE WHEN THE UPPER AND LOWER FLAPS ARE OPEN. WITHDRAW THE RELAY FROM THE PANEL, RACK, ETC. CAREFULLY BECAUSE IT WILL BE HEAVY DUE TO THE INTERNAL TRANSFORMERS.

To reinstall the repaired or replacement relay, follow the above instructions in reverse, ensuring that each terminal block is relocated in the correct position and the case earth is replaced.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 25/32

9.

CHANGING THE BATTERY


Each relay has a battery to maintain status data and the correct time when the auxiliary supply voltage fails. The data maintained includes event, fault and disturbance records and the thermal state at the time of failure. Instructions for Replacing the Battery Open the bottom flap on the front of the relay. Gently extract the battery from its socket. If necessary, use a small screwdriver to prize the battery free. Ensure that the metal terminals in the battery socket are free from corrosion, grease and dust. The replacement battery should be removed from its packaging and placed into the battery holder, taking care to ensure that the polarity markings on the battery agree with those adjacent to the socket. NOTE: Only use a type AA Lithium battery with a nominal voltage of 3.6V.

Ensure that the battery is securely held in its socket and that the battery terminals are making good contact with the metal terminals of the socket. Close the bottom access cover. Battery Disposal The battery that has been removed should be disposed of in accordance with the disposal procedure for Lithium batteries in the country in which the relay is installed.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 26/32

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

10.
10.1

TYPES OF FAULTS
Equipment failure An equipment failure (major or minor) cannot be acknowledged on the front panel (using the dedicated tactile button keypad). Only the disappearance of the cause will acknowledge the fault and hence reset the fault LED.

10.1.1 Minor faults Regarded by the MiCOM P220 relay as a minor fault is a communication failure. If communications are weak, MiCOM P220 protection and automation modules are not affected. Message : Communication fault Cause : Hardware or software failure of the communication module Action : Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. Alternative : If communication is not used, declare communication OFF in the COMMUNICATION menu (COM. OK = NO). 10.1.2 Major faults Major faults for MiCOM P220 relays are all software and hardware failures except the communication faults. As soon as this type of failure is detected, the watchdog (WD) is closed (36-37 terminals) and all operations are stopped (protection, automation, communication). 10.1.2.1 Hardware faults Messages : EEPROM failure Cause : Hardware failure (EEPROM components) Action : Withdraw the active part and return it to the factory for repair. 10.1.2.2 Software faults Messages : Software fault Cause : Failure of the software (checksum incorrect for example) Action : Restart the protection software If the software fault still remain after restart, withdraw the active part and return the module to the factory for repair.

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 10.2 Problem solving

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 27/32

10.2.1 Password lost or not accepted Problem : Password lost or not accepted Cause : MiCOM P220 relay is supplied with the password set to AAAA. This password can be changed by the user (refer to the OP PARAMETERS menu). Action : There is an additional unique recovery password associated to the relay which can be supplied by the factory or service agent, if given details of its serial number (under the upper flap of the front panel). With this serial number, contact your AREVA local dealer or the AREVA T&D After Sales Department. 10.2.2 Communication 10.2.2.1 Values measured locally and remotely Problem : The measurements noted remotely and locally (via RS485 communication) differ. Cause : The values accessible on the front panel via the Measurement menu are refreshed every second. Those fed back via the communication and accessible by the AREVA T&D Setting software generally have skeletal refreshing frequencies. If the refreshing frequency of the supervision software differs from that of the MiCOM P220 relay (1s), there may be a difference between indicated values. Action: Adjust the frequency for refreshing the measurements of the supervision software or of the setting software to 1 second. 10.2.2.2 MiCOM relay no longer responds Problem : No response from MiCOM P220 relay when asked by the supervision software without any communication fault message. Cause : Normally, this type of problem is linked to an error in the MiCOM P220 communication parameters. Action : Check that the MiCOM P220 communication parameters (data rate, parity, etc.) are in accordance with the supervision settings. Check the MiCOM P220 network address. Check that this address is not used by another device connected on the same LAN.Check that the other devices on the same LAN answer to supervision requests.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 28/32

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

11.

LIST OF THE RELAY ALARM MESSAGES


HARDW ALARMS Heading of the HARDW ALARMS messages, default display in case of either relay error alarm or RTDs/thermistor failure. To display the alarms messages, press the ! key. Communication error (communication using the rear RS485 port).

COMM. ERROR

EEPROM ERROR DATA

EEPROM memory error.

EEPROM ERROR CALIBR.

EEPROM calibration error.

CT ERROR

Analog signal acquisition error.

CLOCK ERROR

Internal clock error.

RAM ERROR

RAM memory error.

ANA OUTPUT ERROR

Analog output error.

RTD / Therm ERROR

RTD or thermistor in failure (short-wiring or open circuit)

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 29/32

12.

LIST OF THE MOTOR ALARM MESSAGES


MOTOR ALARMS Heading of the MOTOR ALARMS messages, default display in case of motor alarm. To display the alarms messages, press the ! key. Operation of the thermal overload function.

TH OVERLOAD

ALARM

Thermal alarm element active : ALARM (selfresettable)

FORBIDDEN START

Start inhibition based on thermal cirterion active (self resettable)

t I >> PHASE

Operation of the short-circuit function : time delayed element tI>>. Display of the faulty phase. Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed element t I0>

t I0>

t I0>>

Operation of the earth fault function : time delayed element t I0>>

t Ii>

Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed element tIi>

t Ii>>

Operation of the unbalance function : time delayed element tIi>>

LONG START tIstart

Operation of the excessive start tim function : time delayed element tIstart

MECHAN JAM tIstall

Operation of the stalled rotor while running function : time delayed element tIstall

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 30/32 LOCKED ROTOR

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 Operation of the locked rotor at start function

t I< PHASE

Operation of the loss of load function : time delayed element t I< Display the faulty phase Operation of the RTD1 temperature alarm element : time delayed element tALARM RTD1 (self-resettable)

t RTD1 ALAR

t RTD1 trip

Operation of the RTD1 temperature trip element : time delayed element tDECL RTD1 and so on for RTD2, RTD3, RTD4, RTD5 and RTD6 Operation of the Thermist1 temperature element

Thermist 1

Thermist 2

Operation of the Thermist2 temperature element

START NB LIMIT

Start inhibition based on the limitation of starts number function active (self resettable)

T between 2 start

Start inhibition based on the minimum time between 2 starts function active . (self-resettable).

RE-ACCELER AUTHOR

Authorised motor reacceleration sequence in progress (self-resettable)

EXT 1

Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 1.

EXT 2

Operation of the auxiliary timer EXT 2.

EQUATION A

And logic equation A active and so on for the AND logic equations B, C and D

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220 OPERATING TIME SW

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 31/32 Circuit breaker operating time has reached (or it has exceeded) the SW OPERATING TIME time threshold.

OPERATION NB SW

Circuit breaker operation number has reached (or it has exceeded) the SW OPERATION NB threshold.

SA2N

The sum of amperesn has reached (or it has exceeded) the SAn threshold.

CLEAR ALL ALARMS

To clear all the alarms, press the " key.

LATCHING RELAYS

Information issued from an element which has been affected to a latched relay.

P220/EN CM/B43 Page 32/32

Technical Guide Commissioning & Maintenance MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Technical Guide MiCOM P220

P220/EN RS/B43

Test Report

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 1/16

CONTENT
1.
1.1

TEST REPORT
Relay reference

3
3

2.
2.1 2.1.1 2.1.2 2.1.3 2.1.4 2.1.5 2.2 2.2.1 2.2.2 2.2.3 2.2.4 2.2.5

PRODUCTS CHECKS
Relay "OFF" Visual inspection External wiring Insulation resistor > 100M at 500Vdc Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) Auxiliary supply measured Relay "ON" Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) LEDs Logic Inputs Output relays Rear communication port

4
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 5 5

3.
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.4 3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 3.4.8 3.4.9

SETTINGS
EXPLOITATION menu CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu CT RATIO submenu LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS COMMUNICATION menu MODBUSTM Courier PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu [46] UNBALANCE submenu [48] EXCES LONG START submenu [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)

6
6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 10

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 2/16 3.5 3.5.1 3.5.2 3.5.3 3.5.4 3.5.5 3.5.6 3.5.7 3.5.8 3.5.9 AUTOMAT. CTRL menu [66] START NUMBER submenu MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu INPUTS submenu AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 10 10 10 10 11 11 12 12 14 14 14 15 15 15

3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu 3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu 3.6 3.6.1 CONSIGNATION menu DISTURB RECORD submenu

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 3/16

1.

TEST REPORT
Commissioning date: Motor reference: Circuit-breaker/Fuse-contactor reference: ____________________________________ ____________________________________ ____________________________________

1.1

Relay reference MiCOM relay type Serial number Earth current setting range Auxiliary voltage supply Communication protocol Language Have you already read the security instructions ? Yes/No* P220

Delete as appropriate

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 4/16

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

2.
2.1 2.1.1

PRODUCTS CHECKS
Relay "OFF" Visual inspection Damaged relay ? Nominal values conform to installation ? Relay earth connection (connected)? Yes/No * Yes/No * Yes/No *

2.1.2

External wiring Wiring controlled according to scheme ? Test unit connection (verified) ? Yes/No * Yes/No/No used *

2.1.3

Insulation resistor > 100M at 500Vdc Yes/No/ No Tested*

2.1.4

Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) Terminal 35 - 36 Terminal 36 - 37 Closed contact ? Contact resistance Open contact ? Yes/No * -------- / No measured Yes/No *

2.1.5

Auxiliary supply measured ----------Vac/ dc *

2.2 2.2.1

Relay "ON" Watchdog contact (auxiliary supply off) Terminal 35 - 36 Terminal 36 - 37 Open contact ? Closed contact ? Contact resistance Yes/No * Yes/No * -------- / No measured

2.2.2

LEDs HEALTHY LED (GREEN) is ON ALARM LED (YELLOW) is ON WD LED (ORANGE) is ON TRIP LED (RED) is ON Programmable LED correct functioning Yes/No * Yes/No * Yes/No * Yes/No * Yes/No *

2.2.3

Logic Inputs Correct functioning of isolated opto inputs 1 to 5 Yes/No *

Delete as appropriate

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 2.2.4 Output relays Relay 1 (RL1) Correct functioning Contact resistance Relay 2 (RL2) Correct functioning Contact resistance Relay 3 (RL3) Correct functioning Contact resistance Relay 4 (RL4) Correct functioning Contact resistance Relay 5 (RL5) Correct functioning Contact resistance N/C N/O 2.2.5 Rear communication port Communication standard N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O N/C N/O Yes/No *

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 5/16

-------- / No measured * -------- / No measured * Yes/No * -------- / No measured * -------- / No measured * Yes/No * -------- / No measured * -------- / No measured * Yes/No * -------- / No measured * -------- / No measured * Yes/No * -------- / No measured * -------- / No measured *

K-Bus / Courier * Modbus * CEI 60870-5-103 *

Communication present Protocol Converter Tested

Yes/No * Yes/No/ No used *

Delete as appropriate

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 6/16

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

3.
3.1

SETTINGS
EXPLOITATION menu Password Reference Frequency Date Hour Hz

3.2 3.2.1

CONFIGURATION menu CONFIG. SELECT submenu Change group input Setting group Default display Start detection criterion Analogue output type (optional) Value transmitted by the analogue output (optional) RTD type (optional) Thermistor 1 type (optional) Thermistor 2 type (optional)

3.2.2

CT RATIO submenu Primary rating of the phase CT Secondary rating of the phase CT Primary rating of the earth CT Secondary rating of the earth CT

3.2.3

LED 5, LED 6, LED 7 and LED 8 submenus LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8 Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : tI>> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : tI< Allocation : Excessive long start

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 7/16 LED 5 LED 6 LED 7 LED 8

Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : Emergency restart Allocation : Forbidden start Allocation : tALARM RTD1, tALARM RTD2, tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD1, tTRIP RTD2, tTRIP RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4, tALARM RTD5, tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD4, tTRIP RTD5, tTRIP RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 and Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : Motor Stopped Allocation : Motor running Allocation : Successful start 3.2.4 Submenus CONFIGURATION INPUTS EL 3.3 3.3.1 54321

COMMUNICATION menu MODBUSTM Communication enabled ? Data rate Parity Number of data bits Number of stop bits Relay address Date format (Yes/No) Bauds

3.3.2

Courier Communication enabled ? Relay address (Yes/No)

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 8/16 3.4 3.4.1 PROTECTION G1 and G2 menus [49] THERMAL OVERLOAD submenu

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Thermal overload function enabled ? Thermal inhibition on starting function enabled ? Threshold I> Ke Te1 Te2 Tr Influence RTD (optional) Thermal alarm enabled ? Thermal alarm ALARM threshold Thermal forbidden start function enabled ? FORDID START threshold 3.4.2 [50/51] SHORT-CIRCUIT submenu PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Short-circuit function enabled ? Threshold I>> tI>> 3.4.3 [50/51] EARTH FAULT submenu PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Io> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io> tIo> Io>> element of the earth fault function enabled ? Threshold Io>> tIo>> 3.4.4 [46] UNBALANCE submenu PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Ii> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Threshold Ii> tIi> Ii>> element of the unbalance function enabled ? Threshold Ii>> (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) % (Yes/No) (Yes/No) % (Yes/No) % mn Te1 Te1 (Yes/No) (Yes/No) % mn Te1 Te1 (Yes/No) (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) (Yes/No) In

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 3.4.5 [48] EXCES LONG START submenu

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 9/16

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Excessive long start function enabled ? Threshold Istart tIstart 3.4.6 [51LR/50S] BLOCK ROTOR submenu PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G 2 Block rotor function enabled ? tIstall Stalled rotor function enabled ? Threshold Istall Locked rotor at start function enabled ? 3.4.7 [37] LOSS OF LOAD submenu PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Loss of load function enabled ? Threshold I< tI< Tinhib 3.4.8 [49/38] RTD submenu (optional) PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 RTD1 enabled ? RTD1 ALARM tALARM RTD1 RTD1 TRIP tTRIP RTD1 RTD2 enabled ? RTD2 ALARM tALARM RTD2 RTD2 TRIP tTRIP RTD2 RTD3 enabled ? RTD3 ALARM tALARM RTD3 RTD3 TRIP tTRIP RTD3 RTD4 enabled ? (Yes/No) (Yes/No) C C (Yes/No) C (Yes/No) C C C (Yes/No) C (Yes/No) C C C (Yes/No) C (Yes/No) C (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) In (Yes/No) I (Yes/No) (Yes/No) I (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) I (Yes/No) I

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 10/16

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2

RTD4 ALARM tALARM RTD4 RTD4 TRIP tTRIP RTD4 RTD5 enabled ? RTD5 ALARM tALARM RTD5 RTD5 TRIP tTRIP RTD5 RTD6 enabled ? RTD6 ALARM tALARM RTD6 RTD6 TRIP TTRIP RTD6 3.4.9 [49] THERMISTOR submenu (optional)

C C (Yes/No) C C (Yes/No) C C

C C (Yes/No) C C (Yes/No) C C

PROTECTION G1 PROTECTION G2 Thermistor 1 enabled Thermist 1 Thermistor 2 enabled Thermist 2


3.5

(Yes/No) k (Yes/No) k

(Yes/No) k (Yes/No) k

AUTOMAT. CTRL menu [66] START NUMBER submenu Start Number Limitation function eneabled ? Treference Cold start number Hot start number Tinterdiction mn (Yes/No) mn

3.5.1

3.5.2

MIN TIME BETW 2 START submenu Time Between Start function enabled ? tbetw 2 starts (Yes/No) mn

3.5.3

REACCEL AUTHORIZ submenu Reacceleration authorization function enabled ? Treacc (Yes/No)

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 3.5.4 INPUTS submenu Allocation : input n3 Allocation : input n4 Allocation : input n5 t EXT 1 t EXT 2 t EXT 3 t EXT 4 3.5.5 AND LOGIC EQUATION submenu D Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : FORBID START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : Excessive long start Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : tI< Allocation : Start Nb Limitation Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 11/16

(optional)

Allocation : tTRIP RTD1 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD5 (optional)

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 12/16 D Allocation : tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Successful start 3.5.6 AND LOGIC EQUAT T DELAY submenu EQU. A Toperat EQU. A Treset EQU. B Toperat EQU. B Treset EQU. C Toperat EQU. C Treset EQU. D Toperat EQU. D Treset 3.5.7 AUX OUTPUT RLY submenu 5 Allocation : Thermal overload Allocation : Thermal alarm ALARM Allocation : FORBID START Allocation : I>> Allocation : tI>> Allocation : Io> Allocation : tIo> Allocation : Io>> Allocation : tIo>> Allocation : tIi> Allocation : tIi>> Allocation : Excessive long start Allocation : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation : tI< 4 C

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 B A

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 5 Allocation : Start Nb Limitation Allocation : Tbetw 2 starts Allocation : t
ALARM RTD1

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 13/16 4 3 2

(optional)

Allocation : tTRIP RTD1 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD2 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD3 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD4 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD5 (optional) Allocation : tALARM RTD6 (optional) Allocation : tTRIP RTD6 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation : EXT 1 Allocation : EXT 2 Allocation : EXT 3 Allocation : EXT 4 Allocation : Close order Allocation : Trip order Allocation : order 1 Allocation : order 2 Allocation : Successful start Allocation : t EQU. A Allocation : t EQU. B Allocation : t EQU. C Allocation : t EQU. D Allocation : SW Operating Time Allocation : SW Operation Nb Allocation : S A n Allocation : active group

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 14/16 3.5.8 LATCHING OUTPUT RELAYS OUTPUT 2 OUTPUT 3 OUTPUT 4 OUTPUT 5 3.5.9 TRIP OUTPUT RLY submenu Allocation output relay n1 : Thermal overload Allocation output relay n1 : tI>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo> Allocation output relay n1 : tIo>> Allocation output relay n1 : tIi> Allocation output relay n1 : tIi>> Allocation output relay n1 : Excessive long start Allocation output relay n1 : tIstall (stalled rotor while running) Allocation output relay n1 : Locked rotor (at start) Allocation output relay n1 : tI< Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD1 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD3 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD4 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD5 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : tTRIP RTD6 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 1 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : Thermist 2 (optional) Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 1 Allocation output relay n1 : EXT 2 Allocation output relay n1 : Equation A Allocation output relay n1 : Equation B Allocation output relay n1 : Equation C Allocation output relay n1 : Equation D 3.5.10 LATCH TRIP ORDER submenu Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tI>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIo>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH tIi>> Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa A Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa B Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa C Latching output relay n1 : LATCH equa D (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220 3.5.11 SW SUPERVISION submenu SW Operating Time function enabled ? SW Operating Time SW Operation Number function enabled ? SW Operation Number S A n function enabled ? SAn Exponent n value t Trip t Close 3.6 3.6.1 CONSIGNATION menu DISTURB RECORD submenu Pre-Time Post-Time Disturbance Record Trig (Yes/No) (Yes/No) (Yes/No)

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 15/16

P220/EN RS/B43 Page 16/16

Technical Guide Test Report MiCOM P220

BLANK PAGE

Publication: P220/EN T/B43


AREVA T&D's Automation & Information Systems Business www.areva-td.com T&D Worldwide Contact Centre online 24 hours a day: +44 (0) 1785 25 00 70 http://www.areva-td.com/contactcentre/